Hunter Win Align Manual

Form 3850T, 01-02
Supersedes Form 3850T, 09-00

WinAlign Alignment Software
Version 6.0
Operation Manual
 Copyright 1995- 2002 Hunter Engineering Company

Contents
HELP Tips .............................................................................................................................. ix
Inside WinAlign Alignment Software................................................................................ ix
Inside Help Tips...............................................................................................................ix
Using the Scroll Bar.............................................................................................. x
Using the HELP Buttons....................................................................................... xi
Selecting A Topic................................................................................................. xi
1. Getting Started ................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................1
“References” ..................................................................................................1
1.2 System Requirements .................................................................................................1
1.3 For Your Safety...........................................................................................................1
Hazard Definitions ................................................................................................1
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ........................................2
Precautions for Systems Equipped with HFSS Cordless Sensors.............................3
Specific Precautions/Power Source........................................................................3
North America ................................................................................................3
Other Regions ................................................................................................3
Equipment Specifications ......................................................................................4
Electrical........................................................................................................4
Atmospherics .................................................................................................4
Safety Summary...................................................................................................4
1.4 Operating the Console.................................................................................................5
Turning Power On.................................................................................................5
Using the “Softkeys”..............................................................................................5
Alignment Procedure Bar ......................................................................................7
AlignGuide Training and Information Guide..........................................................8
Using the Remote Control .....................................................................................8
Resetting the Program ..........................................................................................9
Just-In-Time Training ............................................................................................9
Using the Screen Saver ......................................................................................10
Turning Power Off...............................................................................................10
1.5 An Example Alignment Job with the ExpressAlign Adjustment Feature and DSP400 Sensors
......................................................................................................................................10
Example 1 (ExpressAlign ® / DSP400)...................................................................10
Example 2 (ExpressAlign ® / DSP400)...................................................................19
1.6 An Example Alignment Job with the ExpressAlign ® Adjustment Feature and without DSP400
Sensors .........................................................................................................................30
Example 1 (ExpressAlign ® / without DSP400).......................................................30
Example 2 (ExpressAlign ® / without DSP400).......................................................36
2. Basic Operation Information ......................................................................................45
2.1 Sensors and Targets.................................................................................................45
Mounting Sensors or Targets Onto Wheel Adaptors..............................................45
Mounting Wheel Adaptors Onto Wheels...............................................................46
Wheels with Rim Lip .....................................................................................46
Wheels with No Rim Lip ................................................................................46
Connecting Conventional Sensor Cables..............................................................47
Connecting Sensor Cables with Optional Rack Wiring Kit................................47
Connecting Sensor Cables without Optional Rack Wiring Kit ...........................47
Compensating Conventional Sensors...................................................................47
General Compensation of Conventional Sensors ............................................47
3-Point Compensation...................................................................................47
2-Point Compensation...................................................................................49
Rolling Compensation for Conventional Sensors...................................................50
WinAlign Software Operation Manual Contents • i

3-Point Procedure.........................................................................................50
2-Point Procedure.........................................................................................51
Procedure Limitations ...................................................................................52
Compensating DSP400 Sensors..........................................................................52
General Compensation of DSP400 ................................................................52
About Rolling Compensation .........................................................................52
Roll-Check® Measurement Feature ................................................................56
DSP400 Jacking Compensation.....................................................................57
2.2 Vehicle Specifications................................................................................................59
Mercedes Specifications......................................................................................59
Primary and Secondary Specification Groups.......................................................60
Vehicle Specification Memory..............................................................................60
Vehicle Recall Specifications Selection ..........................................................62
Selecting from the Vehicle Lists .....................................................................62
Selecting by Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).............................................62
Selecting “User Specifications” ......................................................................63
Editing Specifications..........................................................................................64
Entering and Editing Specifications................................................................64
Selecting Specification Formats.....................................................................65
Reducing Tolerances ....................................................................................66
Storing Specifications..........................................................................................66
Specification Notes.......................................................................................66
Storing “User Specifications” .........................................................................67
Deleting “User Specifications”........................................................................68
Factory Amended Specifications....................................................................69
WebSpecsT M Online Alignment Specification and Illustration Database..................69
Hardware and Software Requirements...........................................................70
User Authorization ........................................................................................70
Installation Instructions..................................................................................70
Using the WebSpecs Database .....................................................................70
Basic Operation............................................................................................72
Recalling WebSpecs.....................................................................................74
Deleting Saved WebSpecs............................................................................74
Other WebSpecs Features ............................................................................75
Selecting Display Units........................................................................................77
Printing Specifications.........................................................................................79
2.3 Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments ....................................................................79
Vehicle Plan View Status Indicator.......................................................................79
Sensor Troubleshooting ................................................................................80
Showing Measurements......................................................................................82
Bar Graph Adjustments.......................................................................................82
Bar Graph Groups ........................................................................................83
Context Sensitive Menu ................................................................................85
Zero Adjustments................................................................................................85
Showing and Selecting Front and Rear Axles .......................................................86
Alignment Procedure...........................................................................................86
Adjustment Order..........................................................................................86
Selecting the Procedure................................................................................86
DSP400 Alignment Reference .......................................................................87
Controlling Sensor Compensation........................................................................87
Measuring Caster, S.A.I., and Included Angle.......................................................88
Measuring Caster .........................................................................................89
Measuring S.A.I. and Included Angle..............................................................92
Measuring Caster and S.A.I./I.A. Simultaneously (FasterCaster®) ....................93
Live Caster...................................................................................................94
Lock-Check® Sensor Checking Feature..........................................................95
Measuring Additional Angles ...............................................................................95
Toe-Out-On-Turns ........................................................................................95
Maximum Steering Angle ..............................................................................97
Frame Angle Measurements..........................................................................98
Symmetry Angle/Set Back Measurements............................................................98
ii • Contents WinAlign Software Operation Manual

Set Back Procedures ....................................................................................98
Symmetry Angle/Set Back Definitions ................................................................101
Front Set Back............................................................................................101
Rear Set Back ............................................................................................101
Wheelbase Difference.................................................................................102
Right Lateral Offset.....................................................................................102
Left Lateral Offset .......................................................................................103
Track Width Difference................................................................................103
Axle Offset .................................................................................................104
Toe Raised Procedures.....................................................................................104
V.A.G. Flowchart ........................................................................................108
Ride Height Measurements ...............................................................................109
Ride Height Bar Graphs ..............................................................................112
Cross Ride Height.......................................................................................112
Ride Height Dependent Specifications..........................................................113
Zoom.........................................................................................................113
Printing Ride Height....................................................................................114
Tire Condition...................................................................................................115
Tire Information ................................................................................................118
Illustrating Vehicle Adjustments .........................................................................118
Rear Adjustments .............................................................................................120
Rear Shims ................................................................................................120
Using the Shim-Select® II Program...............................................................120
Using Non-adjustable 1-Piece Shims ...........................................................121
Using Adjustable 2-Piece Shims ..................................................................122
Overriding the Recommended Shim.............................................................123
Adjusting the Shim Display Size...................................................................124
Selecting the Default Shim Brand.................................................................124
Setting Up Rear Shims................................................................................124
Contacting Shim Manufacturers...................................................................124
Front Adjustments.............................................................................................125
Front Shims................................................................................................125
CAMM® (Control Arm Movement Monitor) for Front Cams and Slots ..............127
WINTOE ® Toe Adjustment System...............................................................130
Automatic Bushing Calculator® Adjustment Feature ............................................134
Adjusting With Axles Raised..............................................................................138
Saving “Before” Measurements..........................................................................140
Control Saved Measurements............................................................................140
Showing “Current” Measurements................................................................140
Showing “Before” Measurements.................................................................141
Saving “Current” Measurements as “Before” Measurements..........................141
Print Selections.................................................................................................142
Print Symptom Report.................................................................................143
Printing the Vehicle.....................................................................................143
Print Summary............................................................................................145
Print Specifications and Print Measurements................................................146
Print Bar Graphs.........................................................................................146
2.4 ExpressAlign ® Alignment Adjustment System............................................................147
3. Aligner Setup ................................................................................................................153
3.1 Setup .....................................................................................................................153
Factory Settings for Aligner Setup......................................................................154
3.2 Program/Account ....................................................................................................156
Setting Up the Program.....................................................................................156
Setting Up the Account......................................................................................156
Standard Account Selections.......................................................................156
Special Accounts........................................................................................157
3.3 Display ...................................................................................................................157
Setting Up the Display Language.......................................................................157
Setting Up the Logo Screen Advertising Message...............................................158
Setting Up the Logo Screen...............................................................................158
WinAlign Software Operation Manual Contents • iii

Setting Up the Dynamic Window Open Effect .....................................................159
Setting Up the AlignGuide Feature.....................................................................159
Setting Up Virtual View Model............................................................................160
3.4 Alignment Procedures .............................................................................................160
Setting Up the Common Alignment Preferences .................................................160
Setting Up the ExpressAlign/Power Tool Preferences .........................................161
Setting Up the Alignment Procedure ..................................................................163
Setting Up the Alignment Procedure Automatic Selection....................................164
Setting Up the Alignment Measurement Units and Formats .................................165
About Units ................................................................................................166
About Formats............................................................................................167
Setting Up the Caster Measurement Selection....................................................167
Setting Up the Reduce Number of Softkeys: Enable/Disable................................168
Setting Up the Enable/Disable Manufacturer Specific Procedures........................168
Setting Up the Set Vehicle Selection Options......................................................169
Default Vehicle Specification .............................................................................169
3.5 Bar Graphs.............................................................................................................170
Setting Up the Front Axle Bar Groups ................................................................170
Setting Up the Rear Axle Bar Groups.................................................................170
Setting Up the Cross Bar Graph/Additional Cross Angles: Enable/Disable............171
Setting Up the Show Specs on Bar Graphs: Enable/Disable ................................171
3.6 Printer....................................................................................................................172
Setting Up the Printer........................................................................................172
Setting Up the Print Language...........................................................................172
Setting Up the Printout Advertising Message ......................................................173
Setting Up the Print Warning Message: Enable/Disable.......................................173
Setting Up the Report Format............................................................................174
3.7 Sensors ..................................................................................................................174
Setting Up the Sensor Type...............................................................................174
Setting Up the Toe-Out-On-Turns Device...........................................................175
Updating the Sensor Software ...........................................................................175
Setting Up the Conventional Sensors Compensation Options ..............................176
Setting Up the DSP400 Alignment Reference.....................................................177
Setting Up the DSP400 Compensation Procedure ..............................................177
Setting Up the HF Channel Selection .................................................................178
Introduction ................................................................................................178
Scanning HF Channels ...............................................................................179
Setting HF/HFSS Channel...........................................................................181
Setting the Calibration Reminder .......................................................................182
3.8 Power Tools............................................................................................................183
Setting Up the Rear Shim Default Brand.............................................................183
Setting Up the Rear Shim Display Size...............................................................183
Setting Up the Front Bushing Default Brand........................................................184
Setting Up Virtual View......................................................................................184
3.9 Inspection...............................................................................................................185
Setting Up the Inspection Mode.........................................................................185
Setting Up the PartHunter Manufacturers .....................................................185
Setting Up PartHunter.......................................................................................186
3.10 Date and Time ......................................................................................................187
Setting Up the Date and Time............................................................................187
Setting Up the 12 or 24 Hour Clock Display........................................................188
Setting Up the Date Format...............................................................................188
3.11 Aligner Equipment.................................................................................................189
Setting Up “Calibrate Light Pen”.........................................................................189
Setting Up the Remote Control Channel.............................................................189
Setting Up the Select Logging Type ...................................................................190
3.12 Transmitting Measurements...................................................................................191
Setting Up the Transmit Measurements Destination............................................191
Setting Up the Transmit Measurements Format ..................................................192
3.13 Work Management................................................................................................193
Setting Up the Work Order Format.....................................................................193
iv • Contents WinAlign Software Operation Manual

Set Up the Custom Work Order Format..............................................................193
3.14 Logon...................................................................................................................196
Setting Up the Logon Option..............................................................................196
Setting Up the Logon Registry ...........................................................................197
Setting Up the Logon Password .........................................................................199
Setting Up Autobackup......................................................................................200
3.15 Tread Depth..........................................................................................................201
Setting Up the Defined Tread Depth Specification...............................................201
4. Detailed Operation Information................................................................................203
4.1 Primary and Popup Screens ....................................................................................203
4.2 Log On ...................................................................................................................204
Types of Log On...............................................................................................205
Manager Log On.........................................................................................205
User Log On...............................................................................................205
Setup Items......................................................................................................205
Logging On ......................................................................................................205
Logging Off ......................................................................................................206
Log On Registry................................................................................................206
Log On Password .............................................................................................206
4.3 Work Management Database...................................................................................207
Work Management Overview.............................................................................207
Custom Forms (Default Format).........................................................................208
Entering Customer Information ....................................................................208
Edit Customer Identification in Custom Forms...............................................208
Edit Work Order in Custom Forms ...............................................................209
Searching Work Orders...............................................................................211
Adding a Note to the Work Order.................................................................212
Saving the Current Work Order in Custom Forms .........................................212
Switching Between Reference and Current Work Orders in Custom Forms.....213
Managing the Database ....................................................................................213
Adding a New Vehicle to a Customer ID.......................................................213
Delete a Work Order...................................................................................214
Format 1 ..........................................................................................................214
Entering Customer Identification ..................................................................214
Edit Customer Identification.........................................................................215
Edit Work Order..........................................................................................216
Adding a Note.............................................................................................217
Recalling a Customer/Vehicle............................................................................218
Saving the Current Work Order....................................................................219
Recalling a Work Order...............................................................................220
Switching Between Reference and Current Work Orders...............................220
Managing the Customer Database...............................................................221
Adding a New Customer..............................................................................221
Adding a New Vehicle to a Customer...........................................................223
Changing Customer....................................................................................224
Deleting a Customer...................................................................................225
Deleting a Vehicle.......................................................................................225
Deleting a Work Order.................................................................................226
Filtering Data..............................................................................................227
Creating Form Letters .................................................................................230
Printing Form Letters...................................................................................232
Charting Alignments....................................................................................233
Exporting Customer Database Files.............................................................234
Importing DBF Files ....................................................................................235
4.4 Virtual View.............................................................................................................235
3-D Bar Graphs.......................................................................................235
Virtual View Angle Selector ...............................................................................236
Keyboard Simulator Demonstration....................................................................238
Dual Monitor (Kit 20-1450-1 required) ................................................................239
Virtual View/WinToe Demonstration...................................................................239
WinAlign Software Operation Manual Contents • v

4.5 Vehicle Inspection...................................................................................................240
“Point and Click” Inspection Mode......................................................................240
Entering Vehicle Inspection ...............................................................................240
Setting the Status in “Point and Click” or “Inspection Parts List” ...........................241
Context Sensitive Menus for “Point and Click” or “Inspection Parts List”..........242
MAP Inspection Videos ...............................................................................243
Sorting Options/Category ............................................................................244
Printing Inside “Point and Click” ...................................................................244
“Parts List” Inspection Mode ..............................................................................244
Selecting the Inspection Group & Sub-Groups....................................................244
Show All Modes..........................................................................................246
PartHunter Database ........................................................................................246
Introduction to PartHunter (Parts Information Catalog)...................................246
What is in the PartHunter Database .............................................................247
Using PartHunter Database.........................................................................248
Using PartHunter from the “Point and Click” Vehicle Inspection Screen..........248
Using PartHunter Database Information .......................................................249
Printing Selected Items and Illustrations.......................................................250
Including Illustrations in Printouts.................................................................251
Adding Notes to Printouts............................................................................251
Sample Printout..........................................................................................252
Sorting by Illustration...................................................................................252
Sorting by Part Name..................................................................................253
Toggling to the Parts List Screen .................................................................254
Using PartHunter from Vehicle Inspection Parts List......................................254
Toggling to “Point and Click” Inspection........................................................255
Setting PartHunter Database Options...........................................................255
Setting Up the Parts Information Setup.........................................................256
Motorist Assurance Program (MAP) Guidelines ..................................................256
Using MAP.................................................................................................257
Printing the Inspection Report............................................................................258
Cradle Inspection..............................................................................................258
4.6 Tools and Kits.........................................................................................................259
Introduction to Tools and Kits ............................................................................259
Accessing Tools and Kits ..................................................................................259
Tools and Kits Screens .....................................................................................261
Using Tools and Kits Videos..............................................................................263
Printing Reports................................................................................................264
Print Tools and Kits List Reports..................................................................264
Print Tools and Kits List and Pictures Reports...............................................265
4.7 On-The-Job-Training ...............................................................................................266
Training Videos.................................................................................................267
4.8 i•SHOP Standards...................................................................................................268
i•SHOP Overview .............................................................................................268
What are the i•SHOP Standards ..................................................................268
Where is i•SHOP found...............................................................................269
i•SHOP Scenario ..............................................................................................269
4.9 ASANetwork Manager.............................................................................................272
4.10 VideoTech ............................................................................................................275
VideoTech Overview.........................................................................................275
Accessing VideoTech........................................................................................275
Playing a VideoTech Video................................................................................276
Video Controls..................................................................................................276
VideoTech Instructional Videos..........................................................................277
4.11 Wheelbase and Track Width Measurements ...........................................................277
4.12 Suspension Body Dimension Audit (SBDA).............................................................279
4.13 Transmitting Measurements for Auditing.................................................................282
Transmitting Measurements in the C111 Format- Partial Measurements C111 Format A
........................................................................................................................287
Transmitting Measurements in the C111 Format- Partial Measurements C111 Format B
........................................................................................................................288
vi • Contents WinAlign Software Operation Manual

5. Equipment Information ..............................................................................................289
5.1 Conventional Sensors .............................................................................................289
Care and Cleaning of the Conventional Sensors .................................................289
RF*STIK...........................................................................................................289
HF Pod ............................................................................................................289
Charging Conventional Sensor Batteries (RF and HF/HFSS Sensors Only)..........290
5.2 DSP400 Sensors.....................................................................................................292
Target Maintenance..........................................................................................292
Camera Maintenance........................................................................................293
Care and Cleaning of the Targets ......................................................................293
DSP400L Vertical Lift Control Unit .....................................................................293
Operation...................................................................................................293
Preset Keys................................................................................................294
Safety Switches..........................................................................................294
5.3 Remote Indicator.....................................................................................................294
LED.................................................................................................................294
LCD.................................................................................................................294
5.4 Digital-PHOTO Option.............................................................................................295
5.5 CD-ROM Handling Instructions ................................................................................295
Handling the CD-ROM ......................................................................................295
Replacing the CD-ROM in Systems That Have Tray Type Players .......................295
5.6 Mouse ....................................................................................................................295
5.8 Operating the Standard Printer.................................................................................295
Changing Ribbon Cartridge (P/N 162-42-2): .......................................................296
Rear Feed Paper Loading .................................................................................296
5.9 Remote Control Transmitter.....................................................................................297
5.10 Program Shell.......................................................................................................297
Customizing with Program Shell ........................................................................297
5.11 WinAlign Multi-disk Backup/Restore .......................................................................300
Backup and Restore Procedures .......................................................................300
Backup Procedure ......................................................................................300
Restore Procedure......................................................................................302
5.12 Electronic Keys .....................................................................................................303
5.13 Conventional Sensor Calibration ............................................................................304
Calibration Reminder........................................................................................304
General Information ..........................................................................................304
Mounting DSP Sensors .....................................................................................305
Leveling the Calibration Fixture..........................................................................306
Starting the Calibration Procedure .....................................................................307
Procedure Basics..............................................................................................307
Selecting What to Calibrate ...............................................................................309
Performing the Calibration (Conventional Sensors) .............................................311
Mounting Prisms for Toe Transducers (DSP100, 200, 250 Series Sensors) ..........311
Mounting Spacers for Camber and Caster Adjust Transducers (All Sensors) ........312
Compensating Sensors for Runout (DSP100, 200, and 250 Series Sensors) ........312
Zero Calibration................................................................................................313
Storing Calibration Results ................................................................................313
Finishing Calibration .........................................................................................313
Calibration Fixture Adjustments .........................................................................313
Checking the Level Assembly......................................................................313
Adjusting Cams for DSP100, 200, and 250 Series Sensors ...........................314
Leveling the Top Casting.............................................................................315
Zero Calibration Using the Long Calibration Bar..................................................315
Software Requirements...............................................................................315
DSP Sensor Preparation.............................................................................315
Installing the Calibration Bar and Stands ......................................................316
Stabilizing the Calibration Stand ..................................................................317
Mounting the DSP Sensors .........................................................................317
Rotating the Calibration Bar.........................................................................318
Performing the Zero Calibration...................................................................318
WinAlign Software Operation Manual Contents • vii

5.14 DSP400 Sensor Calibration ...................................................................................318
5.15 DSP400 Sensor Calibration Check Procedure.........................................................319
6. Additional Information................................................................................................323
6.1 Cradle Adjustment...................................................................................................323
Why has the “cradle” become an alignment issue?........................................323
Is it possible to reposition a cradle without frame equipment? ........................323
What are the procedures for properly positioning a cradle assembly?.............324
Definition..........................................................................................................324
Why are cradle assemblies used?................................................................324
What is the proper position for the cradle?....................................................324
What happens if the cradle is out of position?...............................................325
Vehicles With Adjustable Cradles.......................................................................325
Front Adjustable Cradles.............................................................................325
Rear Cradles..............................................................................................325
Camber and Steering Axis Inclination (S.A.I.) Angles ..........................................326
What to look for? ........................................................................................326
How does the cradle position effect camber and S.A.I.? ................................326
What are the affects of an improperly positioned cradle?...............................327
Caster and Setback Angles ...............................................................................327
What are the signs to look for? ....................................................................327
How does the cradle position effect caster and setback angles? ....................328
6.2 Ride Height Specifications .......................................................................................329
Toe Change .....................................................................................................329
Camber (Side-Slip)...........................................................................................329
Shocks and Struts.............................................................................................329
Rear Springs ....................................................................................................329
7. Glossary .........................................................................................................................331
7.1 Alignment Types .....................................................................................................331
Geometric Centerline Alignment ........................................................................331
Thrust Line Alignment .......................................................................................332
Total Four-Wheel Alignment ..............................................................................332
7.2 Alignment Angles and Measurements......................................................................333
Camber............................................................................................................333
Caster..............................................................................................................333
Frame Angle.....................................................................................................333
Geometric Centerline ........................................................................................333
Included Angle (I.A.) .........................................................................................334
Individual Toe...................................................................................................334
Ride Height ......................................................................................................334
Setback............................................................................................................334
Steering Axis Inclination (S.A.I.).........................................................................334
Thrust Angle.....................................................................................................335
Thrust Line.......................................................................................................335
Total Toe..........................................................................................................335
Turning Angle...................................................................................................335
viii • Contents WinAlign Software Operation Manual

Filename: Ahlp0_0.doc
Directory: D:\Public\6.0_Help\6.0_Help
Template: C:\Program Files\Microsoft Office\Templates\D2H_NORM.DOT
Title: WinAlign Software Operation Manual
Subject:
Author: dc
Keywords:
Comments:
Creation Date: 11/25/1997 4:37 PM
Change Number: 433
Last Saved On: 1/29/2002 4:09 PM
Last Saved By: Don Cwiklowski
Total Editing Time: 75 Minutes
Last Printed On: 2/25/2002 4:13 PM
As of Last Complete Printing
Number of Pages: 10
Number of Words: 2,280 (approx.)
Number of Characters: 13,001 (approx.)
HELP Tips
Inside WinAlign Alignment Software

The following are registered or trademarked products and processe s within
WinAlign  software.
Automatic Bushing Calculator® Alignment Adjustment Feature

Cal-Check ® Sensor Calibration Accuracy Feature
CAMM ® Alignment Adjustment System
DSP Alignment® Sensor Technology
ExpressAlign® Alignment Adjustment System
FasterCaster® Alignment Measurement Feature
Lev el Reminder® Sensor Accuracy Check
Lock-Check® Alignment Measurement Feature
Picture Perfect® Alignment
Pro-Comp® Sensor Compensation System
Roll Check® Alignment Measurement Feature
Shim-Select® II Alignment Adjustment System
WinAlign® Alignment Software
WINTOE ® Alignment Adjustment System
AlignGuide™ Alignment Training Guide
PartHunter™ Database
Targets™ DSP400 Target (Design)
Video Tech™ Alignment Video Training Feature
Virtual View ™ Alignment Feature
WebSpecs™ Online Alignment Specification Database
Inside Help Tips

The “HELP” file is an on-line, context-sensitive copy of this manual. The “HELP”
softkey label is available on all screens, usually located in the K4 key of the lowest
menu level. If the “HELP” softkey is not present, press until it appears.
When K4 is pressed, a popup screen appears with the question “What kind of help
would you like?” The choices are:
“Cancel” will close the popup and return the screen where “HELP” was
pressed.
“Just-In-Time Training” will open a popup screen that can be useful to
train technicians. “Just-In-Time Training” is optional multimedia video
instructions.
WinAlign Software Operation Manual HELP Tips • ix

“Table Of Contents” will open a popup screen with the table of contents
of the “Help Manual.”
The softkey label for K4 will be “About nnnnnn,” and will refer to the topic
or procedure of the screen from where “HELP” was pressed. Pressing
K4 will open the Help Manual directly to the reference section for that
topic.
Using the Scroll Bar

The contents of the HELP topic may not fit inside the window. When this occurs, a
scroll bar is provided on the right side of the window.
SCROLL UP
ARROW
SCROLL
BOX
SCROLL DOWN
ARROW
One of the following methods may be used to scroll through the information:
Click on one of the scroll arrows.

Drag the scroll box to scroll quickly.
Use the cursor arrow keys on the keyboard to scroll up or down.
Use the page up or page down keys on the keyboard.
Click above or below the scroll box in the scroll bar.
x • HELP Tips WinAlign Software Operation Manual

Using the HELP Buttons
WinAlign ® HELP has seven buttons at the top of the Help window.
Help
Buttons
To select these buttons, click on the button with a light pen or mouse, or press the
letter on the keyboard corresponding to the underlined letter of the button label.
The Table of Contents will appear.
A popup screen will appear. A key word or phrase can be entered

from the keyboard or selected from the list provided. Click on the
“Display” button with a light pen or mouse, or press “Enter,” and an
explanation of the word or phrase will appear.
The path taken through the Help topics will be retraced.
Prints the current topic.
The previous topic in a series of topics will appear. When the first
topic in the series is reached, the button will dim.
The next topic in a series of topics will appear. When the last topic in
the series is reached, the button will dim.
The Help session will end and the screen will return to the procedure
in progress.
Selecting A Topic
Some topics in the HELP file include text that is linked to other HELP topics. These
links are called jumps.
Jump text is usually green and underlined. When you point to a jump, the arrow turns
into the shape of a hand.
To select a jump:
Press “Tab” to highlight the text, then press “Enter.” Press “Shift” and
“Tab” to highlight previous jump text.
OR
Move the arrow to the jump text, and click with a mouse or light pen.
The topic will appear in the HELP window.
WinAlign Software Operation Manual HELP Tips • xi

xii • HELP Tips WinAlign Software Operation Manual
Filename: Tips.doc
Template: C:\Program Files\Microsoft Office\Templates\D2H_IN.DOT
Subject:
Author: Don Cwiklowski
Keywords:
Comments:
Change Number: 193
Last Saved On: 1/28/2002 11:32 AM
Number of Pages: 4
Number of Words: 558 (approx.)
Number of Charact ers: 3,183 (approx.)
1. Getting Started
1.1 Introduction
This manual provides operation instructions and information required to operate the
611 Aligner with WinAlign  software. WinAlign software version 6.0 is a 32-bit
program and is compatible only with Windows 98 or above.
The owner of the Series 611 Aligner is solely responsible for arranging technical
training. Only a qualified trained technician should operate the Series 611 Aligner.
Maintaining records of personnel trained on this equipment is solely the responsibility
of the owner and management.
“References”
This manual assumes you are already familiar with the basics of wheel alignment.
“Italics” are used to refer to specific parts of this manual that provide additional
information or explanation. For example, Refer to “Operating the Console,” page 5.
These references should be read for additional information to the instructions being
presented.
1.2 System Requirements

WinAlign  software version 6.0 is a 32-bit program and therefore is compatible with
only Series 611 Aligners.
Required Software that will be installed by the WinAlign software 6.0 Installer:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2
Windows® Media Player 7.1
NOTE: Systems which originally shipped with WinAlign 4.X or 5.0

will need to install TCP/IP Protocol, in addition to a Digital
Video key, in order to access AlignGuide training videos.
1.3 For Your Safety

Hazard Definitions
These symbols identify situations that could be detrimental to your safety and/or
cause equipment damage. Watch for these symbols:
CAUTION: Hazards or unsafe practices, which could result in minor

personal injury or product or property damage.
WARNING: Hazards or unsafe practices, w hich could result in

severe personal inj ury or death.
WinAlign Software Operation Manual 1. Getting Started • 1

DANGER: Immediate hazards that will result in severe personal
inj ury or death.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Read and follow all caution and warning labels affixed to your equipment and tools.
Misuse of this equipment can cause personal injury and shorten the life of the aligner.
Always use wheel chocks in front of and behind the left rear wheel after positioning a
vehicle on the rack.
Use caution when jacking the vehicle.
ALWAYS WEAR OSHA APPROVED SAFETY GLASSES. Eyeglasse s that only have
impact resistant lenses are NOT safety glasse s.
Wear non-slip safety footwear when performing an alignment.
Never stand on the aligner.
Do not wear jewelry or loose clothing when performing an alignment.
Wear proper back support when lifting or removing wheels.
Do not operate equipment with a damaged cord, or equipment that has been
dropped or damaged, until a Hunter Service Representative has examined it.
Never use the cord to pull the plug from the outlet. Grasp plug and pull to disconnect.
If an extension cord is necessary, a cord with a current rating equal to or more than
that of the equipment should be used. Cords rated for less current than the
equipment may overheat. Care should be taken to arrange the cord so that it will not
be tripped over or pulled.
Verify that the electrical supply circuit and the receptacle are properly grounded.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use on wet surfaces or expose to rain.
Verify that the appropriate electrical supply circuit is the same voltage and amperage
ratings as marked on the aligner before operating.
To reduce the risk of fire, do not operate equipment in the vicinity of open containers
of flammable liquids (gasoline).
Keep all instructions permanently with the unit.
Keep all decals, labels, and notices clean and visible.
To prevent accidents and/or damage to the aligner, use only Hunter recommended
accessories.
Use equipment only as described in this manual.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
2 • 1. Getting Started WinAlign Software Operation Manual

WARNING: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy. If not installed and used in
accordance w ith the instruction manual, it may cause
interference w ith electronic dev ices. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area may cause interference
in w hich case the user, at his ow n expense, will be
required to take w hatever measures may be required to
correct the interference.
CAUTION: Do not turn the power off when the disk drive is operating.
The disk can be damaged.
WARNING: DO NOT ALTER THE ELECTRICAL PLUG. Plugging the

electrical plug into an unsuitable supply circuit w ill
damage the equipment and may result in personal
inj ury.
Precautions for Systems Equipped with HFSS Cordless Sensors

The following precautions apply to the HFSS transceivers installed in the aligner
console and the alignment sensors as part of the HFSS cordless sensor option.
WARNING: This equipment has been tested and found to comply

w ith the limits for a Class A digital dev ice, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference w hen the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance w ith the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in
w hich case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his ow n expense.
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approv ed by

the manufacturer could v oid the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Specific Precautions/Power Source
North America
The PC aligner is intended to operate from a power source that will apply 120 VAC
(nominal) 50/60 Hz between the supply conductors of the power cordset.
Other Regions
The PC aligner is intended to operate from a power source that will apply 230 VAC
(nominal) 50/60 Hz between the supply conductors of the power cordset. The power
supply cordset, supplied with this equipment, may need modification to allow
connection to the power supply mains. Your Hunter service representative will install
the proper plug for your location.

CAUTION: A protective ground connection, through the grounding
conductor in the power cord, is essential for safe operation.
Use only a power cord that is in good condition.
FUSING:
To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse specified for your product.
EQUIPMENT SERVICE:
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. All repairs must be

referred to a qualified Hunter Service Representative.
PROVISIONS FOR LIFTING AND CARRYING:
No provision has been made for lifting or carrying this equipment. The
unit must be moved by rolling it on its casters.
Equipment Specifications
Electrical
VOLTAGE: 120/230 volts (nominal)
AMPERAGE: 6/3 amps
WATTAGE: 720 watts
Atm ospherics
TEMPERATURE: +32°F to +122°F (0°C to +50°C)
RELATIVE HUMIDITY: Up to 95% Non-condensing
ALTITUDE: Up to 6000 ft. (1829 m)
Safety Summary
Explanation of Sym bols
These symbols appear on the equipment.
Alternating current.
Earth ground terminal.
Protective conductor terminal.
I ON (supply) condition.
OFF (supply) condition.
RISK of electrical shock.
Stand-by switch.
Not intended for connection to public telecommunications network.

1.4 Operating the Console
Turning Power On
Turn the unit “ON” by pressing the power switch located on the left side panel, or on
the back panel of the aligner cabinet.
The “Logo” screen will appear and indicate that the unit is ready for use. This will take
approximately 1.5 minutes.
Using the “Softkeys”

The softkeys, located on the keyboard, provide operator control of the program.
These keys are identified as:
K1 K1 key
K2 K2 key
K3 K3 key
K4 K4 key
Menu shift key
R Reset key
Forward key
Backward key
Zoom key (keyboard)
Zoom softkey (screen display)
The four labels that appear at the bottom of each screen are referred to as the
softkey labels. These labels indicate the action that the program will take when the
corresponding K1 , K2 , K3 , or K4 key is pressed.
The vertically stacked squares between the “K2” and “K3” labels indicate how many
levels of softkeys are available. The highlighted box indicates the menu level that is
currently displayed.
The softkey level is changed by pressing the menu shift softkey, . When this key is
pressed, the softkey labels will change to the next level “down.” If the last menu level
is currently displayed, the softkey level will be the first softkey level. To go to the next
softkey level “up,” press “Shift” and .

Pressing “Shift” and will zoom the current softkey level to a full screen version as
seen below. The softkeys associated with the softkey label are shown on the left side
of the labels and the softkey level is indicated on the right side of the labels. Pressing
again will cause the softkey level to return to the original view.
Pressing , selecting above the softkey levels, or pressing and holding with a
pointing device on the menu level indicator will cause all of the menus available to
appear, as seen below. The green background indicates the active menu level.
Pressing again will cause the menu to return to the original perspective.
The number of softkeys displayed may be reduced to only the number of softkeys
needed for a typical alignment by enabling “Reduce Number of Softkeys” in “Aligner
Setup.” Refer to “Aligner Setup,” page 170.
Throughout this manual, the statement Press “nnnnnnn” indicates the label of the
softkey to press. If the required label is not on the current menu, must be pressed
to change menu levels until the desired label is displayed.
Some softkey labels have a green border highlight around the softkey. Generally, the
softkey with the green border (usually “K4”) is the appropriate key to press to
continue with the procedure being performed, as seen below.

Alignment Procedure Bar
Whether ExpressAlign is enabled or disabled, a vertical procedure bar appears
along the right side of the screen.
The “Alignment Procedure” bar is a toolbar that displays on the right side of the
screen with an icon for each alignment or WinAlign procedure available or
performed.
The icons are arranged in order from the first step that you must complete to
the last step that you must complete. After each alignment procedure has been
completed, a “ ” will appear in the upper right corner of the corresponding icon.
If there are more icons available than space on the screen, the toolbar can be
scrolled up or down. The toolbar on the right shows the triangular area at the
bottom indicating more choices.
When the cursor is placed over an icon, a message appears describing the
icon's function, such as “ExpressAlign.”
Selecting an icon from the “Alignment Procedure” bar will take you to the
procedure that the icon represents.
Selecting , Forward key, or , Backward key, will move the screen forward
or backward in the alignment procedure as outlined on the procedure bar.

AlignGuide Training and Information Guide
AlignGuide is an information center on WinAlign ® software. It contains training videos
and information on using WinAlign ® software, wheel sensor operations, vehicle
operations, vehicle troubleshooting, and alignment adjustment methods.
AlignGuide is available only with the Digital Video option.
To access the AlignGuide training feature, select the icon above the Procedure
Bar. A drop-down menu will list all the choices available including access to
WinAlign ® Help, Tools and Kits, Illustrate Adjustments, (these choices are context-
sensitive based on the current WinAlign® screen), and a selection for All Videos and
Animations.
Select the appropriate choice and the video, animation, illustration, or Help item will
display.
Using the Remote Control

The remote control provides operation of the WinAlign ® program from a distance by
duplicating the five softkeys. Some remote controls have six softkeys: K1 , K2 , K3 ,
K4 , , and a zoom key . Pressing will zoom screens that support the zoom
feature.
To use the remote control, point the front end of the transmitter toward the front of the
aligner and press the appropriate softkey.
NOTE: The remote control transmitter is a “line-of-sight” device and

will not transmit signals through solid objects.

Resetting the Program
The alignment program may be reset at anytime during an alignment by pressing the
R key, located at the upper left-hand corner of the keyboard. A confirmation screen
will appear to verify that the “Reset” button was pressed intentionally.
When this screen appears, press “YES” to reset the program or “NO” if the program
should not be reset.
When the aligner is reset, the information collected for the alignment in progress will
be erased and the display will return to the “Logo” screen.
Just-In-Time Training
Optional multimedia video instructions provide a live audio-visual demonstration of
procedures. To view video instructions:
Press “Help,” then press “Just -In-Time Training” to view a list of available
videos.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired video, and then press “Play
Selection.” The video will start.
Pressing will pause the video, and will restart the video after it
has been paused. Pressing will stop the video and return you to the
Just-In-Time Training menu screen. After the video ends, you will be
returned to the Just-In-Time Training menu screen.

Using the Screen Saver
If the CRT displays the same image for a long period of time, the image may become
“burned in,” and will be visible even when the display is turned off. This is a
characteristic of ALL computer CRT displays.
When screen saver is on and any key (even a remote control key) is pressed, the
program will reappear on the CRT. This single keystroke is recognized only by the
screen saver program and will not affect the aligner program. After the screen is on,
additional key presse s will operate the program normally.
NOTE: When screen saver is activated, the system is STILL

RUNNING.
Turning Power Off

To turn off the aligner power, do the following:
Turn off cordless sensors. (Each sensor has a power switch.)

Reset the console.
Press “Exit Aligner.” A “Confirmation” popup screen will ask if you are
sure you want to exit the aligner. Press “Ye s.”
Wait for the aligner program to end. The aligner will shutdown
automatically.
Turn off console power.
CAUTION: Do not turn off the power while information is being written to
the disk drive. This occurs during console setup and when
specifications are being stored. This can result in corrupt
disk drive files.
1.5 An Example Alignment Job with the ExpressAlign Adjustment

Feature and DSP400 Sensors
Example 1 (ExpressAlign® / DSP400)
This example alignment job assumes that the system is configured as follows:
ENABLED
ExpressAlign Level III
Your system may be configured differently.
NOTE: This section is an overview of an alignment job using the

ExpressAlign ® feature. For details about any procedure, refer
to the appropriate section of the manual or press “HELP” in
the WinAlign ® program.
From aligner setup, “DSP400 Sensors” must be selected as the default sensor. Refer
to “Aligner Setup,” page 176.
Prepare the vehicle for alignment as follows:

Drive the vehicle onto the alignment rack, centering the front wheels on
the turnplates.
Apply the vehicle parking brake and place the transmission in park, if
applicable. On standard transmission vehicles, the transmission should
be placed in neutral.
Position chocks at the front and rear of the left rear tire to keep the
vehicle from rolling.
Place the lift at alignment height.
Check and adjust tire pressure to vehicle manufacturer’s specification.
Inspect for unevenly worn or mismatched tires.
Start the alignment program by pressing “Begin Alignment” on the “Logo” screen. The
“Recall Specifications” popup screen will appear.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the manufacturer of the vehicle being aligned.
Press “OK” to select the highlighted manufacturer. The next screen will list the
models available from the selected manufacturer.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the model of the vehicle being aligned.
Press “OK” to select that model.
Continue in this manner until the vehicle is identified to the program.
The screen will change to the “Compensation Control” popup screen.

There are two methods of compensation, rolling and jacking. The method chosen for
this example procedure is rolling compensation. Refer to “Rolling Compensation,”
page 54, or to “Jacking Compensation,” page 58.
Verify that the pins are in the turnplates and slip plates.
Position a turnplate bridge in each pocket behind the turnplate so the runway surface
and the bar surface are flush. Rotate the bridges so they are taller than wide.
TURNPL ATE
BRIDGE
Place wheel chocks that limit rearward motion approximately 15 inches behind rear
wheel(s).
Steer ahead with transmission in neutral with the parking brake off.
Mount the targets and wheel adaptors on the wheels. Refer to “Mounting Sensors or
Targets Onto Wheel Adaptors,” page 47.
Level and lock the targets.
NOTE: The targets should not be re-leveled at any time during the
alignment. The only exception being - If the target is
removed from the wheel adaptor during the alignment, (shim
replacement, steering component replacement, etc.) the
affected target must be re-leveled and recompensated, using
jacking compensation.
NOTE: Beginning the rolling compensation procedure removes any

previous compensation from the targets.
The screen instructs you to roll the vehicle rearward. Release parking brake and put
transmission in neutral. Roll the vehicle rearward until the bar graph turns green.
NOTE: It is recommended to roll the vehicle by rotating the left rear

tire. Do not push or pull the vehicle by the front (steering
axle) tires or wheels during rolling compensation. Do not
push or pull on spoilers, fascia moldings, or other “trim”
accessories.

NOTE: A vehicle with 28 inch diameter tires will require
approximately 12 – 14 inches of movement. Smaller
diameter tires will require less movement, while larger
diameter tires will require more.
Stop rearward movement of the vehicle. The bar graph will disappear for a moment.
If a new style remote indicator is used, indicators for all four wheels will be flashing,
indicating to roll forward.
When the compensation bar graph reappears, roll the vehicle forward to the original
position.
When all four targets have been compensated, apply the vehicle parking brake and
place the transmission in park, if applicable. On standard transmission vehicles, the
transmission should be placed in neutral.
Position chocks at the front and rear of the left rear tire to keep the vehicle from
rolling.
NOTE: The rolling compensation procedure MUST end with the

vehicle in the proper position to check and adjust the
alignment.
After the targets have been compensated, remove the pins from the turnplates and
slip plates.
Turn the turnplate bridges into the stored position.

The screen will change to the “Caster and S.A.I. Measurement” popup screen that
will direct you to measure caster.
Install the brake pedal depressor. Steer the wheels as directed and follow the on-
screen directions.
NOTE: Do NOT block the front targets during the “Measure Caster”
Procedure. One of the two rear targets may be blocked
during the “Measure Caster” Procedure.
After caster has been measured, the screen prompts you to steer the wheels straight
ahead.
The measurements of the vehicle will be saved.

The screen will change to the “ExpressAlign®” popup screen.

NOTE: The actual procedures displayed will vary depending on the
vehicle and alignment angles that need to be adjusted.
An icon will be displayed in the “ExpressAlign®” popup screen for each suggested
procedure. Selecting the corresponding icon in the procedure bar will start the
Procedures that have yellow text in the “ExpressAlign ®” popup screen refer to
adjustments that must be made for the specified vehicle.
Selecting the ExpressAlign ® icon in the procedure bar will prompt you through the
recommended sequence for the alignment. In this instance, rear camber and toe will
be the first necessary adjustment.
Remove the wheel to install shim. After installing shim and reinstalling wheel with
target and wheel adaptor, the target must be recompensated using jacking
compensation.
Press “Cancel” if no adjustments were made.
OR
Press “OK” to recompensate the target.

Follow the on-screen directions to compensate the target. Press “Continue” when
finished.
Follow the on-screen directions, then press “Ready.”
Adjust the right tie rod, follow the on-screen directions, then press “Ready.”

Adjust the left tie rod, follow the on-screen directions, then press “Ready.”
Steer ahead to center the bar graph. The steering wheel should be level. Press
“Ready.” If the steering wheel is not level, restart WINTOE ® and correct as
necessary.
Press the “Check With ExpressAlign®” icon in the procedure bar.

After all adjustments are completed, select the “Print” icon in the procedure bar to
print the alignment results.
Press “Print Summary.” Before printing, the “Print” popup screen will allow the
technician to input the current steering wheel status and make additional notes as
needed. After steering ahead, add the necessary comments for the printout and
select “Print Summary.”
After printing the results, the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary
screen will appear with the current vehicle measurements showing. The alignment is
complete.
Verify that the pins are in place in the slip plates and turnplates before driving the
vehicle off the rack.

Example 2 (ExpressAlign® / DSP400)
ENABLED
Display of Vehicle Specifications
Show Measurements Display After Compensation
Show Measurements Display After Caster
Verify Caster Adjustment
DSP400 Instructions

From aligner setup, “DSP400 Sensors” must be selected as the default sensor. Refer
to “Aligner Setup,” page 176.
Drive the vehicle onto the alignment rack, centering the front wheels on
the turnplates.
Apply the vehicle parking brake and place the transmission in park, if
applicable. On standard transmission vehicles, the transmission should
be placed in neutral.
Position chocks at the front and rear of the left rear tire to keep the
vehicle from rolling.
Check and adjust tire pressure to vehicle manufacturer’s specification.
Inspect for unevenly worn or mismatched tires.

Continue in this manner until the vehicle is identified to the program. The “Vehicle
Specifications” primary screen displays the identification and alignment specifications
for the vehicle chosen.
Confirm that the vehicle identified is the vehicle you have chosen and then press the
“Mount Sensors and Compensate” icon in the procedure bar.

There are two methods of compensation, rolling and jacking. The method chosen for
this example procedure is rolling compensation. Refer to “Rolling Compensation,”
page 54, or to “Jacking Compensation,” page 58.
TURNPL ATE
BRIDGE
wheel(s).
Steer ahead and lock the steering wheel.
Level and lock the targets, then press “Ready.”
NOTE: The targets should not be re-leveled at any time during the
alignment. The only exception being - If the target is
removed from the wheel adaptor during the alignment, (shim
replacement, steering component replacement, etc.) the
affected target must be re-leveled and recompensated, using


accessories.

If a new style remote indicator is used, indicators for all four wheels will be flashing,
indicating to roll forward.
When the compensation bar graph reappears, roll the vehicle forward to the original
position.
rolling.

After the targets have been compensated, the “Compensation Control” popup screen
will give further instructions on how to perform the alignment procedure.
Remove the pins from the turnplates and slip plates.
Turn the turnplate bridges to the stored position.
Press “Ready.”
The screen will change to the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary
screen. Alignment measurements for the current vehicle are shown on this screen.

Press the “Measure Caster” icon in the procedure bar. The screen will change to the
“Caster and S.A.I. Measurement” popup screen that will direct you to measure caster.
Install the brake pedal depressor.
NOTE: Do NOT block the front targets during the “Measure Caster”
Procedure. One of the two rear targets may be blocked
during the “Measure Caster” Procedure.
Steer the wheels as directed and follow the on-screen directions.
After caster has been measured, the screen prompts you to steer the wheels straight
ahead.

The “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen will appear.
These are the initial measurements of the vehicle. Press the “Save ‘Before’
Measurements” icon in the procedure bar to save them for the printout.
The measurements of the vehicle will be saved.

An icon will be displayed in the “ExpressAlign®" popup screen for each suggested
Procedures that have yellow text in the “ExpressAlign ®" popup screen refer to
Selecting the ExpressAlign ® icon in the procedure bar will prompt you through the
recommended sequence for the alignment. In this instance, the left rear camber and
toe will be the first necessary adjustment.

This vehicle uses shims to adjust rear camber and toe. Selecting the “Adjust Camber
& Toe” icon in the procedure bar will automatically proceed to Shim Select ® II and
display the correct shim for the necessary adjustment.
If the vehicle you are aligning does not use shims, ExpressAlign ® will select and
display the appropriate adjustment screen.
Remove the wheel to install shim. After installing shim and reinstalling wheel with
target and wheel adaptor, the target must be recompensated using jacking
compensation.
Press “Cancel” if no adjustments were made.
OR
Press “OK” to recompensate the target.

Follow the on-screen instructions, then press “Ready.”
Follow the on-screen instructions, then press “Continue.”
Follow the on-screen instructions, then press “Ready.”
The WINTOE ® alignment procedure will begin.

Start the engine and level the steering wheel. Then press “Ready.”
Make the adjustments indicated on the screen. Then press “Ready.”

Steer ahead to center the bar graph. The steering wheel should be level. If the
steering wheel is not level, restart WINTOE ® and correct as necessary.
Press the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” icon in the procedure bar and
the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen will appear.
If measurements are not within specification, select “Check With ExpressAlign®” and
readjust as necessary.
After all adjustments are completed, select “Print” to print the alignment results.

Before printing, the “Print” popup screen will allow the technician to input the current
steering wheel status and make additional notes as needed. After steering ahead,
add the necessary comments for the printout and select “Print Summary.”
complete.
Verify that the pins are in place in the slip plates and turnplates before driving the
vehicle off the rack.
1.6 An Example Alignment Job with the ExpressAlign® Adjustment

Feature and without DSP400 Sensors
Example 1 (ExpressAlign® / without DSP400)
The “Total Four-Wheel” alignment procedure requires the use of all four sensors and
is typically used when adjustments are available for rear camber and/or rear toe.
ENABLED


Position vehicle onto alignment rack with the front wheels centered on
the turning angle gauges.
Place the vehicle transmission in park and apply the parking brake.
Position chocks at front and rear of left rear tire.
NOTE: The alignment rack must be level to properly perform an

alignment.
Inspect for unevenly worn or mismatched tires and adjust tire pressure to
vehicle manufacturer’s specification.
Inspect the suspension and steering linkage components for wear,
looseness, or damage.

When the vehicle is identified to the program, the screen will change to the
“Compensation Control” popup screen.
Mount sensors on wheels and compensate them for runout. Refer to “Mounting
Sensors or Targets Onto Wheel Adaptors,” page 176.
After the sensors have been compensated, remove the pins from the turnplates and
slip plates, then lower and jounce the vehicle.
Install the brake pedal depressor, level and lock the sensors, and lower vehicle if
raised. Press “Ready.”


Adjust left rear camber and toe.
display the appropriate adjustment screen.
Remove the sensor and wheel adaptor to install shim. After installing shim and
replacing sensor and wheel adaptor, the sensor must be recompensated.
By pressing “OK,” the WINTOE ® alignment procedure will begin.

Start the engine and level the steering wheel. Then press “Ready.”

If measurements are not within specification, select “Check With ExpressAlign®” and
readjust as necessary.

After all adjustments are completed, select the “Print Summary” icon in the procedure
bar to print the alignment results.
complete.
Example 2 (ExpressAlign® / without DSP400)

The “Total Four-Wheel” alignment procedure requires the use of all four sensors and
is typically used when adjustments are available for rear camber and/or rear toe.
ENABLED
Display of Vehicle Specifications
Show Measurements Display After Compensation
Show Measurements Display After Caster
Verify Caster Adjustment


Position vehicle onto alignment rack with the front wheels centered on
the turning angle gauges.
Place the vehicle transmission in park and apply the parking brake.
Position chocks at front and rear of left rear tire.
NOTE: The alignment rack must be level to properly perform an

alignment.
Inspect for unevenly worn or mismatched tires and adjust tire pressure to
vehicle manufacturer’s specification.
Inspect the suspension and steering linkage components for wear,
looseness, or damage.

When the vehicle is identified to the program, the screen will change to the “Vehicle
Specifications” primary screen.
The “Vehicle Specifications” primary screen displays the identification and alignment
specifications for the vehicle chosen.
Confirm that the vehicle identified is the vehicle you have chosen, and then press the
“Mount Sensors and Compensate” icon in the procedure bar.
Mount sensors on wheels and compensate them for runout. Refer to “Mounting
Sensors or Targets Onto Wheel Adaptors,” page 176.

After the sensors have been compensated, remove the pins from the turnplates and
slip plates, then lower and jounce the vehicle.
The screen will change to the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary
screen. The current vehicle alignment measurements are shown on this screen.
Install the brake pedal depressor, level and lock the sensors, and lower vehicle if
raised.

These are the initial measurements of the vehicle. Press the “Save ‘Before’
Measurements” icon in the procedure bar to save them for the printout. The screen
will change to the “Save 'Before' Alignment Measurements” popup screen.


This vehicle uses shims to adjust rear camber and toe. Selecting the “Rear Adjust
Camber & Toe” icon in the procedure bar will automatically proceed to Shim
Select® II and display the correct shim for the necessary adjustment.
display the appropriate adjustment screen. Press “OK” after making adjustments and
recompensating the sensor.


Select the “Check With ExpressAlign ®” icon in the procedure bar.
After all adjustments are completed, select the “Print” icon in the procedure bar to
print the alignment results.
Before printing, the “Print” popup screen will allow the technician to input the current
steering wheel status and make additional notes as needed. After steering ahead,
add the necessary comments for the printout and select “Print Summary.”
complete.

Filename: Start.doc
Subject:
Author: Advertising Department
Keywords:
Comments:
Creation Date: 3/27/1998 9:00 AM
Change Number: 416
Number of Pages: 44
2. Basic Operation Information
2.1 Sensors and Targets

Mounting Sensors or Targets Onto Wheel Adaptors
Sensors or targets may be mounted on the wheel adaptors before mounting the
wheel adaptors on the vehicle. In some cases, it may be easier to mount the wheel
adaptor first and then mount the sensor or target onto the adaptor (Either method
may be used).
Center the wheel adaptor center casting between the upper and lower castings.
Tighten both center casting lock knobs very firmly. This will prevent the center casting
from slipping down when the sensor is attached.
CAUTION: Hand tighten center casting lock knobs as tight as possible

(DO NOT USE TOOLS TO TIGHTEN).
Attach sensor to wheel adaptor by inserting the sensor mounting shaft (at the rear of
the sensor) into the sensor mounting hole in the middle of the center casting.
Swing the sensor locking lever clockwise to the locked position.
CAUTION: When mounting sensors or targets to the wheel adaptors,

the sensor or target shaft must be fully seated. Make certain
that there is no play or looseness between the sensor or
target shaft and the wheel adaptor. Rotate the wheel while
holding the target. Listen and feel for movement between the
sensor or target and wheel adaptor. Runout compensation
and alignment accuracy could be adversely affected if there
is any movement between the sensor or target and wheel
adaptor. Sensors or targets must fit tightly against the
surface of the wheel adaptor or the lock may not hold. This
could allow the sensor to fall and be damaged.
When the sensor or target is mounted, the locking lever should be rotated until firm
hand pressure is applied. Tools should not be used to force the locking lever.
WinAlign Software Operation Manual 2. Basic Operation Information • 45

Mounting Wheel Adaptors Onto Wheels
Wheels with Rim Lip
Position the wheel adaptor with the two lower rim studs engaging the lower wheel rim
lip.
ADAPTOR
ADJUSTMENT WHEEL RIM
K NOB
RIM STUD
SAFETY CABLE
Align the two upper rim studs with the upper wheel rim lip and check that all four
studs will engage the rim lip.
Turn the adaptor adjustment knob to firmly grip the adaptor onto the wheel.
Connect the sensor safety cable to the air valve stem.
Test the security of the installation by lightly tugging on the wheel adaptor.
CAUTION: Do not use rim studs on alloy or clear coat wheels.
Wheels with No Rim Lip

Position the wheel adaptor with the two upper external rim studs on the outside of the
wheel rim lip.
ADAPTOR
ADJUSTMENT WHEEL RIM
KNOB
SPADE SLEEVE
SAFETY CABLE
Align the two lower external rim studs on the outside of the upper wheel rim lip and
check that all four rim studs will engage the outside of the wheel rim lip.
NOTE: If the rim/tire profile does not accept the adaptor rim studs,
install spade sleeves over the rim studs. If spade sleeves are
needed on one front wheel, they must be used on both front
wheels. If spade sleeves are needed on one rear wheel, they
must be used on both rear wheels.
Turn the adaptor adjustment knob to firmly grip the adaptor onto the wheel.
Connect the sensor safety cable to the air valve stem.
Test the security of the installation by lightly tugging on the wheel adaptor.
2. Basic Operation Information • 46 WinAlign Software Operation Manual

Connecting Conventional Sensor Cables
Connecting Sensor Cables w ith Optional Rack Wiring Kit
Connect each sensor to a rack wiring box with short sensor cables.
Connect a front rack wiring box to the console with a long sensor cable.
Connecting Sensor Cables w ithout Optional Rack Wiring Kit

Connect the two rear sensors to the front sensors using sensor cables.
Connect the two front sensors to the console using sensor cables.
Compensating Conventional Sensors

General Compensation of Conventional Sensors
The sensors must be compensated to eliminate error in angle measurements caused
by runout of the wheel and wheel adaptor.
The default setting for the alignment console is set for 3-point compensation. The
default setting can be changed in Aligner Setup for either 2-point compensation or
3-point compensation (Pro-Comp ® compensation).
The operator still has the option to override the default setting by adding
2-point compensation and rolling compensation in Aligner Setup under the Sensors
heading / Compensation Options.
When these compensation options are added, softkeys will be available during the
compensation procedure.
If a sensor that has been compensated should require re-compensation, pressing the
compensate button twice within four seconds will begin the new procedure.
When pressing the sensor compensate button, momentarily depress (do not hold the
compensate button). Also, do not disturb the sensor until the red LED responds.
Sensors may be compensated in any order; however, these precautions must be

followed:
If a sensor is removed from a wheel, that sensor must be re-compensated

when reinstalled. The other sensors do not need re-compensation.
During 2-point compensation and normal operation of conventional sensors,
be certain no obstructions are blocking the infrared beams between
sensors. Should a blockage occur, the affected sensor(s) shown on the
illustration on the CRT will flash on and off and the displayed toe meas-
urement of the sensor(s) will go blank until the obstruction is cleared.
When compensating sensors mounted to the vehicle drive wheels, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL.
The lift rack should be level on leveling legs.
3-Point Compensation
Not all sensors need to be mounted before starting compensation. The sensors may
be mounted and compensated individually or compensation may be performed on 1,
2, 3, or all 4 sensors at once.
Raise either the front or rear wheels.
WARNING: Chock w heels on axle not being raised during

compensation to prevent v ehicle from rolling.

Select any one of the sensors for compensation. The starting position of the wheel
adaptor does not matter. The green LED will be on.
Snug down the sensor lock knob.
Rotate the wheel until the sensor is level (as indicated by the level on top of the
sensor).
Press the compensate button. Do not disturb sensor until the red LED begins to blink
and the green LED turns off, indicating that the measurements have been stored.
Loosen the sensor lock knob.
Rotate the wheel 120 degrees until the green LED comes on. Snug down the sensor
lock knob and rotate the wheel to level the sensor.
NOTE: It is recommended that the front wheels of front wheel drive

vehicles be rotated in the forward direction to keep from
disturbing the sensor on the opposite front wheel.
With the green LED on, press the compensate button. Do not disturb the sensor until
the red LED begins to blink faster and the green LED turns off to indicate that the
measurements have been stored.
Rotate the wheel 120 degrees more until the green LED comes on. Snug down the
sensor lock knob and rotate the wheel to level the sensor.
With the green LED on, press the compensate button. Do not disturb the sensor.
Wait for sensor to save measurement. The red LED and the green LED will stay on.
The sensor is now compensated. Repeat this procedure for the remaining sensor(s).
NOTE: All sensors should be level, but unlocked, with cables

hanging straight down to minimize tilt of the sensors during
caster sweep. Avoid rapid steering motion that may cause
sensors to swing vertically, which can cause them to come
into contact with the rack or even dislodge from the wheel.
Remove the lock pins from the turning angle gauges and rear slip plates.
Apply the parking brake and place the transmission in park.
Lower the vehicle onto the turning angle gauges.
Jounce the vehicle.
3-Point compensation is complete. The green LED and red LED on each sensor will
be on.
After 3-point compensation, the wheel may be rotated to any position without
affecting the alignment measurements.
Continue the alignment procedure.

2-Point Compensation
NOTE: To compensate the sensors, both the front and rear sensor
on that side of the vehicle must be mounted and the longi-
tudinal toe beam must not be obstructed. If two sensors (on
the same side of the vehicle only) are to be compensated at
the same time, the wheels should be rotated at the same
time. Do not rotate one wheel while the measurements are
being saved at the other. The preferred method is to com-
pensate the sensors separately.
Raise either the front or rear wheels of vehicle.
WARNING: Chock w heels on axle not being raised during

compensation to prevent v ehicle rolling.
Loosen the sensor lock knobs of all the sensors.

Select any one of the sensors for compensation. The green LED will be on.
Rotate the wheel adaptor to any desired position. Compensation should preferably
begin (and end) with the wheel adaptor in the vertical position to provide a visual
indication that the vehicle wheel has not rotated.
Snug down the sensor lock knob.
Rotate the wheel until the sensor is level (as indicated by the level on top of the
sensor).
Press the compensate button. Do not disturb the sensor until the red LED begins to
flash and the green LED turns off indicating that the measurement has been saved.
Rotate the wheel 180 degrees until the green LED comes on. When the green LED is
on, snug down the sensor lock knob and rotate the wheel to level the sensor.
Press the compensate button. Do not disturb the sensor. Wait for the sensor to save
the measurement. The red LED and green LED will stay on, indicating that the
measurement has been saved and compensation is complete.
The sensor is now compensated. Repeat this procedure for the remaining sensor(s).
When using the 2-point compensation method, the wheel adaptor must remain in the
same rotational position as it was when its compensation was completed.
NOTE: All sensors should be level, but unlocked, with cables

hanging straight down to minimize tilt of the sensors during
caster sweep. Avoid rapid steering motion that may cause
sensors to swing vertically, which can cause them to come
into contact with the rack, or even dislodge from the wheel.
Remove the lock pins from the turning angle gauges and rear slip plates.
Apply the vehicle parking brake and place the transmission in park.
Lower the vehicle onto the turning angle gauges.
Jounce the vehicle.
2-Point compensation is complete. The green LED and red LED on each sensor will
be on.
Continue the alignment procedure.

Rolling Compensation for Conventional Sensors
NOTE: This procedure can be performed using the 3-point

compensation method.
CAUTION: This procedure should be performed only on a pit-installed

rack and should not be performed on a lift or aboveground
rack. The vehicle could roll off the lift or rack, causing severe
personal injury and damage to the vehicle or rack.
From the “Compensation Control” popup screen, press “Use Rolling Compensation.”
The “Rolling Compensation” popup screen will appear.
3-Point Procedure
Position the vehicle so that it can be rolled forward with the wheels able to rotate
240 degrees.
Level and lock the sensors, then press “Ready.” When the sensors are stable, the
measurements will be saved.

compensation from the sensors.
The screen instructs you to roll the vehicle forward so the wheels rotate 120 degrees.
Vertical bar graphs show when this is correct. Unlock the sensors and roll the vehicle
forward until the arrows are in the null position.

Level and lock the sensors. The green LED must be on at each sensor.
Press and release the compensate switch on any ONE sensor. When the sensors
are all stable, the measurements will be saved.
The screen instructs you to roll the vehicle forward so the wheels rotate 120
degrees . Vertical bar graphs show when this is correct. Unlock the sensors and roll
the vehicle forward until the arrows are in the null position.
are all stable, the measurements will be saved. The “Rolling Compensation” popup
screen will close.
NOTE: The 3-point rolling compensation procedure need not end

with the vehicle in the proper position to adjust the
alignment. The wheels are allowed to rotate after the
procedure is performed.
2-Point Procedure
Position the vehicle so that it can be rolled forward, with the wheels able to rotate
180 degrees.
Level and lock the sensors, then press “Ready.” When the sensors are stable, the
measurements will be saved.

old compensation from the sensors.
The screen instructs you to roll the vehicle forward so the wheels rotate 180 degrees.
Vertical bar graphs show when this is correct. Unlock the sensors and roll the vehicle
forward until the arrows are in the null position.
are all stable, the measurements will be saved.
The “Rolling Compensation” popup screen will close.
NOTE: The 2-point rolling compensation procedure MUST end with

the vehicle in the proper position to adjust the alignment.
The wheels are NOT allowed to rotate after the procedure is
performed.

Procedure Lim itations
CAUTION: This procedure must be performed very carefully, or

inaccurate alignment measurements will result. The axles
must always “point” exactly the same direction during the
procedure. A change in the pointing direction of an axle
during the procedure will be interpreted by the system as
runout.
Do not allow the front wheels to change their “steering” direction as the vehicle is
rolled.
Do not perform the procedure on a bumpy or uneven surface.
Do not perform the procedure on a vehicle that has uneven or out-of-round tires.
Do not push or pull the vehicle by the tires or wheels during the procedure.
Push the vehicle only forward during the procedure. Do not push the vehicle forward,
then backward.
Do not use the brakes during the procedure.
Compensating DSP400 Sensors

General Compensation of DSP400
The DSP400 Targets™ must be compensated to eliminate errors in angle
measurements caused by runout of the wheel, wheel adaptor, and target shaft.
The default setting for the alignment console can be set for either rolling or jacking
compensation.
When using Jacking Compensation, targets may be compensated in any order;

however, these precautions must be followed:
If a target is removed from a wheel, that target must be recompensated

when reinstalled. The other targets do not need recompensation.
When compensating targets that are mounted to the vehicle drive
wheels, place the transmission in NEUTRAL.
The lift rack should be level on the leveling legs when the legs are
present on the lift.
The lock pins must be in place on the turnplates and rear slip plates
during rolling target compensation.
About Rolling Compensation

When performing rolling compensation with Hunter DSP400 Sensors (or any
alignment sensors), follow these guidelines to obtain the best results.
Perform a v ehicle inspection before beginning alignment

Inspect vehicle for loose or worn parts that may prevent proper alignment.
WinAlign ® software will notify the operator if the vehicle has excessive
"total toe" with Roll-Check®. Excessive "total toe" is a good indication of
loose or worn parts.

Do not perform the procedure on a vehicle that has uneven or out-of-round tires.
Changing to "Live Planes" within WinAlign ® software will compensate for

uneven tires during the alignment. The vehicle's on-road performance
will still be adversely affected by uneven tires.
Properly set tire pressure before performing procedure.

improperly set tire pressure during the alignment. The vehicle's on-road
performance will still be adversely affected by improper tire pressure.
Practices to follow for best results

Have the wheels in the straight-ahead position, as the wheels typically are after
driving the vehicle onto the lift.
WinAlign ® software will notify the operator if the vehicle is not steered
straight-ahead. Roll-Check® screen appears and helps the operator
straighten the wheels.
Watch for changes in the “steering” direction as the vehicle is rolled. If “steering”
direction changes are noticed, re-compensate using a steering wheel holder.
On Hunter Lifts, position a turnplate bridge, Kit 20-1471-1, within the gap behind
each turnplate to create a smooth rolling surface.
The alignment lift should be level to place the vehicle's suspension and steering
systems in their neutral positions.

an alignment lift that is not level.
Roll the vehicle by rotating the left rear tire. Changes in the vehicles path and ride
height are avoided by moving the vehicle with the left rear tire.
DSP400 Rolling Compensation

From the “Compensation Control” popup screen, press “Use Rolling Compensation.”
The “Rolling Compensation” popup screen will appear. Rolling compensation can be
performed in Virtual View™, or using traditional bar graphs.

TURNPL ATE
BRIDGE
wheel(s).
Steer ahead.
NOTE: Once the targets are leveled (for compensation), they should
not be re-leveled at any time during the alignment. If the
target is removed from the wheel or adaptor during the
alignment, it must be re-leveled and recompensated, using


accessories.

If a remote indicator is used, indicators for all four wheels will be flashing, indicating
to roll forward.
When the compensation bar graph reappears, roll the vehicle forward until the bar
graphs are green.

rolling.
NOTE: The rolling compensation procedure MUST end with the

vehicle in the proper position to check and adjust the
alignment. The targets are NOT allowed to rotate after the
procedure is performed.
will appear.
If not already done, block the wheels, then remove the pins from the turnplates, and
slip plates.
Return the bridges to the stored position.

Rolling Compensation is complete.
Roll-Check ® Measurement Feature

After performing rolling compensation, it is necessary that the vehicle is steered
ahead and that “Total Toe” is not excessive. Roll-Check® verifies that both of these
conditions have been met. If either of these conditions have not been met, then a
popup screen appears stating that the rolling compensation that has just been
performed may not be accurate.

One of the following messages with options might appear after rolling compensation:
Warning: The vehicle is not steered ahead. Rolling
Compensation may not be accurate.
• Using the Steer Ahead bar graph, steer the vehicle to
straight ahead and then press “Restart Procedure.”
OR
• Press “Use Jacking Compensation.”
Warning: Total Toe is larger than 2.00 degrees. Rolling
Compensation may not be accurate.
• Adjust Total Toe and press “Restart Procedure”
OR
• Press “Use Jacking Compensation.”
DSP400 Jacking Com pensation
It is not necessary for all targets to be mounted before starting compensation. The
targets may be mounted and compensated individually, or compensation may be
performed on 1, 2, 3, or all 4 targets at once.
Raise both axles remembering to use the safety on all jacks.

The starting position of the wheel adaptor does not matter.
Insert the target into the wheel adaptor to the fully seated position.
Rotate the wheel until the target is level (as indicated by the level on top of the
target).
Hand tighten the target lock knob.
After the target is mounted, press “Ready.”
The “Compensation Control” screen will appear.

Rotate the wheel being compensated toward the rear of the vehicle (as if the vehicle
were moving rearward).
When the bar graph that corresponds to the wheel being compensated turns green,
stop rotating the wheel. The bar graph will disappear for a moment.
When the bar graph reappears, rotate the wheel toward the front of the vehicle (as if
the vehicle were moving forward) until the bar graph turns green again.
If compensation was completed properly, the bar graph will disappear.
The target is now compensated. Repeat this procedure for the remaining target(s).
will appear.
Remove the lock pins from the turnplates and slip plates.
Apply the parking brake and place the transmission in park, if applicable.
Lower the vehicle onto the turnplates and rear slip plates.
Jounce the vehicle.
Jacking compensation is complete.

2.2 Vehicle Specifications
The “Vehicle Specifications” primary screen shows the vehicle identification and its
alignment specifications.
This primary screen is displayed by pressing “Vehicle Specifications” on any other

primary screen. To change to one of the other primary screens, change to the second
row of softkey labels, and press the appropriate softkey.
The “Vehicle Specifications” primary screen is used for the following purposes:
Viewing the identification of the vehicle.

Viewing the specifications of the vehicle.
Manually entering the specifications of the vehicle.
The “Vehicle Specifications” primary screen is also used for:
Recalling vehicle specifications from the specification memory.
Storing vehicle specifications into the specification memory.
Reading and writing notes which are attached to the specifications of a
vehicle.
Setting the display units and formats for specifications and
measurements.
Mercedes Specifications
Mercedes specifications can be accessed only when “Enable/Disable Manufacturer
Specific Procedures” has been enabled in Setup, or if the appropriate security key is
installed.
Once this has been setup, the “Mercedes Account” softkey will be available from the
WinAlign logo screen. Select this key and Mercedes specifications will be available.

Primary and Secondary Specification Gr oups
The specifications and tolerances are shown in two different groups:
“Primary Specifications” are the usual camber caster total toe and thrust
angle specifications and tolerances.
“Secondary Specifications” are S.A.I., toe-out-on-turns and maximum
steering angle specifications and tolerances.
You may select “Show Primary Specifications” or “Show Secondary Specifications”

from the “Vehicle Specifications” primary screen. “Secondary Specifications” displays
both the front and rear axle. Secondary Specifications can be accessed from any
primary screen where the “Show Vehicle Specifications” softkey is available.
Vehicle Specification Memory

The “Recall Specifications” popup screen allows vehicle specifications to be recalled
and stored in the specification memory.
The “Recall Specifications” popup screen is displayed by pressing “Recall

Specifications” on the “Vehicle Specifications” primary screen.
Specifications may be recalled from “Factory Specifications,” based on original

equipment manufacturer specifications, “Factory Amendments,” or “User
Specifications.” “Factory Amendments,” and “User Specifications" are created and
stored into the computer’s memory by the equipment operator.

Although the specification database is extensive, some vehicle manufacturers and/or
specific models may not be included in the factory specifications memory. Locate the
alignment data in the alignment specification book or vehicle manufacturer’s service
manual and manually enter the specifications on the “Vehicle Specifications” display.
The manually entered specifications may be stored in computer memory to be

recalled at a later time. Refer to “Selecting User Specifications,” page 65.
Pressing “List Abbreviations” identifies a list of abbreviations used in “Factory

Specifications.”
Also displayed in Recall Specifications is the “Quick List.” The “Quick List” displays all
the vehicles most recently worked on, as shown below.
The Quick List is not erased, but each new vehicle entry overwrites an older entry.

Vehicle Recall Specifications Selection
To recall the specifications from the specification database, begin by pressing “↑” or
“↓” to highlight the manufacturer of the vehicle being aligned. Press “OK” to select the
highlighted manufacturer. The screen will change to show the models available for
the selected manufacturer.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the vehicle model. Press “OK.” Continue in this manner
until the vehicle is completely identified. When the vehicle is identified, the
specifications will be recalled and the screen will change to the “Vehicle
At any point in the selection sequence, you can type in the desired selection using
the keyboard. For example, when selecting the vehicle manufacturer, you can select
“Chrysler” as follows:
Type “C”; the selection changes to “Cadillac.”
Type “H”; the selection changes to “Chevrolet.”
Type “R”; the selection changes to “Chrysler.”
The more letters typed the more accurate the selection. This is also valid within the
vehicle make selection.
In Set-up, you may select one of four sequences by which the vehicle is identified.
The four choices are:

Optimal
Year, Manufacturer, Model
Manufacturer, Year, Model
Manufacturer, Year and Model
Selecting from the Vehicle Lists

The factory specifications stored in the system are based on industry data available
at the time of entry. Because specifications are subject to change, refer to vehicle
manufacturer’s service manual and service bulletins if a question arises.
Selecting by Vehicle Identification Num ber (VIN)

The seventeen digit Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains coded information
that the aligner software can use to recall the vehicle specifications.

NOTE: Recalling vehicle specifications using VIN can be used for
1981 or newer passenger cars. This method will not work for
trucks, pick-ups, vans, mini-vans, or utility vehicles.
To recall vehicle specifications using the VIN, press “Recall by VIN…” on the first
“Vehicle Specifications” popup screen. The “Recall Specifications By VIN” popup will
appear.
Enter the 17 digit VIN using the keyboard, and then press “Enter” or “OK.”
Some VIN (numbers) may not contain enough information to completely describe a
vehicle. If more than one vehicle is found, a list of vehicles will be displayed. The
correct vehicle must be selected by highlighting the correct item and pressing “OK.”
If the aligner software finds the VIN to be invalid, a screen with an error message will
appear. Press “Enter” or “OK” and edit the VIN.
The VIN entered may have been misread when recorded from the vehicle or im-
properly entered. Verify the VIN and type again if an error was found.
If the message “Vehicle Not Found” appears on the screen, the program is unable to
identify the required specifications according to the VIN that has been entered. If this
occurs, the aligner will return to the “Recall Specification” display and the user will
need to manually select the vehicle identification.
Once a vehicle has been identified, the program will retrieve the selected vehicle’s
specification from the specification memory, as if the vehicle had been identified by
the normal selection sequence.
Selecting “User Specifications”

The system can store “user entered” specifications in addition to those contained in
the factory specification memory. These specifications may be for older vehicles no
longer in the factory specification memory, or a user may modify factory
specifications for a specific vehicle. These specifications may be recalled and used
during an alignment.
To recall specifications from the “User” specification memory, the “Recall Specifica-
tions” popup screen must be currently displayed:
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight “Specification Database.”

Press “OK.” The screen will change to a list of possible database selec-
tions.

Press “↑” or “↓” to select “User” and press “OK.” The screen will change
to list user entered specifications.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired item and press “OK.” The vehicle
specifications will be retrieved from the “User” specification memory.
When the specifications have been retrieved, the screen will change to
display those specifications.
Editing Specifications
Entering and Editing Specifications
If specifications for a vehicle are not included in the factory specifications memory,
the alignment information must be found in the alignment specification book and
entered manually. It may be necessary to change the specification or tolerance of an
existing specification.
To change or enter a value on the “Vehicle Specifications” display, press “Select Next
Value” or “Enter” to advance to the desired field. Enter the new specification and
press “Select Next Value” or “Enter” to replace the existing specification.
Tolerances must not be “0.”
Specifications may be entered as whole numbers (1), whole numbers and fractions
(1 1/2), fractions (1/2), decimals (0.5), degrees (1.01°), or degrees and minutes (1°
30’). Use the following methods to enter alignment specifications using the current
display units.
NOTE: Display units (i.e. degrees to inches, degrees to degrees and

minutes, etc.) can be changed from the “Vehicle
Specifications” primary screen. Refer to “Selecting Display
Units,” page 79.
Use the “Space” key to separate whole numbers and fractions.
For example, 2 1/2° would be entered as,
Press 2 Spacebar 1 / 2 and “Select Next Value.”
Use the “Space” key to separate degrees and minutes.
For example, 2° 15’ would be entered as,
Press 2 Spacebar 1 5 and “Select Next Value.”

If the degrees and minutes specification is less than 1°, enter a “0” for degrees.
For example, 6’ would be entered as,
Press 0 Spacebar 6 and “Select Next Value.”
NOTE: Specifications are assumed to be positive unless the

negative (-) sign is positioned before the specification value.
When “Select Next Value” or “Enter” is pressed, the value is entered and the cursor
advances to the next entry field.
CAUTION: Values are not entered until “Select Next Value” or “Enter” is
pressed.
Specifications and tolerances may be changed at any time during the alignment by
pressing “Vehicle Specifications” and advancing the cursor to the position for the new
value to be entered.
Selecting Specification Form ats

Specifications may be displayed in a symmetrical or non-symmetrical manner.
Specifications that use an equal tolerance range for an angle such as:
specification tolerance
Left camber 0.50° ± 0.25°
These are called symmetrical specifications because the tolerance range extremes
are equal distance from the preferred specification. This permits a ± value to be used
as a tolerance and does not require two placeholders for tolerances. Symmetrical
specifications are most common.
Non-symmetrical specifications use an unequal ± tolerance such as:

specification + tolerance - tolerance
Left camber 0.50° 0.50° 0.30°
The tolerance values require two placeholders on the specification screen because
the tolerance extremes are unequal distances from the preferred specification.
Press “Set Spec Format,” if individual + and - tolerance values are to be entered. The
screen will change to display a positive and negative tolerance position for each
specified angle.
If the format is asymmetric and the “+ tolerance” is not equal to the “- tolerance” for at
least one tolerance pair, then the screen cannot be changed to symmetric format.
Attempting to do so will generate an error message.
Press “Enter” or “OK” to clear this error message.

Reducing Tolerances
Tolerances that are too large may allow a less than desirable alignment while
tolerances that are too small may make adjustments difficult.
Pressing “Reduce Tolerances” will reduce the specification tolerances to the

following:
front and rear camber tolerance to ± 0.25° (1/4°),

front caster tolerance to ± 0.50° (1/2°),
front and rear total toe tolerance to ± 0.06” (1/16”, 0.13° or 1.5 mm
depending upon toe units selected).
The actual angle specification will not be altered and only tolerances greater than
these will be reduced.
Storing Specifications
Specification Notes
A “specification note” is a block of text that may be attached to a vehicle specification
and stored with the specifications in the specification memory. The note may be
stored with factory specifications, factory amended specifications, or with user
specifications.
NOTE: Some factory specifications may already have a note

attached. This might be a technical service bulletin, or some
tip that may aid you in selecting the vehicle or adjusting its
alignment.
To enter and store a specification note, do either of the following:

Recall the specifications in the usual manner. On the “Vehicle Meas-
urements and Adjustments” primary screen, press “Show Spec Note.”
OR
Open the “Recall Specifications” popup screen. Select the vehicle, press
“OK” for the final selection. The “Show Spec Note” softkey will be
available on the screen at this point. Press “Show Spec Note.” This
allows you to view the note without recalling the specifications.
The “Specification Note” popup screen will appear.
Use the keyboard to type and/or edit the note as desired. Pressing “Cancel” will close
the popup screen without altering the note. Pressing “OK” will store the note in the
specification memory with the vehicle.

If a vehicle in the specification memory has a note attached, it will have a small
image of a “note with a paper clip” next to it (as shown by the arrow) in the “Recall
Specifications” popup screen.
Storing “User Specifications”

The program can store vehicle specifications that you enter and identify directly.
These specifications can take two forms:
They can be manually entered onto a blank specification screen.
They can be derived from a factory specification by recalling and then
editing the specifications for a vehicle.
The specifications can then be stored in two locations:
If they were manually entered onto a blank specifications screen, they
can be stored in “User” specification memory.
If they were derived from a factory specification, they can be stored in
“User” specification memory or they can be stored in the “Factory”
specification memory as an “Attachment” to the factory specification.
To store a specification:
On the “Vehicle Specifications” primary screen, press “Clear All
Specifications.” Then manually enter the specifications in the usual
manner.
OR
Recall the vehicle specifications from the specification memory. Then
manually edit the specifications as needed. This derives the
specifications from the factory specifications.
When the specifications are ready to store, press “Store Specifications.” The “Store
Specification” popup screen will appear.
Type in the identification of the vehicle. This is the name of the vehicle that will
appear on the “Specification Recall” popup screen, and at the top of the “Vehicle
Press “Next Field” or “Tab,” and the cursor will move to the “Spec Note” field. Type in
any desired notes concerning the vehicle, such as Technical Service Bulletin
information.

Press “OK.” If the specifications were not derived from a factory specification, they
will be immediately stored in the user specification memory. If they were derived from
a factory specification, the “Specification Location” popup screen will appear. Now
you must decide where to store the specification.
Press “Store In User Specs” or “Store In Factory Specs” to specify the memory where
the new specification will be stored.
When saving to “User” specifications, if the specification ID is already used in the
memory, a screen will appear stating “A specification with this ID is already in the
database. Do you want to replace it?” Pressing “OK” or “Enter” will replace the
specification.
When saving to “Factory” specifications, if the specification ID is already used in the
database, the specification will be saved as an AMENDMENT to the factory specifi-
cation already in memory.
For recalling User Specifications, refer to “Selecting User Specifications,” page 65.
Deleting “User Specifications”

On the “Recall Specifications” screen:
Press “↑” or “↓” to select “Specification Database” and press “OK.” The screen will
change to a list of possible screen sequences.
Press “↑” or “↓” to select “User” and press “OK.” The screen will change to list user
entered specifications.
Press “↑” or “↓” to move the cursor to the desired item and press “Delete
Specification.” The screen will ask for verification.
Press “Yes” or “No.”

Factory Amended Specifications
“Factory Amended Specifications” are specifications that are derived from and stored
with a factory specification. The procedure for doing this is discussed in “Storing
Specifications.”
Select “Show Spec Databases.” Then select “Factory Amendments.” This displays all
vehicles that have a “Factory Amended Specification.”
The most likely use of a factory-amended specification is that the manufacturer has
issued a Technical Service Bulletin that does one or more of the following:
It alters the factory specification.
It details a special service procedure.
It warns of alignment problems.
It warns of warranty procedures.
By having a “Factory Amended Specification” in the specification memory, these
items are brought to your attention, as you recall the specifications. This way, you do
not have to remember the Technical Service Bulletins.
On the “Recall Specification” popup screen, when there is an amended specification

that is derived from the factory specification of the vehicle being aligned, highlight
that specification and view its “Specification Note.” This note is intended to explain
the use of this specification instead of the factory specification.
If there is a Technical Service Bulletin, store a “Factory Amended Specification” as

detailed in “Storing Specifications.” The “Specification Note” should contain the
contents of the Technical Service Bulletin.
WebSpecsTM Online Alignment Specification and Illustration Database

WebSpecs™ is an on-line, Internet based alignment specification and illustration
database designed to be accessed from a Hunter 611 series aligner with WinAlign ®
5.1 software and above.
The WebSpecs database is more than just a specification database. It also combines
the specification database with Hunter alignment adjustment illustrations.
The WebSpecs database is available during the entire alignment process, not just
when recalling specifications. Specifications retrieved from WebSpecs are saved to
the hard drive where they can be retrieved later without an Internet connection.
These specifications are recalled from the WinAlign ® Specifications screen just like
all the specifications loaded in the specification database.
When accessing WebSpecs, a window will open showing the screens created by
HTML and XML languages used on the Internet, but will be framed by the WinAlign ®
screen. What you see will be a web browser screen within the WinAlign ® program.

The WebSpecs feature lets the user obtain specs directly from the constantly
updated database at Hunter Engineering Company. The result is a rapidly updated
database to help the shop stay up-to-date providing access to the most current
specifications.
The Hunter Engineering homepage is accessible by selecting the

softkey in the second level of softkeys on every WebSpecs screen further increasing
the information available to the shop.
Hardw are and Softw are Requirements

The WebSpecs database requires a Hunter 611 series alignment console loaded with
WinAlign ® 5.1 and above software and WebSpecs Electronic Security Key (refer to
User Authorization below).
A modem and Internet access provider, or other Internet connection, will also be
required since the WebSpecs database is accessed through an Internet connection.
To use the “Need A Spec” feature in WebSpecs, the aligner console must have an
e-mail account set up.
User Authorization
The user will be required to obtain a one-year WebSpecs Access License. The
License provides a user identification and password tied to an electronic key. This
user name and key will only operate on one aligner.
At the end of the License expiration date, the WebSpecs feature will no longer be
available.
Installation Instructions
WebSpecs is a built-in feature of WinAlign ®. The Hunter Service Representative will
install the modem (or a network card) and the electronic key.
The shop is responsible for acquiring an Internet Service Provider and setting up an
Internet browser on the aligner console.
NOTE: The WebSpecs database requires the browser Internet

Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 2 or higher.
Using the WebSpecs Database

Start the WinAlign ® program and select “Begin Alignment.”

In the “Recall Specifications” screen, determine whether the vehicle is already in the
specification database. If the vehicle is not listed, select the “WebSpecs” soft key.
A WinAlign screen will open, requesting a user name and password. Enter the user
name and password provided with your WebSpecs electronic key. After entering the
user name and password, the WebSpecs screen will open. The password can be
saved and will no longer be requested.
The WebSpecs Registration screen will open. Fill out the information and select “OK”
on the WebSpecs screen, not the “OK” softkey. This screen will not need to be filled
in again, and will not show unless it is to be edited.

Basic Operation
Use softkeys to navigate in the WebSpecs screens. “Back” returns to the previous
screen, “Forward” goes to the next screen in sequence and “Home” returns to the
WebSpecs Vehicle Manufacturer screen. “OK” returns to the WinAlign ® program.
The “Print” and “Refresh” softkeys in the second level of softkeys will print or refresh
the screen displayed. The “Hunter Home Page” softkey will take the user directly to
the Hunter Engineering website.
The WebSpecs On-Line Spec Recall screen will display all available vehicle
manufacturers in the specification database. Click on the manufacturer to select.
Vehicles in the WebSpecs database for that manufacturer will appear. Each selection
will be highlighted in blue signifying a link to the specs of that vehicle.
If the User Name and Password were saved during the initial startup of WebSpecs,
the message “Clear Username/Password” will appear at the bottom of the WebSpecs
Home screen, as shown on the left screen. If the User Name and Password were not
saved, the message will not appear.
The right screen illustrates other links that will be on both screens. The link shown in
the circle on the right will return the user to the “Edit Registration Information” screen
to change any information that is no longer current. The link shown in the circle on
the left will allow the user to directly contact Hunter Engineering Company for a
specification not listed. Both of these choices will be available at the bottom of the
model selection pages also.

At the left will be a camera icon representing Adjustment Illustrations that are
available for that vehicle. Clicking on the blue underlined link will load the specs
directly into WinAlign ®. Clicking on the camera icon will bring up a new screen.
If the blue underlined link is selected, the program will return directly to the WinAlign ®
screen that is next in the procedure with the specs automatically loaded. Notice that
the vehicle shown at the top of the screen identifies it as WebSpecs. Compensate the
sensors and the vehicle is ready for alignment.

Recalling WebSpecs
Each time a vehicle is selected from the WebSpecs database, the specifications are
stored on the hard drive and can be recalled without using the Internet connection.
To recall WebSpecs, select “Show Spec Databases” from the second level of
softkeys from the Recall Specifications screen. Select “Saved WebSpecs” from the
screen display to view all saved WebSpecs listed alphabetically by manufacturer.
Select the vehicle from the screen, and begin alignment.
Deleting Saved WebSpecs

The WebSpecs database is limited to 50 maximum downloads. When the maximum
has been reached, WebSpecs will no longer save the downloaded WebSpecs. In
order to save new WebSpecs, it will be necessary to delete older downloaded
specifications.
The following message will appear automatically.
To remove the oldest WebSpecs, select the “Delete the ten oldest
WebSpecs” soft key. Selecting “OK” will load the WebSpecs into the
alignment procedure, but will not store the WebSpecs for recall.
WebSpecs can also be deleted one at a time.
From the “Recall Specifications” screen, select “Show Spec Databases”

to show all specification databases.
Select the Saved WebSpecs database to show all saved WebSpecs.
Highlight the specification to be deleted (only one can be highlighted at a
time).
Select “Delete Specification” from the softkeys to remove.

Other WebSpecs Features
Need A Spec
When selecting “I need a spec that is not listed” the “Need A Spec” screen will
appear. The form will request a phone number and information about the vehicle in
question. A note box below can be filled with notes about the vehicle, or special
requests.
Once the form is complete, select the button. The request is

automatically sent to Hunter Engineering using your e-mail account. The screen on
the right will appear when the message has been sent.
Adj ustment Illustrations

If a camera icon is shown on the Identify Model and Year screen, adjustment
illustrations are available.
There are three different icons:
(teal) Represents recently updated adjustment illustrations, and (white) for

adjustment illustrations that have not changed recently. (red) Signifies vehicles
that require specific procedures, inspections, and/or tools prior to alignment.
When an icon is selected, a screen will appear with thumbnail images of the
adjustment illustrations available. Click on the thumbnail image to see a larger view.
Below the thumbnails is an option to view all the images at once in larger size. Also,
below the images is a choice to view lineart illustrations instead of photos.

When a thumbnail photo is selected, a large, more detailed image will appear.
Selecting the lineart option will produce the same screen as the photos, but in drawn
images instead. Selecting lineart decreases download times.
NOTE: If the modem connection is a slower speed (such as 28.8K),

then selecting lineart significantly reduces download times.
When a lineart image is selected, a detailed illustration appears.

Hunter Web Site
Selecting the “Hunter Home Page” softkey displays the Hunter website within the
frame of WinAlign. The site offers additional information for equipment owners and
users, a s well as sales and service personnel.
Selecting Display Units

Do not underestimate the importance of selecting the display units. Although
the ability to change display units can be beneficial, the factory specifications are
displayed in the format designated by the manufacturer.
Press “Set Display Units” in the “Vehicle Specifications” primary screen. The
“Alignment Measurement Units and Formats Setup” popup screen will appear listing
“Current” and “New” settings.
NOTE: The “Alignment Measurement Units and Formats Setup”

popup screen may also be accessed by selecting “Alignment
Measurement Units and Formats” from “Aligner Setup.”
Refer to “Aligner Set Up,” page 167.
This popup screen allows the units and formats for the various alignment displays to
be changed. Both the “Current” and “New” settings are shown as example
measurements.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight a display format type. When a parameter type is
highlighted, a brief explanation of the measurement type appears.

Press “Set Up Selected Item.” The “Units and Format Selection” popup screen
appears to allow the units and formats to be selected. This popup screen continues
to show the current and new settings for all the display formats.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired units, then press “OK.” The screen changes
to show the formats available for the selected units for the display format.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired units, then press “OK.” If the selected format
is fractional, a third selection must be made, in the same manner, to select whether
the fractions should be reduced.
When the final choice is made, the popup screen closes and the display returns to
the “Alignment Measurement Units and Formats Setup” popup screen. The new
example for the display format shows the selection just made.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight another display format and continue to set up the units
and formats.
If the change(s) should be applied only to the current vehicle, press “Apply New
Settings.”
If the change(s) should be applied to the entire factory database each time the
system is powered up, press “Set As Default.”
Press “Exit” to return to the “Vehicle Specifications” screen.

Printing Specifications
The vehicle specifications can be printed from the “Vehicle Specifications” primary
screen and the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen.
To print the vehicle specifications, press “Print” on the “Vehicle Specifications”

primary screen or the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen. The
“Print” popup screen will appear.
If you wish, type in a note to appear on the printout. Press “Print Specifications” to
print the vehicle specifications.
2.3 Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments
Vehicle Plan View Status Indicator

The “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” screen shows a graphic illustration of
a vehicle and the measured alignment angles.

The purpose of the vehicle plan view status indicator is to illustrate:
The geometry of the vehicle under alignment.
NOTE: This feature is more useful for truck applications because

automobiles all show similar alignment geometry.
Where and how the sensors should be mounted.

Which axle of the vehicle is currently displayed.
The current status of the sensors, transducers, and sensor
communications.
The indicator appears on the display when:
The primary or popup screen actively uses the sensors to measure or

adjust the alignment.
An alignment procedure is being selected, where one or more instances
of the plan view are used to illustrate the steps of the procedure.
During Virtual View and ExpressAlign® screens.
The indicator shows:
The vehicle geometry.

The currently required sensor mounting locations and orientations.
Which axle the measurements and adjustments currently apply.
Which axle is currently selected (which applies to jacking up the axle,
etc.).
The individual wheels turn red when a sensor problem is present.
To change the displayed axle measurements, click on a wheel of the indicator with a
pointing device, or press the softkey for “Show Next Axle.”
Sensor Troubleshooting
If a sensor has a problem, the “Sensor Status” popup screen will display, and an icon
appears next to the affected sensor to indicate the problem. If the sensor has multiple
problems, the icon representing the highest priority problem appears. Two icons may
appear at times, thereby showing two separate problems.
The highest priority problem with the set of sensors is shown above the plan view, as
both an icon and as text. The icon is duplicated next to the sensor or sensors that
experience the problem.
Note that different sensors may experience different problems at the same time. For
example, the left front sensor might require compensation while the right front sensor
has a problem with a camber transducer. An icon meaning “the sensor requires
compensation for runout” would appear next to the left front sensor, while an icon
meaning “the sensor has a transducer problem” would appear next to the right front
sensor. The compensation problem has a higher priority than a transducer problem,
and so the icon and text above the plan view would show the same icon as the left
front sensor along with the text “Sensor requires compensation.”

The icons that may be found next to the sensors in the sensor status popup screen,
and the text that would appear with the icon above the plan view, are as follows:
“Sensor is not connected.”

“Sensor has communication problem.”
“Sensor is an unknown type.”
“Sensor has self-test error.”
“Sensor is mismatched with others.”
“Sensor is not calibrated.” (Cal-Check®)

“Sensor has calibration errors.”
“Sensor requires compensation.”
“Caster adjust transducer has problems.”
“Camber transducer has problems.”
“Transverse toe transducer has problems.”
“Longitudinal toe transducer has problems.”
“Sensor has excessive runout.”
“Turn encoder has miscounted.”

“Ride height encoder has miscounted.”
“Sensor is not level.” (Level Reminder®)
“Toe transducers may require re-calibration.”
“Battery requires recharging.”

(red) “Target not found.” Targets need to be cleaned.
(black) “Target is found by camera, but not measured.”Targets
need to be cleaned.
The following icons can appear overlaying the line of sight from one sensor to
another:
“Transverse toe beam is blocked.”
“Longitudinal toe beam is blocked.”

Showing Measurements
For “Geometric Centerline” the measurements for alignment, front camber, toe, and
total toe will be shown.
For “Thrust Line” or “Total 4-Wheel” alignment, camber, toe, and total toe for the front
will be displayed as well as rear camber, toe, total toe, and thrust angle.
NOTE: These measurements should not be used to diagnose or

adjust the vehicle until the vehicle is lowered, jounced, and
the wheels are in a “straight ahead” position.
A red “X” next to the sensor having difficulty indicates a blocked optical path or other
communication problem.
The “Cross Camber” and “Cross Caster” values represent the difference between the
left and right measurements on the same axle.
The alignment measurements are displayed using the default unit of measure
(degrees, inches, etc.) unless you have changed them.
Alignment measurements for CAMBER, CASTER, S.A.I., SET BACK, and THRUST
ANGLE are generally displayed in degrees. TOE is generally displayed in either
degrees or inches.
NOTE: A negative sign (-) is used to indicate the following:

A negative value for a specified angle or tolerance
A SET BACK condition to the left (indicating the left front
wheel is trailing the right front wheel).
A THRUST ANGLE condition to the left (indicating a thrust
line toward the left of centerline).
Positive values for SET BACK and THRUST ANGLE
indicate conditions to the right.
Pre-alignment measurements can be saved to be printed on the summary after the

alignment is complete. This feature supplies the ability to compare the measurements
before and after the alignment. Pressing “Save 'Before' Measurements” will store
these measurements.
Bar Graph Adjustments

Bar graphs are used to show alignment angle information for each wheel. These bar
graphs indicate the difference between the actual measurements of the vehicle and
the recalled specifications. The adjustment tolerances determine the size of the
center areas of the bar graph.
Softkeys labeled “Show Next Axle,” “Show Bar Graphs,” and “Show Next Bar
Graphs” are available to access adjustment displays. The system utilizes both bar
graph and digital adjustment displays.
The numerical values below the bar graphs represent the actual measurement. The
“ideal” or “preferred” adjustment would find the wheel position indicator arrow
centered over the white line of the center bar and the numeric value reading the
preferred specification for the vehicle.
A red bar graph indicates the measurement is out of tolerance. On standard bar
graphs, an “X” indicates the measurement direction on the bar graph is beyond the
range of the bar graph. The “X” will change to an arrow when the measurement is
adjusted into range of the bar graph.

As the vehicle is adjusted, the wheel position indicator moves in the direction of the
adjustment. As the adjustment approaches the acceptable tolerance range, the
center area of the bar graph grows. When the adjustment is within tolerance, the bar
graph changes to green.
Range Virtual View Standard

3-D Bar Graphs Bar Graphs
Out Of Tolerance -
beyond range of the
graph
Out Of Tolerance
Acceptable
Adj ustment
(within tolerance)
Preferred
Adj ustment
If no 3-D bar graph is shown in Virtual View or the standard bar graph color is gray:
Either “no specification,” a “zero tolerance,” or “no tolerance” is entered for that angle.
OR
The sensors are experiencing some problem that prevents measurements, such as:
the sensor is unplugged, uncompensated, or the toe beam is blocked.
Bar Graph Groups

The bar graphs can be viewed in various groups. Three examples are shown below.

To view an alternative group or single bar graph, press “Show Next Bar Graphs.”
Repeat to view the next bar graph group. When all enabled bar graphs have been
viewed, the first enabled bar group will appear when “Show Next Bar Graphs” is
pressed.
To view a single bar graph select the desired bar graph with a light pen or mouse.
The system will “zoom in” on the selected bar graph and all other bar graphs will be
removed from the screen.
To return to the previous bar graph display, click on the current bar graph with a light
pen or mouse.
Like the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” screen, cross camber and caster
can now be displayed on the adjustment bar graph screen using the context sensitive
menu.
Front Axle Bar Graphs Groups, Rear Axle Bar Graphs Groups, and Cross Bar
Graph/Additional Cross Angles may be setup in aligner setup.

Context Sensitive Menu
A context sensitive menu is available on the bar graph adjustment screen.
To view the menu, move the arrow cursor to the desired bar graph with a light pen or
mouse, then press and hold. Pressing the “Tab” key will also cycle through each
context sensitive menu.
The items listed in the menu will depend upon which bar graph is selected. The menu
may contain some of the following items:
Zoom In Zoom Out
Illustrate Adjustments Video Adjustments
Animation Adjustments Adjust with Eccentric Cams
Adjust with Shims Adjust Toe with WINTOE®®
Measure Caster Measure SAI/IA
Set Units and Formats Select Bar Graph Groups
Show Specs Hide Specs
Show Cross Bar Graphs and Additional Cross Angles Adjust With Automatic Bushing Calculator®
To select the desired item, continue moving the light pen or mouse until the desired
item is highlighted.
Release the light pen or mouse button. The selected popup screen will appear.
Zero Adjustments
The “Zero Adjust“ screen shows the amount and direction (±) the actual measure-
ment is from the preferred specification. Adjusting an angle to zero on this display will
cause the actual angle measurement to be exactly equal to the preferred specifica-
tions as established by the alignment specifications.
A red bar graph indicates the adjustment is out of tolerance Green indicates the
adjustment is within tolerance. The number “0” indicates the measured angle equals
the specification.

Showing and Selecting Front and Rear Axles
The front and rear axle measurements can be viewed at any time from the “Vehicle
Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen.
When the measurements for the rear axle are shown, press “Show Next Axle” to see
the front axle measurements.
When the measurements for the front axle are shown, press “Show Next Axle” to see
the rear axle measurements.
Alignment Procedure
Although the program begins a specific type of alignment, other types of alignment
can be selected on the “Control Alignment Procedure” popup screen.
The aligner can be set to default to the type of alignment that will usually be
performed. Some vehicle manufacturers recommend a particular type of alignment.
This information is part of the stored factory vehicle specifications and will change the
aligner to the recommended alignment type when the specifications are recalled,
regardless of the default selection.
Adjustment Order
The vehicle should be adjusted in the following order:
Rear Camber (if adjustable)
Rear Toe (if adjustable)
Front Camber/Caster (if adjustable)
Front Toe
NOTE: If a sensor is removed from the wheel during vehicle

adjustment, that sensor must be re-compensated when it is
re-mounted.
If a measurement displays in gray with no value shown and an error message is on

the vehicle graphic, something is wrong with the sensor at the wheel indicated. The
sensor may be disconnected, or an optical “line of sight” to another sensor may be
blocked. When the error is corrected, the error message will disappear and the bar
graph will return to normal. Refer to “Sensor Troubleshooting,” page 82.
Selecting the Procedure

Press “Alignment Procedure,” the “Control Alignment Procedure” popup screen will
appear.
NOTE: The “Control Alignment Procedure” popup screen may also

be accessed by selecting “Alignment Procedure” from
“Aligner Setup.” Refer to “Aligner Set Up,” page 165.

Press “↑” or “↓” until the desired alignment procedure is highlighted. The steps
required are illustrated when a procedure is highlighted. Refer to “Alignment Types,”
page 325.
Press “OK.”
NOTE: The steps required to perform an alignment procedure may

not be exactly the same as the “Getting Started” example.
Follow the screen prompts to perform any type of alignment.
DSP400 Alignment Reference

DSP400 Alignment Reference can be used only with DSP400 sensors and can be
set up only after DSP400 sensors have been selected as the default sensor type. To
select sensor type, refer to “Aligner Set Up,” page 176.
This feature allows the alignment technician to select between using a plane parallel
to the runways to determine wheel alignment angles (Runway Reference Plane) or
using reference planes defined by the current “live” positions of the wheels
(Live Reference Plane).
Using “Runway Reference Plane” to determine wheel alignment angles is identical to

conventional sensors.
Using “Live Reference Plane” to determine wheel alignment angles allows warped or
“non-flat” runways to be used.
The manufacturer’s alignment specifications are determined using runway planes

(Runway Reference Plane).
To select “Runway Reference Plane” or “Live Reference Plane,” refer to “Aligner Set
Up,” page 176.
Controlling Sensor Compensation

The sensors can be compensated by the 2-Point method or the 3-Point method. This
is controlled by WinAlign. To select the compensation method:
Press “Mount Sensors” on the “Vehicle Inspection” primary screen or

“Control Compensation” on the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjust-
ments” primary screen. The screen will change to the “Compensation
Control” popup screen.
Press “Use 3-Point Procedure” or “Use 2-Point Procedure.”
Press “Set As Default” to have the selected procedure become the
default.
Press “Revert To Default” if the selection was temporary and the align-
ment procedure for that method has been completed.

Measuring Caster, S.A.I., and Included Angle
The “Measure Caster” display provides guidance through the procedure to measure
Caster or Steering Axis Inclination (S.A.I.) and Included Angle (I.A.). At times,
measuring S.A.I., I.A. or turning angle may be useful “tools” to help determine front
su spension or steering system problems with a vehicle.
Horizontal bar graphs are used to indicate wheel position or angle position in relation
to the preferred position or specification. The center of each bar graph represents the
preferred position of the wheel(s) or angle.
The Caster measurement display uses graphics and horizontal bar graphs to guide
the steering of the wheels through the caster turn.
A wheel position indicator (either an “X” or an arrow) is positioned within the bar
graph and shows the position of the wheel(s). The wheel position indicator will be left
of center if the front wheels are steered too far to the left, right of center if the front
wheels are too far to the right, or in the center valley of the bar graph if the front
wheels are steered correctly (null position).
An “X” on a red bar graph indicates the wheels are steered beyond the range of
measurement. Steer the wheels in the direction necessary to move the “X” toward the
center of the bar graph. The “X” will change to an arrow when the wheel comes into
range of the bar graph.
NOTE: Total toe conditions greater than 2 inches or 4 degrees

should be corrected prior to steering caster.
As the wheels are steered in the proper direction, the arrow will move toward the
center. As the wheel approaches the acceptable tolerance, the center area will get
larger. When the wheel is within tolerance, the bar graph will change to green.
Steered out of range (right)
Steered too far (right)
Steered correctly (null position)
When the wheel is in the proper position, the arrow will be over the thinnest section of
the bar graph. The aligner will save the measurements and the bar graph will
disappear.

NOTE: It is not necessary to perfectly center the arrow in the bar
graph when steering to measure caster, caster and
S.A.I./I.A., or S.A.I./I.A. The wheel position is acceptable
when the arrow is positioned within the center valley of the
bar graph.
NOTE: If WinAlign ® determines that the brakes are applied or

sensors are unlocked while measuring S.A.I., a prompt will
appear asking you to check the sensors and/or brakes.
NOTE: DSP400 Sensor Only:

Unlike conventional sensors, DSP400 Targets should not be
unlocked and re-leveled if the target has rotated so that it is
not level after measuring caster.
If the DSP400 Sensor targets have rotated so that they are
not level after measuring caster but before adjusting caster,
“Match Caster Adjust to Measured Caster” may be selected
from the caster pull-down bar graph. This will allow WinAlign
to electronically compensate for rotation.
Measuring Caster
Press “Measure Caster” on the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary
screen. The “Caster and S.A.I. Measurement” popup screen will appear.
If “Caster Only” is not the default:
Press “Select Measurement,” the “Caster Measurement Selection” popup
screen will appear.
Press “↑” or “↓” until “Caster Only” is highlighted.

Press “OK” to select the measurement. The “Caster and S.A.I.
Measurement” popup screen will appear.
NOTE: This selection will not change the aligner default setting.
When the aligner is reset, the default settings will be applied.
Lower vehicle if raised and remove brake pedal depressor if installed.

Loosen the front sensor lock knobs.
A single bar graph is displayed along with a prompt to steer the wheels to the
straight-ahead position.

Steer the wheels until the wheel position indicator is within the center valley of the bar
graph and hold steady. The aligner will save the measurements and the display will
change to show two bar graphs and prompt to steer left. Depending on conditions,
you may be required to press “Ready” to continue.
The left bar graph indicator is controlled by the left wheel, the right bar graph
indicator by the right wheel.
Observing the bar graph display, steer the wheels to the left until either wheel posi-
tion indicator is within the center valley of its bar graph. Hold the steering wheel
steady.
The measurements will be saved and the bar graph will disappear.
Continue to steer the wheels until the remaining wheel position indicator is within the
center valley of its bar graph. Hold the steering wheel steady until that bar graph dis-
appears.
Two new bar graphs will appear and the steering wheel display will indicate to steer
to the right.
Observing the bar graph display, steer the wheels to the right until either wheel posi-
tion indicator is within the center valley of its bar graph. Hold the steering wheel
steady.
The measurements will be saved and that bar graph will disappear.
Continue to steer the wheels as indicated until the remaining wheel position indicator
is within the center valley of its bar graph. Hold the steering wheel steady until that
bar graph disappears.
A single bar graph will appear.

Steer the wheels straight ahead until wheel position indicator is within the center
valley of the bar graph. Install the brake pedal depressor and level and lock the
sensors.
Press “Ready” and the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen will
reappear.
These are the initial measurements of the vehicle. Press “Save ‘Before’ Measure-
ments” to save them for the printout. If “Set steering wheel status when
measurements are saved” is enabled from “Aligner Setup,” the screen will change to
the “Save ‘B efore’ Alignment Measurements” popup screen. Refer to “Aligner Set
Up,” page 155.
If “Set steering wheel status when measurements are saved” is disabled from
“Aligner Setup,” and all measurements are stable, and the vehicle is steered straight
ahead, then the “Save ‘Before’ Alignment Measurements” popup screen will be
continued through. The screen will briefly appear and the settings will be
automatically saved if everything is stable.
Make sure the vehicle is in the correct condition to save the “Before” measurements.
Jounce the vehicle, then steer the wheels straight ahead until the bar graph indicates
a null position.
For printouts, highlight the steering wheel level status. This message will be
displayed on printouts. In ExpressAlign ® it is necessary to steer ahead prior to saving
the current status.
Press “Ready.” When the measurements are stable, the program will save them for
ExpressAlign ®, Work Management printout.
The system will save the measurements and the screen will return to the “Vehicle
Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen if ExpressAlign® is not enabled.

Measuring S.A.I. and Included Angle
If measuring “S.A.I./I.A. Only” is not the default:

screen will appear.
Press or until “S.A.I./I.A. Only” is highlighted.

When the aligner is reset the default settings will be applied.
Lock the front brakes using a brake pedal depressor.
Steer the wheels straight ahead.
Jack up the front axle until the front wheels clear the turning angle gauges or rack.
The jack should securely support the vehicle.
Level and lock the sensors.
Press “Ready.”

Perform the S.A.I. turn while observing the bar graphs in the same manner as the
caster turn. Refer to “Measuring Caster,” below. When S.A.I. measurements are
completed, the screen will change to the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments”
primary screen with the S.A.I. and I.A. measurements shown.
Lower the vehicle.
NOTE: While lowering the vehicle, camber and S.A.I.

measurements will change. However, included angle
measurements will remain constant.
Measuring Caster and S.A.I./I.A. Sim ultaneously (FasterCaster ®)

The FasterCaster® measurement feature uses a single bar graph indicator instead of
using both a left and right bar graph indicator.

If measuring “FasterCaster® (Caster and S.A.I./I.A.)” is not the default:

screen will appear.
Press “↑” or “↓” until “FasterCaster® (Caster and S.A.I./I.A.)” is
highlighted.

When the aligner is reset, the default settings will be applied.
Lock the front brakes using a brake pedal depressor.
Steer wheels straight ahead.
Press “Ready.”

The aligner will save the measurements and the display will change to show a bar
graph and prompt to steer left.
The single left bar graph indicator is controlled by the left wheel.
Observing the bar graph display, steer the wheels to the left until the wheel position
indicator is within the center valley of its bar graph. Hold the steering wheel steady
until the bar graph disappears.
A single right bar graph will appear and the steering wheel display will indicate to
steer to the right.
Observing the bar graph display, steer the wheels to the right until the wheel position
indicator is within the center valley of its bar graph. Hold the steering wheel steady
until the bar graph disappears.
Steer the wheels straight ahead until wheel position indicator is within the center
valley of the bar graph.
When the caster and S.A.I. measurements are completed, the screen will change to
the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen with the caster, S.A.I.,
and included angle measurements shown.
Live Caster
If “Verify Caster Adjustment” is not selected in Common Alignment Preferences then
the “Verify Caster Adjustment” step is not added to any alignment procedure
Therefore, live caster (Caster Adjust) is the caster measurement that is shown on all
printouts under the label of “Caster.”
To set up “Verify Caster Adjustment,” refer to “Aligner Set Up,” page 162.

Lock-Check ® Sensor Checking Feature
If either or both of the front conventional sensors are not locked when they are
supposed to be locked while measuring Caster/S.A.I., a Lock-Check® warning
message is displayed as soon as the alignment technician starts to steer and a
sensor rotates in the wheel adapter.
Additionally, if the brake pedal depressor is not applied during a Caster/S.A.I.

procedure for which the brakes should be locked, the Lock-Check® warning message
is displayed. The Lock-Check® feature can detect the absence of a brake pedal
depressor in most cases, however there are some vehicles and conditions under
which this condition is not detectable by the Lock-Check® feature.
The warning allows the alignment technician to correct the problem and restart or
ignore the problem.
Measuring Additional Angles

Selecting “Make Additional Measurements” from the “Vehicle Measurements and
Adjustments” primary screen provides a choice of additional measurement
procedures.
Toe-Out-On-Turns
NOTE: To perform this procedure, electronic turnplates, DSP

sensors with the optional Toe-Out-On-Turns kit, DSP300
conventional, or DSP400 optical sensors are required. To
select sensors or turnplates, refer to “Aligner Set Up,” page
176.
Measuring Toe-Out-On-Turns can help find worn or bent steering/suspension

components.
Press “Make Additional Measurements” on the “Vehicle Measurements and

Adjustments” primary screen. The “Additional Measurement Procedures” popup
screen will appear.
Press “↑” or “↓” to select “Toe-Out-On-Turns,” then press “OK.”
If using DSP sensors with Toe-Out-On-Turns kit:
Connect elastic toe lines and adjust until taut.
A single bar graph on the display will prompt to steer the wheels to the straight ahead
position. If the sensors are compensated, the bar graph will be red. If the sensors are
not compensated, the bar graph will be gray.
Steer the wheels until the wheel position indicator is in the center valley of the bar
graph.
NOTE: If sensors are not compensated and electronic turnplates are

being used, press “Initialize Turnplates.”

The program will save the measurements and the display will change to show two
bar graphs and prompt to steer left.
Observing the bar graphs, steer the wheels to the left until the indicated “steer” wheel
position indicator is within the center valley of the bar graph.
Hold the steering wheel steady. The measurements will be saved.
If Toe-Out-On-Turns specifications have not been entered for the selected vehicle,
steer to the desired angle, then press “Store Measurements.” The measurements will
be stored for later computations.
Two new bar graphs will appear.
Observing the bar graph, steer the wheels to the right until the indicated “steer” wheel
position indicator is within the center valley of the bar graph.
Hold the steering wheel steady. The measurements will be saved.
If Toe-Out-On-Turns specifications have not been entered for the selected vehicle,
steer to the desired angle, then press “Store Measurements.” The measurements will
be stored for later computations.
Steer the wheels until the wheel position indicator is within the center valley of the bar
graph. The measurements will be saved and the screen will return to the “Vehicle
The Toe-Out-On-Turn results are displayed as “Left Turn Diff.,” which is the toe
difference between the left and right wheels when steered to the left, and “Right Turn
Diff.,” which is the toe difference between the right and left wheels when steered to
the right. If these measurements are not within specifications, the steering
mechanism should be inspected for worn or damaged parts.

Maxim um Steering Angle
NOTE: To perform this procedure, electronic turnplates or DSP

sensors with the optional Toe-Out-On-Turns kit are required.
Manual entry of data is also available. To select sensor or
turnplates, refer to “Aligner Set Up,” page 176.
Measuring maximum steering angles (lock-to-lock steering) can help find worn or
bent steering/suspension components.
Press “Make Additional Measurements” on the “Vehicle Measurements and

Adjustments” primary screen. The “Additional Angles Measurement" popup screen
will appear.
Press “↑” or “↓” to select “Maximum Steering Angle,” then press “OK.” A single bar
graph on the screen will prompt to steer the wheels to the straight ahead position.
If using DSP sensors with Toe-Out-On-Turns kit:
Connect elastic toe lines and adjust until taut.
A single bar graph on the display will prompt to steer the wheels to the straight ahead
position. If the sensors are compensated, the bar graph will be red. If the sensors are
not compensated, the bar graph will be gray.
Steer the wheels until the wheel position indicator is in the center valley of the bar
graph.
NOTE: If sensors are not compensated and electronic turnplates are

being used, press “Initialize Turnplates.”
If a caster steer has been performed, press “Ready.”
The program will save the measurements and the display will change to show two
bar graphs and prompt to steer left.
Steer the wheels left until the steering wheel stops at the lock. The lock angles are
displayed on the CRT.
If a wheel stops moving for more than two seconds after the measurement is above
25 degrees, the program will store the measurements. This feature is called “Auto
Store.” If Auto Store is not desired, pressing “Disable Auto Store” can turn it off. If dis-
abled, press “Store Measurements” when the wheels are at their maximum steering
angle.
NOTE: If the measurement is stored before the wheel reached the

lock position, press “Cancel” and restart the procedure.
The screen will change to prompt for a right turn.
Steer the wheels right until the steering wheel stops at the lock. The lock angles are
displayed on the CRT.
Once the measurement is above 25 degrees, if a wheel stops moving for more than
two seconds the program will store the measurements.
NOTE: If the measurement is stored before the wheel reached the

lock position, press “Cancel” and restart the procedure.

Steer the wheel back to the center valley position of the bar graph.
Press “Ready” if the caster measurement was previously taken.
The display will change to the alignment measurements display. The results are
shown as “Maximum Left Turn” and “Maximum Right Turn.” If these measurements
are not within specifications, the steering mechanism should be inspected for worn or
damaged parts.
Frame Angle Measurements

Now available for cars and light trucks, this feature is an adaptation of the WinAlign ®
Heavy Duty software frame angle measurement, which allows proper display of
caster for a vehicle that is not level.
Primarily for light duty trucks, WinAlign® software will automatically prompt for a
frame angle measurement when the vehicle manufacturer specifies that a frame
angle measurement should be used while performing an alignment.
Enter the “Left Frame Angle” and then enter the “Right Frame Angle.” Then select
“OK.”
Frame Angle can also be accessed by pressing “Make Additional Measurements” on
the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen. The “Additional Angles
Measurement" popup screen will appear.
Symmetry Angle/Set Back Measurements

The following measurements are available by selecting “Symmetry
Measurements/Set Back” from the “Additional Measurement Procedures” screen.
• Front Set Back
• Rear Set Back
• Wheelbase Difference
• Left Lateral Offset
• Right Lateral Offset
• Track Width Difference
• Axle Offset
Set Back Procedures
To achieve best results, observe the following practices when measuring symmetry
angles:
NOTE: Use the same wheel adapter mounting hardware (i.e. spade
sleeves) on all wheels. Mixing different types of wheel
adapters will result in incorrect measurements.
Steer ahead.

Make sure the wheel adapter is vertical if the center casting has been
lowered.
NOTE: Set Back is accurately measured only when the wheels are
steered symmetric about the centerline of the vehicle. This
procedure will “snapshot” the Set Back and Symmetry
Measurements when the wheels are steered straight ahead
and the “Ready” key is pressed.
To measure Symmetry Angles and Set Back, press “Make Additional Measurements”
on the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen. The “Additional
Measurement Procedures” popup screen will appear.
Press “↑” or “↓” to select “Symmetry Measurements/Set Back” and press “OK.” The
“Vehicle Symmetry Measurements” popup screen will appear.
Follow the instructions below as shown on the display.

Steer ahead.
Make sure the wheel adapter is vertical if the centered casting has been
lowered.
NOTE: Before using Symmetry Measurements, refer to “Symmetry

Angle/Set Back Definitions” for definitions and tips.

Press “Ready.” The screen will display a graphic representation of the symmetry
measurements and Set Back with the measured values indicated.
If the Wheelbase and Track Width specifications are available for the current vehicle,
the measurements will be displayed as linear distances.
OR
If the Wheelbase and Track Width specifications are not available for the current
vehicle, the measurements will be displayed as angles.
NOTE: To enter Track Width specifications, press “Show Secondary

Specifications” on the “Vehicle Specification” primary screen.
Enter the front track width into the Track Width Dialog Box.
Press “Show Rear Axle” on the “Vehicle Specification”
primary screen. Enter the rear Track Width into the Track
Width Dialog Box.
Linear Distances
Angles

Press “OK.” The screen will return to the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments”
screen and the frozen symmetry measurements and Set Back measurements will be
displayed as shown below.
NOTE: These angles are shown on the screen and on the printout
only if they have been measured.
Symmetry Angle/Set Back Definitions
NOTE: The names of these angles imply that fixed geometric

positions are being determined. However, the definitions
shown below indicate that their names can be misleading,
and that the measurements can be affected by alignment
conditions other than what their names would imply.
Front Set Back

Front Set Back is an angle formed by a line drawn perpendicular to the thrustline and
a line connecting the centers of the front wheels Front Set Back is positive when the
right front wheel is behind the left front wheel. Front Set Back is negative when the
right front wheel is ahead of the left front wheel. Front Set Back is measured as an
angle, but can be displayed in inches or millimeters if front tread width is available in
the vehicle specification data.
Thrustline
Rear Set Back

Rear set back is an angle formed by a line drawn perpendicular to the thrustline and
a line connecting the centers of the rear wheels. Rear Set Back is positive when the
right rear wheel is behind the left rear wheel. Rear Set Back is negative when the
right rear wheel is ahead of the left rear wheel. Rear Set Back is measured as an
angle, but can be displayed in inches or millimeters if rear tread width is available in
the vehicle specification data.
Thrustline

Wheelbase Difference
Wheelbase difference is an angle formed by a line connecting the centers of the front
wheels and a line connecting the centers of the rear wheels. Positive wheelbase
difference indicates that the right wheelbase is longer than the left wheelbase.
Negative wheelbase difference indicates that the left wheelbase is longer than the
right wheelbase. Wheelbase difference is measured as an angle, but can be
displayed in inches or millimeters if the track width is available in the vehicle
specification data.
Right Lateral Offset

Right lateral offset is an angle formed by the thrustline and the line connecting the
centers of the right front and right rear wheels. Right lateral offset is positive when the
right rear wheel is offset to the outside when compared to the right front wheel. Right
lateral offset is negative when the right front wheel is offset to the outside when
compared to the right rear wheel. Right lateral offset is measured as an angle, but
can be displayed in inches or millimeters if the wheelbase is available in the vehicle
specification database.
Thrustline

Left Lateral Offset
Left lateral offset is an angle formed by the thrustline and the line connecting the
centers of the left front and left rear wheels. Left lateral offset is positive when the left
rear wheel is offset to the outside when compared to the left front wheel. Left lateral
offset is negative when the left front wheel is offset to the outside when compared to
the left rear wheel. Left lateral offset is measured as an angle, but can be displayed
in inches or millimeters if the wheelbase is available in the vehicle specification
database.
Thrustline
Track Width Difference

Track width difference is an angle formed by the line connecting the centers of the
rear right and front right wheels and the line connecting the centers of the rear left
and front left wheels. Track width difference is positive when the rear track width is
larger than front track width. Track width difference is negative when the front track
width is larger than the rear track width. Track width difference is measured as an
angle, but can be displayed in inches or millimeters if the wheelbase is available in
the vehicle specification database.

Axle Offset
Axle offset is an angle formed by the line, which bisects the track width difference
angle, and the thrust line Axle offset is positive when the rear axle is offset to the
right. Axle offset is negative if the rear axle is offset to the left. Axle offset is
measured as an angle, but can be displayed in inches or millimeters if the wheelbase
is available in the vehicle specification data.
Toe Raised Procedures

The “Toe Raised Procedure” is an adjustment that is required for some specific
VW/AUDI models (currently the A4, A6, A8 and Passat Sport). If one of these models
is recalled from the specification database, the “Toe Raised Procedure” will be
automatically entered during the alignment procedure. If the indicated special tools
are not available, this measurement and adjustment cannot be made. A flow chart of
the “Toe Raised Procedure” is added to the end of this section for reference.
From the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” screen, press “Make Additional
Measurements” and the “Additional Measurement Procedures” popup screen will
appear as shown below.
Press “↑” or “↓” to select “VW/AUDI - Toe Adjustment with Vehicle Raised” and press
“OK.”

At the “Toe Adjustment with Vehicle Raised” screen will be several messages why a
vehicle may need a Toe-Adjustment with vehicle Raised. Such conditions as:
• Steering or suspension components have been replaced.

• There are damaged parts on the steering/suspension system or
body.
• Customer complains about abrupt steering wheel movement
when traveling over bumps or valleys.
Selecting “Adjust Toe with Vehicle Raised” will display the following screen. The
screen will show a picture of the VAG extender or adapter. This assembly will vary
according to the specification (A4 A6, A8 or Passat Sport) of the vehicle. Follow the
instructions on the screen.
NOTE: When using the special tool with extenders, make sure of
good contact around subframe mounting points for safety
and to prevent damage to undercarriage or suspension
system.
Install special tool as shown.

Unscrew spindles until they make contact around vehicle subframe
mounting bolts.
Press “Ready” and the following screen will appear. The screen will present an
illustration of the proper place of adjustment and two adjustment bars (left and right).
Proceed with the following instructions.

When toe is within specifications, press “Ready.”
Press “Ready” and the screen will display the special tool assembly for Toe Raised
Vehicles with the following instructions.
Raise the front axle.
Pull up cylinder, insert and secure pin as shown.
Lower vehicle onto the special tool.
There are several extenders and adaptors that are used with the V.A.G special tool.
The appropriate extender or adaptor will be indicated in accordance with the vehicle’s
specifications. The different parts are the following:
VAG 1925 = Special tool
VAG 1925/1 = A8 70mm extender
VAG 1925/2 = A8 18mm extender (used in most cases)
VAG 1925/3 = A4 105mm extender
VAG 1925/4 = A4 85mm extender (used in most cases)
VAG 1925/5 = A8 33mm adapter (used for sport version)
VAG 1925/6 = A4 22mm adapter (used for sport version)
NOTE: Using the pins to extend the cylinder upward inside the tool
will allow the vehicle to rest at the correct height for raised
toe measurements. The wheels themselves may or may not
be resting partially on the turnplates.
Press “Ready” and the screen will display the following instructions.
Raise the front axle.

Pull up cylinder, insert and secure pin as shown.
Lower vehicle onto the special tool.

Pressing “Ready” will display the “Toe Adjustment with Vehicle Raised” screen
shown below. This screen is not an active screen, as the warning message in yellow
will show.
Pressing “Adjust Toe with Vehicle Raised” will move the user to an active (adjustable)
screen. Continue to adjust the vehicle to within specification.
Pressing “Ready” will display the screen below and the following instructions.
Lower the vehicle and jounce the axle.
Pressing “Ready” will display the adjustments made. If adjustments are not within
specification (negative or positive), move toe within specifications by repeating the
procedures again through “Adjust Toe with Vehicle Raised” until vehicle acquires the
required specification. The results of the adjustments can be viewed on the
measurement screen or the printout.

V.A.G. Flow chart
IS TOE (RAISED)
ADJUSTMENT NECESSARY? NO
YES
INSTALL SPECIAL TOOL WITH

SPINDLES MAKING CONTACT AROUND
SUBFRAME MOUNTI NG POINTS.
*RAISE FRONT AXLE TO POSITIO N 1
DISPLAY LI VE FRONT TOE BAR GRAPHS

WITH A TOLERANCE O F +/- 30’ EACH.
ADJUST IF NECESSARY. SNAPSHOT TOE.
RAISE FRONT AXLE TO POSI TI ON 2.
DISPLAY STATIC
LEFT, RIGHT, AND CROSS
TOE (RAI SED) BAR GRAPHS. ARE
VALUES WI THIN CONTROL
TOLERANCES?
NO
DISPLAY LIVE LEFT, RI GHT, AND

YES CROSS TOE (RAISED) BAR GRAPHS
USI NG ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES.
* ONLY A4, A6, ADJUST TOE (RAI SED).
A8, AND
PASSAT
SPORT.
LOWER FRO NT AXLE.
LEVEL AND LOCK SENSORS.
OR
*LOWER AXLE TO POSITION 1.
DISPLAY STATIC
FRONT LEFT, RIGHT, AND
CROSS NEGATIVE TO E (RAISED)
BAR GRAPHS. USE NEGATIVE OF NO
THE TOE (RAISED)SPEC. FOR
LOWERING. WITHIN
TOLERANCE?
YES
*LOWER FRONT AXLE.

LEVEL AND LOCK SENSORS.
CONTINUE WITH ALIGNMENT.

Ride Height Measurements
NOTE: Ride height specifications should be used only as an initial

screening test. Measure ride height using the OEM
procedure to verify that components meet the OEM
requirements.
The DSP200/DSP250 and DSP306/308 sensors will take accurate ride height
measurements using the Ride Height (RH) tool.
NOTE: Ride Height can be entered manually or electronically. The

“electronic” Ride Height is an optional kit that is installed on
both the DSP200/250 and DSP306/308 sensors for
measuring the vehicles ride height electronically.
To access Ride Height select “Make Additional Measurements” from the “Vehicle
Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen and select ride height. Ride Height
can also be added in Set up to be included in the Alignment Procedure.
The manufacturer may vary ride height specifications based on suspension and tire
options. Those vehicles will have an additional identification screen listing the
su spensions or tire options.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the model variation that applies to the vehicle being
measured. The “Ride Height” popup screen will appear with the specification. If the
model variation is tire size, then select the tire size that is the original equipment of
the vehicle.

NOTE: Lower and jounce the vehicle before measuring Ride Height.
Two methods of entering the measurements are available:
Electronic measurement using the Ride Height Tool.

Manual measurement using keyboard entry.
For electronic measurement using RH tool:
Level and lock the sensor on the wheel to be measured.

Insert the grooved rod of the RH tool into the opening in the top of the
sensor until the shoulder contacts the sensor.
NOTE: Failure to fully seat the shoulder on the sensor will cause
inaccurate RH measurements.
Raise the RH tool until the horizontal arm touches the underside of the wheel arch
above the center of the wheel.
WHEEL ARCH
GRASP TOOL HERE

AND RAISE
Hold the RH tool in position until the console beeps.
The program will display the measurement next to the wheel. The center of the
corresponding tire on the screen will turn green if the measurement is within
specifications or red if out of specifications. It will turn blue if the specification is not
available.
Remove the RH tool and repeat this procedure with the other sensors.

NOTE: Do not jerk the RH tool out of the sensor. This will could
cause the internal gear to spin resulting in an inaccurate
reading.
When the ride height of all the wheels has been measured, press “OK” to save the
measurements for printout on the alignment summary.
Ride Height can be re-measured at any time while on the ride height screen. Simply
re-insert the ride height tool in the desired sensor until the shoulder contacts the
sensor, and then raise the RH tool until the horizontal arm touches the underside of
the wheel arch.
NOTE: Failure to fully seat the shoulder on the sensor will may
cause inaccurate RH measurements.
In cases where the RH tool is too long or too short, manually enter the
measurements from the keyboard.
For manual measurement and keyboard entry:
Press “Enter With Keyboard” to enter measurements using the keyboard.
Measure the distance from the mark on the center casting of the wheel
adapter to the wheel well.
NOTE: Make sure that the wheel adaptor is vertical.
Enter the measurement from the keyboard.
Press “Select Next Wheel,” “Enter” or “Tab” to highlight the next wheel or “Shift” and
“Tab” to highlight the previous field. The program will display the measurement next
to the wheel. The center of the corresponding tire on the screen will turn green if the
measurement is within specifications or red if out of specifications. It will turn blue if
the specifications are not available.
Repeat this procedure with the other wheels.
When the ride height of all the wheels has been measured, press “OK” to save the
measurements for printout on the alignment summary.
Ride Height can be re-entered at any time while on the ride height screen. Simply
press “Select Next Wheel,” “Enter,” or “Tab” to highlight the next wheel or “Shift” and
“Tab” to highlight the previous field. Re-measure the distance from the mark on the
center casting of the wheel adaptor to the wheel well, and then enter the
measurement using the keyboard.
NOTE: Make sure that the wheel adaptor is vertical.

Vertical bar graphs and an illustration of a tire are used to indicate vehicle height in
relation to the specification. The center of the bar graph represents the specification.
The large numerical values on the outside of the bar graphs represent the actual
measurement. The “ideal” or “preferred” adjustment would find the indicator arrow
next to the white line of the center bar and the numeric value reading the preferred
specification for the vehicle.
Ride Height Bar Graphs

A bar graph with a red base and red fender indicates the measurement is below
specification. A completely green bar graph and green fender indicates the
measurement is within specification. Most vehicles have no upper limit in their
specification. A gray bar graph and blue fender indicates specifications are not
available.
Below Specification Within Specification Specification Not Av ailable

To display the recommended specifications on the bar graphs, press “Show Specs.”
If the specifications are displayed, press “Hide Specs” to remove them from the
screen.
NOTE: Ride Height can be measured in inches or millimeters.
Cross Ride Height

Ride Height also displays user-defined cross ride height bar graphs for each axle.
This measurement will help to determine if a vehicle is sloping excessively side-to-
side indicating potential problems with suspension, frame, or body components.
A positive arrow position on the graph represents a greater amount of ride height on
the left side of the vehicle, a negative arrow position represents a greater value on
the right side of the vehicle.
There is a "Default Cross Height Spec" softkey that allows entry or deletion of the
user-defined specification. The user may define a default cross ride height
specification to be applied to all cars for which there is no manufacturer's ride height
specification.

Select “Default Cross Height Spec.” A dialog box will open. Enter the default cross
ride height spec and press “OK.”
Ride Height Dependent Specifications

Some manufacturers require ride height to be measured to determine the appropriate
alignment specifications. Enter ride height measurement(s) into the left and/or right
dialog box of “Manual Entry Ride Height” popup screen. WinAlign will use the ride
height data to generate the recommended front and rear camber, caster, and toe
specifications.
Zoom
When measuring Ride Height using the RH tool, the aligner will detect which wheel is
being measured, and will zoom to the bar graph and image of that wheel. After the
measurement has been taken, the fender will turn green if the measurement is within
specifications, or red if it is out of specifications, as shown below.

The screen will remain on the individual wheel for about ten seconds, and then it will
display all four wheels.
To disable the zoom, press “Di sable Zoom.”
NOTE: The screen will not zoom if the keyboard is being used to
enter the measurements.
Printing Ride Height

When “Print Ride Height” is selected all the bar graphs shown on the screen and any
specifications used will be printed.

Tire Condition
The tread condition, tread depth, and tire pressure should be evaluated, before
continuing with the alignment procedure
“Tire Condition” may be enabled in Aligner Setup as an alignment procedure or can
be selected from “Additional Measurements.” Tire inspection allows tread wear, tread
depth, and tire pressure to be documented in the alignment procedure.
Having a tire with a tread condition, marginal tread depth, or not inflated to the
manufacturer’s inflation specification may result in an out of alignment complaint
even if the vehicle’s alignment is within specifications.
The selected tire for inspection can be changed by selecting “Next Wheel” or by
selecting the desired wheel icon in the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
The inspection selection can be changed by selecting “Tread Condition,” “Tread

Depth,” or “Tire Pressure“ from the softkey menu or using the icons in the upper left-
hand corner of the screen.
Tread
Condition
Tread
Depth
Tire
Pressure

From the “Tread Condition” screen, an assortment of tread conditions are available
for selection for each wheel. “Normal Wear” selection will appear green when
selected. Marginal conditions like cupping or feathering will appear in yellow.
Hazardous conditions such as tread or ply separation will appear red when selected.
Selecting the “Tread Depth” icon will display the “Tread Depth” popup screen. The
“Tread Depth” popup screen helps document the tread depth of each tire. The
smallest measurement taken for each wheel is entered into the corresponding data
box for all four wheels. Any wheels with measurements that are under specifications
are shown in red.
Selecting “Zoom In” allows the tread depth of each tire to be entered for one to three
locations across the tread. Depth should be measured in even intervals across the
entire tread area. Enter the depth of each location. Repeat this procedure for each
tire. The measurement units for tread depth can be changed in Aligner Set up.

Selecting the “Tire Pressure” icon will display the “Tire Pressure” popup screen. The
“Tire Pressure” popup screen allows you to document the inflation level of each tire. If
all tires are set to the same specification, select “Filled to Spec.”
Enter the tire pressure specification that all tires were set to and select “OK.”
The tire pressure screen will be updated to show all tires filled to specification.
Selecting “Print” from any of the tire inspection screens will print the tire inspection
information. Print should be selected after all tire inspection information has been
entered.
After evaluating tread condition, tread depth, and tire pressure, select “OK” to exit the
“Tire Inspection” procedure.

Tire Information
Tire information entered in the “Edit Tire Information” popup screen will appear on the
printout summary.
From the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” screen, press “Make Additional
Measurements” and the “Additional Measurement Procedures” popup screen will
appear as shown below.
Press “↑” or “↓” to select “Tire Information” and press “OK.” The “Edit Tire
Information” popup screen will appear as shown below.
Use the keyboard to enter the appropriate data into the “Edit Tire Information” screen.
This information will appear on the printout summary.
After the data has been entered, press “OK” to continue.
Illustrating Vehicle Adjustments

WinAlign ® software contains illustrations for adjustments. These illustrations are
drawings and photographic images of the Original Equipment Manufacturer’s method
of adjustments. They also provide instructions or information necessary to make the
adjustments.
To view illustrations:
Press “Illustrate Adjustments” on the “Vehicle Specifications” primary screen or

the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen. The screen will
change to show an adjustment illustration for the vehicle. Any additional
information required for the adjustment will also be shown.
Press “Next Illustration” or “Previous Illustration” to view additional illustrations.

Viewing images in “Illustrate Adjustments” defaults with text callouts applied to
the image.
To view the image without the overlay text, use the menu shift softkey, , to
locate and press the “Hide Text” softkey. The WinAlign ® program will remove all
text overlays for a clearer view of the vehicle’s image and illustration.
Pressing “Change Text Color” gives the option to view the callout text in a
different color. If it is found that the text is difficult to read because of the image in
the background, it is possible to change the color of the text for easier readability.
The optional text colors are green (default), red, dark blue, yellow, light blue, and
purple.
NOTE: Printouts of the photographic images and illustrations are

useful only if using a color printer.
Press “OK” after viewing illustrations. The screen will return to the primary screen
where “Illustrate Adjustments” was pressed.
Optional multimedia video instructions provide a live audio-visual demonstration of
adjustments. To view video illustrations:
Press “Illustrate Adjustments” on the “Vehicle Specifications” primary

screen or the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen.
The screen will change to show an adjustment illustration for the vehicle.
Press “Video Adjustments.” The “Video Adjustments” popup screen will
appear listing various videos available.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired video, and then press “Play Selection.”
Pressing will pause the video, and will restart the video after it has been
paused. Pressing will return you to the “Video Adjustments” menu screen.
After the video ends, you will be returned to the “Video Adjustments” screen.

Rear Adjustments
Rear Shim s
Full contact shims can be used to adjust the camber and toe of the rear wheels of
some vehicles. The shim is mounted between the hub/spindle assembly and the rear
axle flange. The shim is tapered, which changes the angle between the spindle and
the axle, thereby adjusting rear individual toe and/or camber.
WARNING: Do not use a full contact shim on vehicles with rear disk
brakes unless the brake caliper is mounted to the
spindle backing plate, not to the axle assembly. The
rotor and caliper must move together when installing a
shim in the rear.
The “Adjustment Illustrations” popup screen will indicate if the rear shims are suitable
for the current vehicle.
Using the Shim -Select ® II Program

The Shim-Select® II program can provide assistance in determining the correct full-
contact shim and the proper positioning of that shim for the required adjustments.
Press “Make Additional Adjustments,” on the “Vehicle Measurements and
Adjustments” primary screen. The “Additional Adjustment Procedures” popup screen
will appear.
If necessary, press “Select Rear Axle” to switch from the front to the rear axle. The
available adjustments for the rear axle of the current vehicle are shown.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight “Adjust camber and toe with full contact shims” (this may
be the only selection available), then press “OK.” The “Adjust Rear Shim
(Shim-Select® II)” popup screen will appear.
The screen opens showing the shim requirements for the left rear wheel. Press
“Show Right Shim” to toggle to the right wheel, and then “Show Left Shim” to toggle
back to the left shim.
The current measurements for camber and toe are shown in the “Before” column at
the upper left.
The “After” column at the upper left shows the residual errors that will remain in
camber and toe after installing the shim. These residual values are shown in bar
graph form so that the quality of the adjustments can be quickly gauged.

The shim required to make the changes is illustrated at the right. In the center of the
shim is the size and orientation angle required.
The shim is shown in the actual size and color so that the display may be used as a
template. If necessary, the shim display size can be adjusted by using WinAlign “Set
Up.” A paper template may be obtained by pressing “Print Shim Template.”
Press “Freeze Measurements” to freeze the measurements shown in the “Before”

column. The screen then displays “Measurements are frozen!” Freezing the
measurements allows the sensors to be removed from the wheels while the display
continues to show the shim requirements. Press “Unfreeze Measurements” to return
the display to normal “live” operation.
The brand, color, part number, and bolt torque value are listed below the “Before”
and “After” bar graphs. Several shim brands are supported. Select “Change Shim
Brand” to view the supported brands.
NOTE: The listed torque value may vary from the manufacturer’s
recommendation. Refer to the manufacturer's service
manual for the exact torque value.
When the adjustments are complete, press “OK” to return to the “Vehicle
Using Non-adjustable 1-Piece Shims

Non-adjustable shims are available with tapers in fixed increments. “Shim-Select ® II”
will normally pick the correct taper and orientation to provide the best adjustments
possible. For example, a shim with a 1/4 degree taper at an orientation angle of
63 degrees might be recommended.
The procedure for using this shim type is as follows:
Use the screen as a template or print a paper template. Place the shim
over the template and orient it such that it matches the template.
Mark the top of the shim.
Remove any segments or cutouts necessary to clear the mounting bolts
or other parts of the vehicle.
Install the shim with the top mark up.
Tighten the bolts carefully to the required torque.
These shims almost never adjust both camber and toe perfectly, and often require a
compromise between camber and toe adjustments. The bar graphs in the “After”
column show the quality of the adjustments provided by the indicated shim by
showing the residual errors for camber and toe. For example, camber might show an
“after” residual error of 0.05 degrees with toe showing 0.01 degrees.
To improve camber at the expense of toe, press “Improve Camber.” To improve toe
at the expense of camber, press “Improve Toe.” The “scroll bar” at the left of the bar
graphs shows how the residual errors are divided between toe and camber. If a
“pointing device” (a mouse or a light pen) is available, the scroll bar can be moved
directly with it. Using this method, the recommended shim can be “fine tuned” as
desired.
NOTE: The adjustments of the left shim can be fine-tuned

independently of the adjustments of the right shim.

For Full Contact/Dual Angle Shims (Original Hunter/Northstar Design)
Print template for shim, select proper shim part number under "Part Number"
heading. Place shim over template with serrations up and notch indexed to the
location shown as a black arrow.
Using a marker pen, place a mark at the 12 o’clock position on the shim. Mark the
tabs that need to be cut out, shown in gray on the template.
Using Hunter’s special cutter, 88-343, or other suitable cutting tool, nip the slots at
the ends of the tabs to be removed, cutting 1/8 inch or less. Next, grab the ends of
the tabs with the tool and bend downward to break the tabs out.
Remove spindle/hub assembly, clean mating surfaces, install the shim, keeping the
12 o’clock reference mark to the top and the serrations facing you.
Install and torque the mounting bolts to the specification listed on the printout.
NOTE: Hunter Engineering Company does not recommend stacking

shims.
Using Adjustable 2-Piece Shims

Several shim brands are supported. Press “Change Shim Brand” to show the next
brand.
Adjustable shims are two-piece shims that can be rotated, one relative to the other,
such that the shim has the correct taper. The entire shim is then rotated to the correct
orientation angle and installed. Such shims normally provide “perfect” adjustments,
provided the changes required are not so large that the shim cannot provide enough
change.
The procedure for using this shim type is as follows:

Use the screen as a template or print a paper template. Place the shim
over the template and orient it such that it matches the template.
Mark the top of the shim.
Remove any segments or cutouts necessary to clear the mounting bolts
or other parts of the vehicle.
Install the shim with the top mark up.
Tighten the bolts carefully to the required torque.

When this shim brand is used, the “Improve Camber” and “Improve Toe” softkeys are
not available, since they are not needed. The scroll bar that is used to improve the
camber and/or toe fit is not shown.
When using the Hunter 2000 shims, if the changes required are beyond the range of
the shim, it is shown adjusted to its maximum taper and is then treated as a non-
adjustable shim. In this case, the “Improve Camber” and “Improve Toe” softkeys
reappear, as does the scroll bar.
For System “2000” Hunter/Northstar Shims

Print template and place shim over template with System “2000” logo facing up and
shim pointers indexed at the white arrows on the outside of the shim on the template
(either arrow can be to either mark), or make sure the serrations on top and bottom
line up perfectly with each other.
Using a marker pen, place a mark at the 12 o’clock position on the shim. Mark the
tabs that need to be cut out, shown in gray on the template.
Using Hunter’s special cutter, 88-343, or other suitable cutting tool, nip the slots at
the ends of the tabs to be removed, cutting 1/8 inch or less. Next, grab the ends of
the tabs with the tool and bend downward to break the tabs out.
Remove spindle/hub assembly, clean mating surfaces, install the shim, keeping the
12 o’clock reference mark to the top and the System “2000” logo facing you.
Install and torque the mounting bolts to the specification listed on the printout.
NOTE: Hunter Engineering Company does not recommend stacking

shims.
Overriding the Recommended Shim

The recommended shim taper and the orientation angle can be overridden only if the
aligner has a mouse or a light pen. Override is controlled as follows:
A click with the cursor in the bottom half of the center of the shim
overrides the shim taper to select the next lower taper. For example, if a
1/2 degree shim is shown and the next lower taper is 1/4 degree, a single
click selects a 1/4 degree shim.
A click with the cursor in the top half of the center of the shim overrides
the shim taper to select the next higher taper. For example, if a
1/2 degree shim is shown and the next higher taper is 3/4 degree, a
double click selects a 3/4 degree shim.
Press and hold the left mouse button with the cursor outside the center
of the shim to change the orientation angle of the shim. “Drag” the
cursor, as if you are trying to rotate the shim, until the shim is oriented to
the desired angle, then release the button.
NOTE: When using the Hunter 2000 shim, if the required correction
causes the shim to appear as a non-adjustable shim, then
the shim is oriented to provide the best possible correction.
In this case, the “size” cannot be altered, but the orientation
angle can be changed as for a 1-piece shim.

When the shim computations are overridden in this manner, a softkey labeled
“Compute Shim Automatically” appears. Press this key to remove the override and
allow Shim-Select to compute the required shim.
The display continuously shows the residual errors or “after” adjustments that result
from installing the indicated shim, so that the quality of the adjustment is known
immediately.
NOTE: The left shim can be overridden independently of the right

shim. If desired, one can be overridden while the other is
computed automatically.
Adjusting the Shim Display Size

The display can be adjusted such that the shim appears life-sized. Refer to “Aligner
Set Up,” page 185.
Selecting the Default Shim Brand

The shim brand can be changed at any time by selecting “Change Shim Brand.” The
change remains in effect until the system is reset, at which time the brand changes to
the “default shim brand.”
To change the default shim brand, select “Select Shim Brand.” The “Rear Shim
Default Brand Selection” popup screen appears.
Use “↑” or “↓” a s necessary to highlight the desired shim brand, then select “OK.”
The current shim selection changes to the new default, and the new default brand will
be chosen when the system is reset.
Setting Up Rear Shim s

The “Rear Shim Default Brand Selection” popup screen is available from aligner
setup.
Contacting Shim Manufacturers

For help with Hunter shims, call toll-free 1-800-828-0255.
For help with Shimco shims, call toll-free 1-800-525-6505.
For help with Specialty Product shims, call toll-free 1-800-525-6505.

Front Adjustments
Front Shims
Press “Make Additional Adjustments” on the “Vehicle Measurements and
Adjustments” primary screen. This “Additional Adjustments” popup screen will
appear.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight “Adjust camber and caster with shims.”
Press “OK.” This “Adjust Front Shims” popup screen will appear.
Some vehicles with SLA-type (short/long arm) suspensions have shims placed
between the vehicle frame and the pivot arm of the upper control arm. Placing the
correct amount of shims at each pivot arm mounting point simultaneously adjusts
both camber and caster of the wheel. It is difficult to compute the required shim
changes, especially when the upper control arm is not symmetric. The specification
database includes information that allows the system to correctly compute the shim
changes required, even for non-symmetric upper control arms.
NOTE: The caster angle is a “live value” that is continuously

updated as changes occur to the caster angle during
adjustment. At the beginning of the procedure, install brake
depressor, then level and lock the sensors.
The procedure for making the shim adjustments is as follows:
Measure the caster, then popup the “Adjust Front Shims” screen.
Steer straight ahead, install brake depressor, then level and lock the
sensors.

Observe the required shim changes as shown on the screen. A negative
number means that the indicated shim thickness must be removed from
the corresponding position, while a positive number indicates that the
shim thickness must be added.
If desired, press “Freeze Measurements.” The screen then displays
“Measurements are frozen!” and “freezes” the required shim changes.
Freezing the measurements allows the sensors to be removed from the
wheels while the display continues to show the shim requirements, and
to unbolt the pivot arm to change the shims without losing the display or
required changes. Press “Unfreeze Measurements” to return the display
to normal “live” operation.
Press “OK” when adjustments are complete. The “Vehicle
Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen will appear.
One-Sided Adj ustments

Sometimes it is preferable to adjust camber and caster of only one wheel. For
example:
If the camber and caster of one wheel are within tolerances but not
exactly on specification, it may be acceptable to leave those
measurements unchanged.
If the camber and caster adjustments on one wheel do not have
sufficient range to allow adjustment exactly to specification, you may
have to accept what adjustment is possible.
In such cases, it is important that the camber and caster adjustments be symmetric
side-to-side. The system allows you to adjust camber and caster of one wheel to
match the camber and caster measurements of the other wheel, thereby achieving
symmetric measurements, even if those measurements are not on the specification.
Press “Adjust Only One Wheel.” The “Snapshot One-Sided Adjustments” popup
screen will appear, as shown below.
If you wish to adjust the left wheel and leave the right wheel unadjusted, press
“Adjust Only The Left Wheel.”
OR
If you wish to adjust the right wheel and leave the left wheel unadjusted, press
“Adjust Only The Right Wheel.”
NOTE: You can adjust one wheel to its’ optimum adjustment, then
press “Adjust Only One Side” to optimize the other wheel.
When the camber and caster measurements are stable on the wheel that will remain
unadjusted, the system will save those measurements to be used as the targets for
adjusting the other wheel. The “Adjust Front Shims” popup screen will appear.

The prompt will instruct you to change the shims only on the wheel to be adjusted.
The shim changes shown for the wheel are the adjustments required to make the
camber and caster of that wheel match the camber and caster of the other wheel.
To return to adjusting both wheels, press “Adjust Both Wheels.”
NOTE: You may “Freeze Measurements” either before or after

pressing “Adjust Only One Wheel.”
CAMM ® (Control Arm Movement Monitor) for Front Cams and Slots
Press “Make Additional Adjustments” on the “Vehicle Measurements and
Adjustments” primary screen. The “Additional Adjustment Procedures” popup screen
will appear, as shown below.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the adjustment procedure for cams or slots. The “Adjust
Front Cams and Slots” popup screen will appear, as shown below. If ExpressAlign ®
has been enabled the screen will appear automatically.
Press “Jack Up Front Wheels” to adjust with the wheels off the rack. The “Axle
Jacking Procedure” popup screen will appear.
Raise the selected axle and press “Ready.” The program will compensate for the
difference in sensor readings caused by raising the wheels.
OR
Press “Adjust On Turnplates” to make adjustments without raising the vehicle.

The “Adjust Front Cams and Slots” popup screen will appear, as shown below.
CAMM® will determine the cam or slot that should be adjusted first (front or rear).
When no adjustments have been made and the adjustment is off the scale an “X”
appears.
When adjustments have begun an arrow appears indicating the direction the control
arm is being moved. A green arrow will point toward the center of the graph if
adjustments are being made correctly, or a red arrow will appear if adjustments are
moving away from the center of the graph.
Adjust the front cam or slot until the arrow is in the center of the bar graph. As the
adjustments are made the indicator will move to the center of the bar graph and the
bar graph will turn from gray to blue.

In the example above the rear cam is adjusted first. When the bar graph has turned
blue, tighten the cam, then select “Adjust Front” to adjust the front cam. Each time
the aligner will re-analyze the changes required before switching to the other cam or
slot and showing the bar graph. Continue making adjustments as directed. When the
adjustment has moved camber and caster to within specs for that particular wheel a
popup screen notifying the technician that no more adjustments are required will
appear.
Select “Continue Procedure” to move on to the next step in the alignment procedure.
If the other wheel still requires adjustment the program will automatically switch to
that wheel. Make the adjustments to that wheel as directed above.
If at any time the steering wheel is moved away from center, a bar graph will appear
with the steering wheel’s current position and the note “Steer wheel to the center.”
Correct the steering condition and continue with the procedure.
Select “Match Using Cross Spec” to have CAMM® add the correct amount of
difference the vehicle manufacturer recommends. An example of this would be:
Caster spec left: 4.0 degrees
Caster spec right: 5.0 degrees
Actual Left Caster: 3.7
Actual Right Caster: 1.2
If the technician is adjusting the right side of the vehicle using “Match Using
Cross Spec,” right caster will be adjusted to 4.7 degrees. If the left and right
spec for camber or caster is different it will add or subtract the correct
amount. If there is not a difference it will match them exactly.

Caster and camber bar graphs can also be displayed by selecting “Show Bar
Graphs.” The bar graphs should be used for reference only. Actual adjustments
should be made using the blue CAMM® bar graphs.
Select "Lower Wheels and Finish" when all adjustments are completed.
WINT OE® Toe Adjustment System

WINTOE ® is a software feature that allows the adjustment of front toe on vehicles
with an independent tie rod adjustment for each wheel. Using WINTOE ® will provide
the desired toe settings for each wheel and insure the desired steering wheel
position, normally without the need to readjust or touch up settings. Additionally,
WINTOE ® eliminates the need to lock the steering wheel during toe adjustments.
There are a few special cases in which a different WINTOE ® procedure will be used
to adjust front toe:
a) Vehicles with single tie rod and no adjustable draglink

b) Vehicles with relay rod and adjustable draglink
To access WINTOE ® directly from the front bar graphs, press and hold the light pen
or the left mouse button on either the left or right toe bar graph, then highlight “Adjust
Toe with WINTOE®” from the pulldown menu and release.
OR
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight “Adjust Toe with WINTOE®” under the “Make Additional
Adjustments” secondary screen. The “WINTOE ®” popup screen will appear
prompting to level the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position as indicated.

For vehicles with power steering, place the transmission in park or neutral, install
brake depressor, and make sure the wheels are chocked, start the engine and level
the steering wheel. Steering wheel leveling is important and should be performed as
follows:
While sitting in the driver’s seat, rock the steering wheel back and forth in
arcs left and right from the level position. The arcing motion should start
out with larger arcs and gradually become smaller arcs with the result
being to have the steering wheel be precisely leveled while ensuring that
the steering system is carefully positioned in the mid-point of any gear
lash and power steering valve movement.
Use chalk to mark the leveled steering wheel position with the side of the
steering column. This easy to see reference mark will save time in final
adjustment verification.
With the steering wheel centered, turn the engine off and exit the vehicle,
being careful to not touch or bump the wheel position. IT IS NOT
NECESSARY TO LOCK THE STEERING WHEEL. (Does not apply to
®
the two special cases in which a different WINTOE procedure will be
used to adjust front toe.)
While being careful to not disturb the position of any wheels or steering
linkage, level and lock all four wheel sensors.
IMPORTANT: Before locking the adjustment, lightly jounce the front end to
verify the “relaxed” position. Lock the adjustment and lightly
re-jounce the suspension to verify adjustment. As long as
the bar graph remains green, with the adjustment locked,
you can proceed. The value does not have to read zero. To
prevent incorrect adjustments, WINTOE ® does not allow the
operator to proceed unless the locked adjustment is green.
Follow the on-screen instructions and press “Ready.”
This will allow WINTOE ® to “memorize” each front wheel’s position and needed tie
rod adjustments relative to the desired steering wheel position. Keep in mind, the
WINTOE ® feature’s memory will track the needed adjustments for each wheel, even
if the steering moves or gets jarred during the adjustment process. As long as the
wheels are within approximately two degrees left or right from straight ahead,
WINTOE ® automatically compensates for any movement in the steering system and
continues to accurately monitor the adjustments.

The screen will change to display a bar graph prompting to adjust the right toe.
Adjust right tie rod until toe is zero. Jounce the front axle. Readjust the right tie rod if
necessary. Equalize all rotational movement in the joints by making sure that each
ball and socket joint in the steering linkage can be rotated in either direction the same
distance.
Lock the adjustment, then lightly jounce the front end again to verify the adjustment.
As long as the bar graph remains green, with the adjustment locked, you may
proceed. The value does not have to read zero, buy the bar graph must be green.
®
NOTE: To prevent incorrect adjustments, WINTOE prevents the
operator to proceed unless the locked adjustment is green.
After the right side adjustment is completed and locked, pressing “Ready” will display
a bar graph prompting to adjust the left toe.

Adjust left tie rod until toe is zero. Jounce the front axle. Readjust the left tie rod if
necessary.
Equalize all rotational movement in the joints.

Lock the adjustment, and then lightly jounce the front end again to verify the
adjustment. As long as the bar graph remains green with the adjustment locked,
you may proceed. The value does not have to read zero, however, the bar graph
must be green.
Press “Ready.” The screen will change to display one bar graph.
To verify steering wheel position, steer straight ahead. The arrow should be centered
on the bar graph and the steering wheel level. Restart WINTOE® if the steering wheel
is not level.
NOTE: For vehicles with power steering, start the engine, and with a
slight rocking motion of the steering wheel, steer the arrow
on the bar graph to the center. Observe the final steering
wheel position.
NOTE: You may also use the reference chalk marks, if used earlier,
to index the level steering wheel position.
After verification of steering wheel position, the on-screen instructions will prompt you
to press “Ready.” This will complete the WINTOE ® procedure by returning to the
primary “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” screen.

Automatic Bushing Calculator® Adjustment Feature
Automatic Bushing Calculator® (ABC) provides assistance in determining the correct
bushing size and proper positioning for the required adjustments.
NOTE: Do NOT remove bushings until instructed to do so.

The illustrated blue arrow depicts the center of the thin wall.
This is NOT the bushing crush gap.
Press “Make Additional Adjustments,” on the “Vehicle Measurements and

Adjustments” primary screen.
The “Additional Adjustment Procedures” popup screen will appear. Press “↑” or “↓” to
highlight “Adjust camber/caster with bushings.”
Press “OK.”
OR
Select “Adjust with Automatic Bushing Calculator” from the context sensitive menu.

In the left lower corner of each applicable bar graph, there will be a bushing icon,
, to indicate that the Automatic Bushing Calculator® is available.
If the “Steer Ahead” popup screen appears, steer the wheels straight ahead.
Press “Ready.” Measurements will automatically be frozen.
Do not remove the bushing.
The screen then displays “Measurements are frozen!” Freezing the measurements
allows the sensors to be removed from the wheels while the display continues to
show the bushing requirements. Press “Unfreeze Measurements” to return the
display to normal “live” operation.

Identify and enter the shape of the current bushing by pressing “Tab” and “↑” or “↓“ to
highlight the desired choice or using the mouse or lightpen.
Record the current position of the bushing into the computer.
NOTE: The illustrated blue arrow depicts the center of the thin wall.
This is NOT the bushing crush gap.
Adjust the blue arrow to the center of the thinwall on the illustrated
bushing with a light pen or a mouse
OR
Enter the data manually by pressing “Tab” to highlight the “Position of
Current Bushing” data box and entering the degrees using the illustrated
bushing as a reference for direction.
Identify the size of the current bushing by looking at the stamped size on the side of
the bushing and enter the size into the “Size of Current Bushing” data box.
NOTE: ABC accepts bushing size values in both decimal degrees

and fractional degrees. If the bushing is stamped in degrees
and minutes (example 1°30’), you should convert the value
to degrees before you enter it.
DEGREES AND MINUTES = DEGREES

0°15’ .25°
0°30’ .50°
0°45’ .75°
1°00’ 1.00°
1°15’ 1.25°
1°30’ 1.50°
1°45’ 1.75°
2°00’ 2.00°
After you have finished entering the existing bushing information, press “OK.”
The “Adjust Front Bushings” popup screen will appear. The screen opens showing
the bushing requirements for the left wheel. Press “Show Right Bushing” to toggle to
the right wheel, and then “Show Left Bushing” to toggle back.
Before removing the bushing, mark a reference line on the bushing that indicates the
“front” orientation of the bushing in its current position. Remove the bushing.
This screen will display the existing bushing information and the required adjustment
bushing information. The currently measured camber and caster are shown in the
“Before” column at the upper left.

The “After” column shows the residual errors that will remain in camber and caster
after installing the bushing. These residual values are shown in bar graph form so
that the quality of the adjustments can be quickly gauged.
The size, installation position, brand and part number for the required bushing will be
displayed in the lower lefthand corner of the screen.
The size and position of the required bushing are computed for optimum adjustment,
but may be manually overridden by the technician by either selecting the adjustment
arrows to the right of the numbers, or by moving the blue arrow to the new placement
of the thinwall of the bushing.
Initially the computer considers both readings to have equal importance, but the scroll
bar to the right of the camber and caster readings allows the technician to prioritize
the need for either camber or caster adjustment as more or less important. “Improve
Camber” and “Improve Caster” can also be selected to move the scroll bar. For
instance, scrolling toward caster increases the importance of caster adjustment and
decreases the importance of the camber adjustment. The bushing will be changed
accordingly.
Selecting “Change Bushing Brand” will change the bushing manufacturer to the next
manufacturer available.
Selecting “Print Bushing and Template” will print the template of the bushing that can
be helpful in placement of the bushing. The bushing is shown in the actual size so
that the display may be used as a template.
Selecting “Select Bushing Brand” will present the technician with a list of bushing
brands. The desired manufacturer can be selected by pressing “↑” or “↓” to highlight
the manufacturer and selecting “OK.”

When used with ExpressAlign ® the Alignment Bushing Calculator® allows for one
wheel to be adjusted when the opposite wheel is within specification. When this
situation occurs, the popup screen will provide you with a list of options that will allow
you to select “Adjust Only One Wheel,” “Adjust Both Wheels,” or “Adjust to Actual
Value.”
Selecting “Adjust Only One Wheel” when the left wheel is out of specification will set
the specification for the left wheel to right value + cross spec. If the right side were
out of specification, then right wheel would be set to left value - cross spec.
To adjust both wheels using ABC® with ExpressAlign ®:
Adjust the left wheel first. After adjusting the left wheel, press “OK.”
WinAlign will display the steer ahead screen again. This time, K3 will
read “Use Frozen Measurements.”
Press “Use Frozen Measurements” to bypass the steer ahead screen
and use the previously frozen measurements. This prevents the user
from having to re-mount the wheel and sensors, lower and jounce the
vehicle, re-compensate the sensors, and steer ahead to re-freeze the
measurements.
When all adjustments are completed, press “OK” to return to the “Vehicle
Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen. After adjusting camber and/or
caster using ABC®, lower and jounce the vehicle, then re-compensate the sensors.
Adjusting With Axles Raised

A vehicle may require that the wheels be raised to make an adjustment to rear or
front camber and caster. When the wheels are raised, the sensors will move and the
angles will change. If the instructions are followed, the software
compensates for the movement of the sensors to allow accurate adjustment.
NOTE: This procedure is not useful for installing shims, wedges, etc.
when the adjustment requires the removal of the sensor and
wheel assembly.
To adjust vehicle with axle raised:
Press “Jack Up Selected Axle” on the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments”

primary screen.

The “Axle Jacking Procedure” popup screen will appear.
Steer the vehicle straight ahead and press “Ready.”
After the selected axle is raised, press “Ready.” The program will compensate for the
difference in sensor readings caused by raising the wheels and return to the “Vehicle
Make the necessary adjustments while observing the bar graphs.
Press “Lower Selected Axle” on the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments”
primary screen. The “Axle Jacking Procedures” popup screen will appear.
Lower the vehicle and then jounce.

Press “Ready.” The screen will return to the “Vehicle Measurements and

Saving “Before” Measurements
To include the before adjustment measurements on the summary printout or to see
what they were, the measurements must be saved.
Perform caster steer as described in “Measuring Caster.” When the procedure is
complete, the screen will return to the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments”
primary screen.
Press “Save ‘Before’ Measurements.” The “Save ‘Before’ Alignment Measurements”
popup screen will appear.
Steer the wheels straight ahead as indicated by the bar graph on the screen.
For printouts, highlight the steering wheel level status. This message will be
displayed on printouts.
Press “Ready.” The program will save the before measurements and the screen will
return to the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen.
To save current measurements as before measurements, refer to “Saving Current
Measurements as ‘Before’ Measurements,” page 142.
Control Saved Measurements

Show ing “Current” Measurements
To display the current measurements of the vehicle:
Press “Control Saved Measurements” on the “Vehicle Measurements
and Adjustments” primary screen. The “Control Saved Measurements”
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight “Show ‘Current’ Measurements.”
Press “OK.” The “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary screen

will appear. The bar graphs will display the current measurements.

Show ing “Before” Measurements
To see what the before adjustment measurements were:
NOTE: If the “before” measurements are not saved, the bar graphs
will become gray.

Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight “Show ‘Before’ Measurements.”
Press “OK.” The “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary

screen will appear.
The bar graphs will revert to the before measurements. The screen will
indicate this with a yellow bar across the top. When the before
measurements are on the screen adjustments cannot be made.
Saving “Current” Measurements as “Before” Measurements
To replace the before measurements with the current measurements:

Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight “Save ‘Current’ Measurements as ‘Before’.”
Press “OK.” The “Save ‘Before’ Alignment Measurements” popup screen

will appear.

Steer the wheels straight ahead as indicated by the bar graph on the
screen.
Press “Ready.” The program will save the before measurements and the
screen will return to the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments”
primary screen.
Print Selections
Access the print selections from the “Vehicle Specifications” or the “Vehicle
Measurements and Adjustments” primary screens. This screen will also be available
at the end of the alignment process.
The printer can also be set up from this screen.
(The printer can also be set up by pressing the printer icon on the Procedure
Bar.)
A note can be added to the printout by typing a message on this screen in the space
provided, as shown below.

Print Sym ptom Report
After measurements have been taken, a Symptom Report of the current alignment
conditions can be printed. The printout will display the current readings of the main
alignment angles and will describe how the condition will affect handling and illustrate
how it will affect tire wear.
Printing the Vehicle

When selecting “Print Vehicle” a second dialog box will open with the options “Before
Measurements,” “Current Measurements,” or “Before and Current.” These selections
can be accessed from the “Vehicle Specifications” or “Measurements and
Adjustments screens.”
Or
The options can be selected by pressing the printer icon on the Procedure Bar.

Selecting any of these options will produce a printout that will display the bar graphs
of the measurements taken during the alignment process, with the specified readings
and the specifications.

Print Summ ary
“Print Summary” is a standard text only printout, depicting the ‘Before’ and ‘Actual’
alignment readings for all the specific measurements taken. Readings in bold print
are out of manufacturer’s tolerance.

Print Specifications and Print Measurements
Selecting “Print Specifications” or “Print Measurements” from the “Vehicle
Specifications” or “Measurements and Adjustments screens” will print text only lists of
all specifications available for the vehicle, or the current readings with the
specifications included.
Print Bar Graphs

In addition to printing the measurements, it is possible to select “Print Bar Graphs”
instead of just the text, as shown above.
NOTE: “Print Bar Graphs” or “Print Vehicle” will supply useful

printouts only if printed on a color printer.
Press “Print” while in the Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments display. Then
select “Print Bar Graphs.” A secondary pop-up window with three options is available:
“Before Measurements,” “Current Measurements,” or “Before and Current.”

Selecting “Print Bar Graphs” prints the currently selected bar graphs (either the
‘Before’ readings, or the ‘Current’ readings) for the front and rear axles. The page
below shows the “Before Measurements” selection.
2.4 ExpressAlign® Alignment Adjustment System

ExpressAlign ® is a feature that analyzes an alignment job and directs the technician
through the alignment and adjustment procedures needed for a specific vehicle.
ExpressAlign ® reduces the alignment procedures to the minimum number of steps
required to completely align the vehicle.
ExpressAlign ® considers the following for each specified vehicle aligned:
The alignment adjustments that are necessary.
The alignment sequence and specifications for the adjustment(s).
The power tools that are applicable, (such as shims, WINTOE ®,

CAMM®).
The applicable adjustment illustrations and videos.

Then ExpressAlign ® creates a custom alignment procedure that allows the technician
to perform only the procedures needed for the selected vehicle.
NOTE: ExpressAlign ® may display bar graphs and prompt to adjust

an angle that is out of specification that is non-adjustable
according to the vehicle manufacturer. ExpressAlign®
displays these bar graphs to indicate a possible problem
within the suspension or steering components that needs to
be diagnosed and repaired for proper alignment. This is why
the manufacturer publishes a specification for that angle,
even if it is not adjustable. There may also be an aftermarket
kit available to make the necessary adjustment for this
angle.
Three levels of ExpressAlign ® can be selected from the ExpressAlign ® Setup, or a

custom setup can be chosen.
Level I is designed to provide the technician with the maximum amount of help and
support to complete the alignment.
Level II is designed to present the optimal alignment procedure while still showing the
user what tools and kits are necessary to complete the job.

Level III provides the optimal alignment procedure for the experienced technician.
Items may be selected individually for a custom ExpressAlign® setup.
The items available include:
Use WINTOE ® if appropriate for Vehicle

Use CAMM ® procedure if appropriate for Vehicle
Use Front Bushings if appropriate for Vehicle
Use Rear Shims if appropriate for Vehicle
Show Tools and Kits
Show Adjustment Illustrations
Show Adjustment Videos
Adjust to Half Tolerances
ExpressAlign ® can be setup from “Aligner Setup,” or while ExpressAlign® is running,

it can be setup by selecting “Setup ExpressAlign” softkey.
ExpressAlign ® cannot be disabled while using “ExpressAlign” to perform an

alignment job. ExpressAlign ® can only be disabled from “Aligner Setup.”
After the vehicle is selected, inspected, sensors mounted and compensated, caster is
measured, but before measurements are saved, the “ExpressAlign®” popup screen
will be displayed as shown below.

vehicle and procedures that are enabled or disabled in
“Setup ExpressAlign.”
On the ExpressAlign ® screen, press the icon on the procedure bar that corresponds
to the step to be completed. During the procedure, continue to press the next icon on
the procedure bar in order to progress through the procedure. As you go through the
procedure, the current step will be highlighted on the procedure bar.
An icon will be displayed in the “ExpressAlign®” popup screen for each suggested
procedure.
The procedure created by ExpressAlign® will be displayed in the vertical procedure

bar on the right side of the screen.
Procedures displayed with yellow text in the “ExpressAlign ®” popup screen refer to
adjustments that must be made for the specified vehicle. Procedures displayed with
black text are for measurement verification or to provide assistance during the
alignment.
Selecting “Print Analysis” from the softkey panel of the “ExpressAlign®” popup screen
will print all measured angles with the recommended procedures required to adjust
the angles.

Selecting “Use Half Tolerance” from the softkey panel of the “ExpressAlign®” popup
screen will reduce the specification tolerance to half of the original equipment
manufacturer’s recommended tolerance.
If one side of the vehicle is within specification, ExpressAlign ® will allow the side that
is out of specifications to be adjusted with the “One-Sided Adjustments” procedure. If
you complete the alignment and an angle has not been adjusted to within
specifications, ExpressAlign ® will allow you to select “Cancel,” “Cannot Adjust to
Specifications” or “Check With ExpressAlign.”
Selecting “Cancel” will return you to the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments”
primary screen.
Selecting “Cannot Adjust to Specification” will allow you to proceed with the angle not
adjusted in ExpressAlign®.
Selecting “Check With ExpressAlign” will create a new ExpressAlign® procedure and
return you to the “ExpressAlign ®” popup screen.

Filename: BASIC.DOC
Template: C:\Documents and Settings\dcwiklowski\Application
Data\Microsoft\Templates\D2h_in.dot
Subject:
Author: Hunter Engineering Company
Keywords:
Comments: Late summer, early fall of 2001, ed. DC, and DP
Change Number: 444
Number of Pages: 108
3. Aligner Set-Up
3.1 Set-Up
The aligner can be configured to meet many different operating needs. For example,
the “Customer Identification” screen can be removed from the prompt sequence so it
does not automatically appear at the beginning of the alignment process, but is still
accessible through the menu selection. Other selections such as the default
alignment procedure can be set. The Set-Up selections are stored on the hard drive
and recalled each time the program needs them. To modify Set-Up, press “Service
Programs” on the logo screen. The menu labels will change.
Press “Set-Up Aligner” and the “Aligner Set-up” primary screen will appear.
The current settings can be saved to disk or printed. To access these settings along
with WinAlign ® technical information press CNTRL+Shift+K1. The “Version” screen
may take several seconds to appear. Select “Print” to print all the settings and
WinAlign information. Or select “Copy Log files to Floppy Disk.”
If “Copy Log files to Floppy Disk” is selected the screen will request the user to insert
a formatted floppy disk into the drive. Select “OK” and the information will be copied.
The information in Set-Up can only be restored manually.
WinAlign Operation Manual 3. Aligner Set-Up • 153

Factory Settings for Aligner Set-Up
Account Standard
Display
Display Language English
Logo Screen Advertising Message Blank
Animated Logo or Still Logo Animated
Dynamic window open effect Disabled
AlignGuide Enable/Disable Enabled
Virtual View Model Detail Detailed
Alignment Procedures
Common Alignment Preferences Show Measurement Display after Compensation Show Measurement Display after
CasterDisplay DSP400 compensation instructions, Verify Caster Adjustment
ExpressAlign Preferences/Power Tool Preferences Level III
Alignment Procedure ExpressAlign T otal Alignment with Power T ools
Alignment Procedure Automatic Selection Automatically switch to Recommended Procedure
Alignment Measurement Units and Formats
Camber and Caster Display Format Degrees
T oe Display Format Degrees
T hrust Angle Display Format Degrees
Ride Height Display Format Inches
T read Depth Display Format Inches
Wheelbase and T rack Width Display Format Inches
Caster Measurement Selection Caster Only
Reduce Number of Softkeys Enable/Disable Disabled
Enable / Disable Manufacturer Specific Procedures Disabled
Set Vehicle Selection Options Selection Sequence Optimal
Default Vehicle Specification None (Choose vehicle specification every time)
Bar Graphs
Front Axle Bar Groups Camber, Caster Adjust and T oe; Camber, Caster, T otal T oe and Steer Ahead
Rear Axle Bar Groups Camber, T oe, T otal Toe and T hrust Angle
Cross Bar Graph/Additional Cross Angles: Enable/Disable Disabled
Show Specs on Bar Graphs: Enable/Disable Enabled
Printer
Printer Hunter Driver - IBM PPR
Print Language English
Printout Advertising Message Blank
Print Warning Message Enable/Disable Enabled
Report Format Standard Format
Sensors
Sensor T ype DSP250
T oe-Out-On-T urns Device None
Update Sensor Software Sensor requires version "1.5"
DSP400 Alignment Reference Runway Reference Plane
Conventional Sensors Compensation Options Blank
DSP400 Compensation Procedure Rolling Compensation using the Virtual View
HF Channel Selection Console Channel: HFSS 1
Calibration Reminder Never Remind
DSP400 Alignment Reference Reference Runway Plane (DSP400 Sensors)

Power Tools
Rear Shim Default Brand Hunter 2000
Rear Shim Display Size NA
Front Bushing Default Brand Blank
Virtual View Enable/Disable Enabled
Inspection
Select Inspection Mode Part List Inspection
Date and Time
Date and Time Current time and date
12 or 24 Hour Clock Display 12 Hour Clock Display
Date Format MM/DD/YY
Aligner Equipment
Calibrate Light Pen NA
Remote Control Channel Identification Remote Control channel setting: A, O
Select Logging T ype Statistical Logging
Transmi t Measuremen ts
T ransmit Measurements Destination T ransmit Measurements to a file.
T ransmit Measurements Format Partial Measurements C111 Audit Format A
Work Management
Work Order Fo rmat Custom Forms
Logon
Logon Enable/Disable Disabled
Logon Registry NA
Logon Password NA
AutoBackup Keeps backups for two days. Overwrite oldest backup. Backup path C:\Backup.dat
Tread Dep th
Define T read Depth Specification Not defined
154 • 3. Aligner Set-Up WinAlign Operation Manual

The “Aligner Set-Up” primary screen provides a list box of Set-Up items. Press “↑” or
“↓” to highlight the desired selection. When an item is highlighted, the current setting
appears on the screen, along with an explanation of the item. Press “Set-Up Selected
Item” to open the popup screen to Set-Up the highlighted item.
To move from a major heading to another major heading, press “↑↑” or “↓↓” from the
second tier of softkeys. The following is a list containing all the Set-Up options
including options using Digital Video.
Press “End Set-Up” after all the desired changes have been made to exit Set-Up and
save changes.

3.2 Program/Account
Setting Up the Program
If using the standard WinAlign ® key, there will be no options for setting up the
program.
With the appropriate electronic key, the Program/Account Set-Up selection will
provide a choice for selecting between WinAlign ® and WinAlign HD®.
Setting Up the Account

Standard Account Selections
In Set-Up, the Program/Account option will not be available unless the selection for
“Enable/Disable Manufacturer Specific Procedures” has been enabled.
Once that selection has been enabled, the Program/Account option will display at the
very beginning of Set-Up. When “Account” is selected, two choices will be available:
Standard Account, and Mercedes-Benz, as shown below.
Select the appropriate account for the alignments to be performed.

Special Accounts
This item is available only when an additional yellow, Custom Account key is present
on the Hunter Interconnect Board. The extra key provides authorization to access
features in the program that meet the needs of certain national accounts.
If this item does not appear on the Aligner Set-Up display, then only one account (the
Hunter Standard Account) is available.
When “Account” is selected, the “Account Selection” popup screen will appear with
the current setting on the screen.
Press “↑” or “↓” until the appropriate account is highlighted. When an account is
highlighted, a brief explanation of the account appears.
Press “OK.” The program selects the highlighted account and returns to the “Aligner
Set-Up” primary screen.
3.3 Display
Setting Up the Display Language

The Display Language identifies the language that appears on the screen displays.
This selection will not change the language used in the printouts.
When “Display Language” is selected, the “Display Language” popup screen appears
with the current setting on the screen.
A list of available languages is shown along with the current setting.

Press “↑” or “↓” until the desired language is highlighted.
Press “OK” to select the highlighted language for the screen displays and return to
the “Aligner Set-Up” primary screen.

Setting Up the Logo Screen Advertising Message
When “Logo Screen Advertising Message” is selected, the “Logo Screen Advertising
Message” popup screen appears.
This item displays an advertising message that will alternate with the logo image on
the logo screen.
Enter a message using the keyboard.
After the message has been entered, press “OK” to store the new message or press
“Cancel” to restore the old message. The program stores the message on the hard
drive and returns to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary screen.
Setting Up the Logo Screen

When “Animated Logo or Still Logo” is selected, the “Animated Logo or Still Logo”
popup screen appears.
The user can select either an animated logo or the traditional still logo to display
while the program is idle. If using a personal advertising message, the Still Logo must
be enabled.

Setting Up the Dynamic Window Open Effect
When “Dynamic Window Open Effect” is selected, the “Dynamic Window Open
Effect” popup screen appears.
Enabling “Dynamic Window Open Effect” causes popup screens to open with an
“expansion” effect where the popup screens appear to zoom open from the cursor’s
location.
Press “Enable Window Open Effect” to enable “Window Open Effect.”
OR
Press “Disable Window Open Effect” to Disable “Window Open Effect.”
Press “OK” to set the default to the “Window Open Effect” selection. The program will
store the information on the hard drive and returns to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary
screen.
Setting Up the AlignGuide™ Feature

When “AlignGuide Enable/Disable” is selected, the “AlignGuide Enable/Disable”
Select “Enable AlignGuide” or “Disable AlignGuide.” Enabling the AlignGuide™ gives

easy access to an array of information including videos, animation, and WinAlign ®
Help.

Setting Up Virtual View™ Model
When “Virtual View Model Detail” is selected, the “Virtual View Model Detail” popup
screen appears.
Virtual View™ can be displayed in two views: the Simple Model view for faster
transitioning between alignment views, or the Detailed Model for more precise detail
and better graphics.
3.4 Alignment Procedures
Setting Up the Common Alignment Preferences
NOTE: ExpressAlign ® must be disabled before a standard alignment

procedure can be Set-Up as a default.
When “Common Alignment Preferences” is selected, the “Common Alignment

Preferences” popup screen appears.
This selection will Set-Up the aligner program to include or omit certain screens in the
beginning of the alignment procedure.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the screen to be included or omitted.
Press “Disable” and the disappears. The highlighted screen will not appear in the
alignment prompt sequence.

Press “Enable” and a appears. The highlighted screen will appear in the alignment
prompt sequence.
NOTE: Ride Height measurements are taken after mounting and

compensating the sensors.
NOTE: After technicians are familiar with using DSP400 Sensors, it

is recommended that the aligner Set-Up feature for “Display
DSP400 Compensation Instructions” be disabled.
Press “OK” when the selections are completed. The program will store the settings
on the hard drive and return to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary screen.
Setting Up the ExpressAlign® /Power Tool Preferences

When “ExpressAlign Preferences” is selected, “ExpressAlign Configuration” popup
screen appears.
This selection will Set-Up the aligner program to enable or disable ExpressAlign ® and
to include or omit certain alignment procedures.
There are three levels of ExpressAlign® that may be selected. Select “Level I,” “Level
II” or “Level III.”
Lev el I

Lev el II
Lev el III
A procedure can be added or removed from any level.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the procedure to be selected or deselected.
Press “Deselect” and the “X” disappears. The highlighted procedure will
not be available to be used in ExpressAlign ®.
Press “Select” and an “X” appears. The highlighted procedure will be

used in ExpressAlign ®.

Setting Up the Alignment Procedure
NOTE: ExpressAlign ® must be disabled before a standard alignment

procedure can be Set-Up as the default.
When “Alignment Procedure” is selected, the “Control Alignment Procedure” popup

screen appears with the current setting on the screen.
Press “↑” or “↓” until the desired alignment procedure is highlighted. The steps
required are illustrated for the highlighted procedure.
For an explanation of these procedures, refer to “Alignment Types,” page 315.
Press “OK.”
NOTE: The steps required to perform an alignment procedure may

not be the same as the “Getting Started” example. By
following the screen prompts, any type of alignment can be
performed.
Total (4-wheel) or front (thrust line) procedures using two

sensors require mounting the front sensors on the rear
wheels, facing backward. This provides rear axle alignment
measurements and adjustments. This also allows the thrust
angle of the rear axle to be saved. Next, the front sensors
are moved to the front wheels. The saved thrust angle is
applied to the front wheel measurements.
If a “two sensor” procedure is used, the rear sensors must

be mounted on the rear wheels (even though they are not
used) so that their toe transducers will communicate with
those in the front sensors. Using this procedure, the rear
sensors cannot be compensated.
The program stores the setting on the hard drive and returns to the “Aligner Set-Up”
primary screen.

Setting Up the Alignment Procedure Automatic Selection
When “Alignment Procedure Automatic Selection” is selected, the Alignment
Procedure Automatic Selection” popup screen appears.
NOTE: ExpressAlign must be disabled before a standard alignment

procedure can be Set-Up as the default.
A recommended alignment procedure is stored in the vehicle specification database

for most vehicles. For instance, if the vehicle has rear adjustments, a Total Alignment
is recommended. If the rear is not adjustable, a Thrust Line Alignment is
recommended.
If “Confirmation required before switching procedure” is selected, the aligner program

will ask if you want to perform the recommended alignment procedure.
If “Automatically switch to recommended procedure” is selected, the aligner program

will automatically switch to the recommended procedure. This setting is the default
setting.
If “Do not switch to recommended procedure” is selected, the aligner program will go
through the default alignment procedure.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired item.
Press “OK.” The program will store the setting on the hard drive and return to the
“Aligner Set-Up” primary screen.

Setting Up the Alignment Measurement Units and Formats
When “Alignment Measurement Units and Formats Set-Up” is highlighted, the current
settings for the various alignment display formats are shown in the form of example
measurements. When this item is selected, the “Alignment Measurements Units and
Formats Set-Up” popup screen appears.
This popup screen allows the units and formats for the various alignment display
formats to be changed. Both the “Current” and “New” settings are shown as example
measurements.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight a display format. When a display format is highlighted, a
brief explanation of the measurement type appears.
Press “Set-Up Selected Item.” The “Units and Format Selection” popup screen
appears. The units and formats can be changed for the highlighted display format.
This popup screen continues to show the current and new settings for all the display
formats.

The units and formats for each display format are selected on this popup screen.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired units, then press “OK.” The screen changes
to show the formats available for the selected unit(s).
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired units, then press “OK.” If the selected format
is fractional, a third selection must be made, in the same manner, to select whether
the fractions are to be reduced. When the final choice is made, the popup screen
closes and the display returns to the “Alignment Measurement Units and Formats
Set-Up” popup screen. The new example for the display format shows the recent
selection.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight another parameter type and continue to Set-Up the units
and formats for all the parameter types. When the new examples show the desired
units and formats, press “Apply New Settings.” The program stores the new settings
on the hard drive and returns to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary screen.
About Units
“Units” refers to the physical units in which the measurements are made for the vari-
ous parameter types. “Angular” measurements, such as camber and thrust angle, are
measured as degrees, but can be displayed in the units of degrees or degrees and
minutes. “Distance” measurements, such as ride height and wheelbase, are
measured as inches but can be displayed in the units of inches or millimeters.
Toe measurements are always measured as degrees, but can be displayed either as
angular or distance measurements. To display toe as an angle, select the units of
degrees or degrees and minutes. To display toe as a distance, select the units of
inches, millimeters, inches @ reference diameter, or millimeters @ reference
diameter.
When toe is displayed as a distance, it refers to the difference in track width between
the trailing and leading edges of the tires or wheels. The critical question is, “At what
diameter of tire or wheel is this distance measured?” A larger diameter means a
greater distance for a given angle. If the units are inches or millimeters, the diameter
is assumed to be 28.648 inches, thus providing a simple conversion of 2 degrees of
toe equals 1 inch for toe (or 25.4 millimeter of toe). If the units are inches @
reference diameter or millimeters @ reference diameter, the system uses the
reference diameter that is entered on the “Vehicle specifications” primary screen.
NOTE: Domestically, the units of inches @ reference diameter are

used primarily by the heavy truck industry. The units of
millimeters @ reference diameter are used primarily in
Europe.

About Formats
Format refers to the numerical format with which the measurements are displayed for
the various parameter types. The formats are chosen by selecting an example. Only
certain choices are available for each parameter type but the choices are all found in
the following list:
decimal 1.01 rounded to the nearest 0.01

minutes 1°01' rounded to the nearest 1'
minutes 1°05' rounded to the nearest 5'
fractional 1 1/4 rounded to the nearest 1/4
If a fractional format is chosen, the fraction can be reduced or non-reduced to the
least common denominator. Examples that illustrate this are as follows:
reduced fractions 1/ 1/ 3/ 1/ …
16, 8, 16, 4,
non-reduced fractions 2/ 2/ 4/ 4/ …
16, 8, 16, 8,
Setting Up the Caster Measurement Selection

When “Caster Measurement Selection” is selected, the “Caster Measurement
Selection” popup screen will appear.
This selection will Set-Up the aligner program to measure Caster Only, FasterCaster
(Caster and SAI/IA), or SAI/IA Only as the default. If a Toe-out-on-turns device is
enabled in Sensor Set-Up, three additional selections will appear. Those are
FasterCaster/SAI/IA Toe-out-on-turns at 20 degrees, Caster/Toe-out-on-turns at
20 degrees, and SAI/IA/Toe-out-on-turns at 20 degrees.
Press or until the desired angle is highlighted. When an angle is
highlighted, a brief explanation appears.
Press “OK” to set the default to the highlighted measurement selection. The program
stores this information on the hard drive and returns to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary
screen.

Setting Up the Reduce Number of Softkeys : Enable/Disable
When “Reduce Number of Softkeys: Enable/Disable” is selected, the “Reduce
Number of Softkeys” popup screen appears with the setting on the screen.
When “Reduce Number of Softkeys” is enabled, the number of softkeys that are
normally shown for a particular screen will be reduced to only the number of softkeys
needed for a typical alignment. To temporarily access all available softkeys when
“Reduce Number of Softkeys” is enabled, select “Show All Softkeys.”
Press “↑” or “↓” until “Show All Softkeys Available” or “Reduce Number of Softkeys”
is highlighted.
Press “OK.” The program selects the highlighted item and returns to the “Aligner Set-
Up” primary screen.
Setting Up the Enable/Disable Manufacturer Specific Procedures

When “Enable/Disable Manufacturer Specific Procedures” is selected,
Enable/Disable Manufacturer Specific Procedures” popup screen appears with the
current setting on the screen.
When “Enable Manufacturer Specific Procedures” is enabled, the account selection

will include accounts necessary for manufacturer specific procedures.

NOTE: When enabled, the standard account is available along with
any manufacturer specific accounts, such as Mercedes-
Benz. When enabled, if recalling a vehicle that requires a
manufacturer specific account, the program will display a
popup that prompts to go to Aligner Set-Up and select the
manufacturer specific account to align the vehicle using
manufacturer specific procedures. If this is disabled, the
standard account will function and no account selection will
be available.
Press “↑” or “↓” until “Enable Manufacturer Specific Procedures” or “Enable

Manufactures Specific Procedures” is highlighted.
Press “OK.” The program selects the highlighted item and returns to the “Aligner Set-
Setting Up the Set Vehicle Selection Options

When “Selection Sequence” is selected, the “Selection Sequence” popup screen
appears with the current setting on the screen.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the selection sequence to be available. Press “OK” when
the selections are completed. The program will store the settings on the hard drive
and return to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary screen.
Default Vehicle Specification

When “Default Vehicle Specification” is selected, the Recall Specifications screen will
appear. Select the preferred vehicle to appear and press “OK.” This vehicle’s
specifications will always be recalled automatically at the beginning of the alignment
procedure. If a vehicle has been set as the default, it can be removed in the same
manner, by pressing “No Default Spec.” Press “OK” to return to Aligner Set-Up.

3.5 Bar Graphs
Setting Up the Front Axle Bar Groups
When “Front Axle Bar Groups” is selected, the “Front Axle Bar Groups” popup screen
appears.
This item will select the bar graphs to be available while viewing the front axle
measurement screen. Each bar graph configuration chosen can be viewed by
pressing “Show Next Bar Graphs” on the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments”
primary screen.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the bar graph group to be available.
Press “Enable Bar Group” and a appears. The highlighted group will be available.
Press “Skip Bar Group” and the disappears. The highlighted bar group will not be
available.
Setting Up the Rear Axle Bar Groups

When “Rear Axle Bar Groups” is selected, the “Rear Axle Bar Groups” popup screen
appears.
This item will select the bar graphs that will be available on the rear axle
measurement screen when “Show Next Bar Graphs” is pressed on the “Vehicle
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the bar graph group to be available.

Press “Enable Bar Group” and a appears. The highlighted group will be available.
Press “Skip Bar Group” and the disappears. The highlighted bar group will not be
available.
Setting Up the Cross Bar Graph/Additional Cross Angles:

Enable/Disable
When “Cross Bar Graph/Additional Cross Angles: Enable/Disable” is selected, the
“Cross Bar Graph/Additional Cross Angles: Enable/Disable” popup screen appears.
This selection will Set-Up the aligner program to show or hide the Cross Bar
Graph/Additional Cross Angles.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight Show or Hide Cross Bar Graph/Additional Cross Angles.
Setting Up the Show Specs on Bar Graphs : Enable/Disable

When “Show Specs on Bar Graphs: Enable/Disable” is selected, “Show Specs on
Bar Graphs: Enable/Disable” popup screen appears with the current setting on the
screen.
This selection will Set-Up the aligner program to display or hide the vehicle
specifications on bar graphs.
Press “Show Specs” to have the vehicle specifications appear on the adjustment bar
graphs or “Hide Specs” to have the + and − appear on the adjustment bar graphs.
primary screen.

3.6 Printer
Setting Up the Printer
When “Printer” is selected, the Windows Print Manager screen appears.
From the “Print Manager” screen, highlight the printer that you are using.
Click on “File” and then select “Set As Default.” This will set the printer as the default
printer for the console.
NOTE: If the printer is already set as default, there will be a check

mark to the left of “Set As Default,” which indicates the
printer is already the default printer.
To exit printer Set-Up, click on “File,” and select “Close.”
Setting Up the Print Language

The Print Language identifies the language that appears on the printouts. This selec-
tion will not change the language on the screen displays.
When “Print Language” is selected, the “Print Language” popup screen appears with
the setting on the screen.
A list of the available languages is shown along with the current setting.
Press “↑” or “↓” until the desired language is highlighted.
Press “OK.” The program selects the highlighted language for the printouts and
returns to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary screen.

Setting Up the Printout Advertising Message
When “Printout Advertising Message” is selected, the “Advertising Message” popup
screen appears.
This screen allows you to enter an advertising message to be printed at the

beginning of the print summary and the inspection report. You may enter a long
message, but if the message is too long, the printout may extend to multiple pages.
Enter a message using the keyboard.
After the message has been entered, press “OK” to store the new message or press
“Cancel” to restore the old message. The program stores the message on the hard
drive and returns to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary screen.
Setting Up the Print Warning Message: Enable/Disable

When “Print Warning Message” is selected, the “Print Warning Message” popup
screen appears.
This item selects whether or not a warning message will appear on the printout. If
“Yes” is selected, the alignment summary printout will show an asterisk (*) next to
any measurements that are not within specifications. A message will appear at the
bottom of the printout to explain the meaning of the asterisk.
Press “Yes” or “No.” The program stores this setting on the hard drive and returns to

Setting Up the Report Format
When “Report Format” is selected, the “Report Format” popup screen appears.
This screen allows you to select the “Standard” or “Column” format for reports.
Press “Standard” or “Column” for the desired report format to be used. The program
selects the report format and returns to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary screen.
3.7 Sensors
Setting Up the Sensor Type
When “Sensor Type” is selected, the “Select Alignment Sensor Type” popup screen
will appear.
The sensors are identified on the serial number labels.
Press “↑” or “↓” until the desired sensor type is highlighted. When a sensor group is
highlighted, a brief explanation of the group appears.
Press “OK” to set the default to the highlighted sensor type. The program stores this
information on the hard drive and returns to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary screen.
Depending on the sensor type selected other options will be available in Set-Up.

Setting Up the Toe-Out-On-Turns Device
When “Sensor Type For Toe-Out-On-Turns” is selected, the “Sensor Type Selection”
popup screen appears with the current setting on the screen.
Press “↑” or “↓” until the desired sensor type is highlighted. When a sensor type is
highlighted, a brief explanation of that type appears.
Press “OK” to set the default to the highlighted sensor type. The program stores the
setting on the hard drive and returns to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary screen.
Updating the Sensor Software
NOTE: Sensor Software Update is dependent upon the sensors that

have been defined in Sensor Set-Up. Make sure that Sensor
Set-Up is Set-Up with the sensors being used with the
console. If Set-Up is completed, WinAlign will automatically
check the sensors’ software and notify if an update is
needed.
The “Sensor Software Update” popup screen allows you to update the software in the
sensors.
This popup screen is displayed by selecting it on the “Aligner Set-Up” screen.

Sensor software requires updating when the version found in the sensor is not the
same, as the version required by the console. This might happen when the console
software is updated or when the control board of a sensor is replaced. The console

can send the correct software to the sensor, which the sensor then stores in its own
non-volatile memory.
NOTE: The sensor software can be updated in any number of

sensors at once. For example, if the console software is
updated and sensor software must be updated as a result,
all four sensors can be updated simultaneously. If a single
sensor is repaired and requires an update, that sensor can
be updated by itself.
The updating procedure is:
Plug in each sensor to be updated while holding down its compensation

switch. If the sensor has a switch, hold down on the compensation button
while turning on the switch. If the sensor “powers up” with the
compensation switch held down, the “boot program” within it remains
running. The green LED on the sensor blinks three times and then goes
out to show this. The “Sensor Software Update” screen then shows
“This sensor is ready for updating” next to an image of the sensor.
NOTE: The procedure is menu driven and all instructions appear as

the program progresses. Simply follow the on-screen
directions.
WinAlign 6.0 will layer instruction windows throughout the

procedure. Once familiar with the instructions, “Hide
Instructions” can be selected to disable this function.
When all sensors are ready, press “Ready.” The system updates the
software in each sensor, showing a “progress indicator” beside each
sensor. Several minutes are required to complete this. When the screen
indicates that all sensors are finished, press “Exit” and the popup screen
closes.
WinAlign 6.0 will layer windows throughout the update procedure. Select
“Hide Windows” to disable this function.
Setting Up the Conventional Sensors Compensation Options

When “Conventional Sensors Compensation Options” is selected, the “Select Default
Compensation Procedure” popup screen appears. The screen will depict only the
appropriate compensation procedures based on the current sensor type.
Press “↑” or “↓” until the desired compensation procedure is highlighted. The steps
required are illustrated for the highlighted procedure.

Press “OK.” The program stores the setting on the hard drive and returns to the
Setting Up the DSP400 Alignment Reference

DSP400 Sensors must be set as the default sensor type before “DSP400 Alignment
Reference” appears as a Set-Up option.
When “DSP400 Alignment Reference” is selected, the “DSP400 Alignment

Reference” popup screen will appear.
Press “↑” or “↓” until the desired DSP400 Alignment Reference is highlighted.
Press “OK” to set the default to the highlighted DSP400 Alignment Reference
selection. The program will store the information on the hard drive and returns to the
Setting Up the DSP400 Compensation Procedure

When “DSP400 Compensation Procedure” is selected, the “Select Default
Compensation Procedure” popup screen will appear.
DSP400 Sensors offer three compensation options: Rolling Compensation, Jacking

Compensation. And Rolling Compensation using Virtual View.

Setting Up the HF Channel Selection
Introduction
NOTE: HF Channel is for use with DSP250/258HF/HFSS and

DSP306/308HF/HFSS Sensors.
HF Channel is a feature that allows for two important functions:

• setting the channels in the sensors and console.
• scanning the channels for interference from other alignment
systems, radio noise, and other external noise.
When HF Channel is selected, the HF Channel popup screen appears.
NOTE: The number of channels is dependent on the country

specified in the Regional Settings Control Panel in Windows,
and on the sensor type.
The screen will indicate “The sensor must be connected by cable” for sensors that
are not already connected to the console by cable. Sensors must be connected to set
channels, however, channels may be scanned at any time, with or without a cable
connection.
NOTE: It is recommended that channels be scanned before setting

channel. This applies to HF sensors only.
Selecting “Show Instructions” will produce a popup screen as shown below.

When the sensors are connected to the console with cables, the “HF Channel”
screen will appear as shown below.
THE CHANNEL THAT

IS BEING USED BY
THE CONSOLE THE HF/HFSS
TRANSCEIVER VERSION
THE HF/HFSS BEING USED BY EACH
TRANSCEIVER VERSION SENSOR
BEING USED BY THE
CONSOLE
THE CHANNEL BEING
USED BY EACH SENSOR
THE FREQUENCY THAT

IS BEING USED BY THE
CURRENT CHANNEL
If there are sensors that are not set to the channel being used by the console, a
screen similar to the following screen will appear.
The yellow box around a channel indicates the associated sensor is not using the
same channel as the console. This sort of situation may occur, for example, when
sensors are borrowed from another aligner.
Scanning HF Channels
NOTE: Scanning Channels is also accessible from “Sensor

Diagnostics.”
NOTE: The “Scan Channels” softkey is not available for HFSS

Series Sensors.

When “Scan Channel” is selected, the screen will be updated as shown below.
CHANNELS MAY BE
SCANNED AT ANY
TIME, WI TH OR
WITHOUT A CABLE
CONNECTION.
A maximum of thirteen channels will be scanned for other aligners in the proximity, or
for external noise including radio frequency interference.
The scanner will provide one of three conditions for each channel:
OK Indicates the channel is clear

and available for use.
HF SYSTEM DETECTED Indicates that another WinAlign

console is already using this
channel. A WinAlign console can
be detected only if it is currently
on a measurement screen. The
sensors for the other WinAlign
console do not have to be turned
on. DO NOT select a channel
that is in use by another
WinAlign console.
NOISE Indicates the console is detecting

some sort of signal on the
channel that could interfere with
the console’s HF communication.
The “NOISE” designator is intended for comparative diagnostics. The “Last” and
“Average” percentages have meaning only if there is noise detected on a channel.
The error percentage is calculated using the number of received
transmissions/theoretical maximum transmissions during the sample time.
When using scan as a quick-check, the sample time may be as little as one scan
through the channels, if that is all that is needed. If intermittent noise is expected or
experienced, a scan may be run as long as needed to verify the existence and
source of the noise.
If several or all of the channels show that noise is detected, it is recommended to let
the scan run for a period, while checking for causes of interference. For example, a
nearby microwave oven that is being used will cause most or all channels to be
noisy. While running the scan, if a microwave that is in use is turned off, the
diagnostic window may indicate that the channels have become clear. This is shown
by the error percentage in the “Last” column dropping to 0, and the “Average” column
percentages going down.

When a large number of HF channels are found noisy, the following warning appears
when the scan is stopped.
It is recommended that other sources of noise in the area be checked by powering

down the suspected sources and watching the channel indicators on the screen.
When the scan is stopped, the channel will move back to the current console channel
being used as shown:
Setting HF/HFSS Channel
NOTE: It is recommended that a scan be run before selecting a

channel for Set-Up. Without using scan prior to setting
channels, a channel that is already in use, or a noisy
channel can inadvertently be selected.
NOTE: To set HF/HFSS Channels, the sensors must be connected

with cables.

To change the console and sensor HF channel, highlight an available channel as
shown below.
Select “Set Channel.” The console and sensors will be set to the selected channel as
shown below.
Setting the Calibration Reminder

Select “Calibration Reminder” to open the “Calibration Reminder” popup screen.
WinAlign can be set to automatically remind the user to calibrate the sensors
periodically every 90 days, every 180 days, or never.

3.8 Power Tools
Setting Up the Rear Shim Default Brand
When “Rear Shim Default Brand” is selected, the “Rear Shim Default Brand
Press “↑” or “↓” until the desired shim is highlighted.
Press “OK” to set the default to the highlighted shim selection. The program will store
the information on the hard drive and returns to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary screen.
Setting Up the Rear Shim Display Size

When “Rear Shim Display Size” is selected, the “Adjust Shim Display Size” popup
screen will appear.
The screen will display the default shim.
Press “Change Shim Color” and/or “Change Shim Brand” to select the desired shim.
Press “Make Shim Wider,” “Make Shim Narrower,” “Make Shim Shorter,” or “Make
Shim Taller” to adjust the shim size.
Press “OK.” The program will store the information on the hard drive and returns to

Setting Up the Front Bushing Default Brand
When “Front Bushing Default Brand” is selected, the “Front Bushing Default Brand
Press “↑” or “↓” until the desired bushing is highlighted.
Press “OK” to set the default to the highlighted bushing selection. The program will
store the information on the hard drive and returns to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary
screen.
Setting Up Virtual View

When “Virtual View Enable/Disable” is selected, the “Virtual View Enable/Disable”
Press “Enable Virtual View” to enable “Virtual View.”
OR
Press “Disable Virtual View” to Disable “Virtual View.”
Press “OK” to set the default to the “Virtual View” selection. The program will store
the information on the hard drive and returns to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary screen.

3.9 Inspection
Setting Up the Inspection Mode
When “Select Inspection Mode” is selected, the “Inspection Mode Selection” popup
screen will appear.
This selection will Set-Up the aligner program to use either the “Part List Inspection”
or “Point and Click Inspection” mode.
The “Part List Inspection” mode is a text only view of the inspection list with the parts
listed by category.
The “Point and Click Inspection” mode integrates Hunter’s standard parts inspection
list, with digital photos and 3-D parts drawings, all on the same screen.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired entry.
Press “OK” to set the default to the highlighted selection. The program will store the
Setting Up the PartHunter Manufacturers

When “PartHunter Manufacturers” is selected, the “PartHunter Manufacturers” popup
screen will appear.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight a manufacturer. A checkmark ( ) indicates that the

manufacturer will be included when searching for parts.

Press “Include Manufacturer” if the highlighted manufacturer is not checked to
include in the parts search, or “Do Not Include Manufacturer” for the highlighted
manufacturer if it is checked to remove the manufacturer from the parts search.
You may also select “All Manufacturers” or “No Manufacturers.”
Press “OK” to set the default to the “PartHunter Manufacturers” selection. The
program will store the information on the hard drive and returns to the “Aligner Set-
Setting Up PartHunter
When “PartHunter Set-Up” is selected, the PartHunter Set-Up popup screen will
appear with the display options available.
A checkmark ( ) indicates that an item has been selected.
If a checkmark ( ) is next to “Use PartHunter database,” PartHunter is enabled,

and a softkey for it will be available during Vehicle Inspection.
To change any of the settings, press “Change Setting” to deselect the highlighted
item if it is checked, or to select a highlighted item if it is not checked.
Press “OK” to set the default to the checked selection(s). The program will store the

3.10 Date and Time
Setting Up the Date and Time
This selection is used to set the computer clock and calendar using Windows Date
and Time control panel. The Windows Date and Time panel will open and provide
dialog box and options to enter the correct date, time, and time zone.
The cursor appears in the month field of the “Date & Time” when the window opens.
The month may be changed by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the month
dialog box and selecting the appropriate month. Typing the appropriate month in the
dialog box can also change the month.
Tab once and the cursor will move to the year field. The year can be changed by
typing in the correct year in the dialog box or by using the arrow buttons to the right of
the box.
Tab to move to the calendar box. Use the arrow keys, mouse, or light pen to select
the appropriate date.
Tab to move to time dialog box. The time can be set by either typing the correct time
or using the arrow keys to the right of the dialog box and scrolling to the correct time.
To set the appropriate time zone, select the “Time Zone” tab. The “Time Zone”
window opens with the cursor positioned in the “Zone” dialog box. Use the down
arrow to the right of the box to select the appropriate time zone. At the bottom of the
screen is a check box to enable or disable automatic adjustment for daylight savings
time. If the box is checked, Windows will automatically adjust the time changes for
daylight savings time.
When all of the time and date options have been selected, press the “APPLY” button
at the bottom of the window. Then select “OK” to exit Time and Date Set-Up.

Setting Up the 12 or 24 Hour Clock Display
When “12 or 24 Hour Clock Display” is selected, the “12 or 24 Hour Clock Display”
Press “12 Hour Clock Display” to set the clock on the logo screen to display in a 12
hour format.
OR
Press “24 Hour Clock Display” to set the clock on the logo screen to display in a 24
hour format.
The program will store the settings on the hard drive and return to the “Aligner Set-
Setting Up the Date Format

When “Date Format” is selected, the “Date Format” popup screen will appear.
Press “MM/DD/YY” to display the date as month, day, and year or “DD.MM.YY” to
display the date as day, month, and year.
primary screen.

3.11 Aligner Equipment
Setting Up “Calibrate Light Pen”
When “Calibrate Light Pen” is selected, you will be prompted to answer if you have a
light pen installed on your system.
Selecting “No” will return you to the Aligner Set-Up screen.

Selecting “Yes” if a light pen is installed, the “Light Pen User Guide” popup screen
will appear.
Select the “Utilities” tab.
Select “Calibration” from the “Utilities” tab.
Press the pointing device to each line as it is displayed on the screen.
After calibration, the display will return to the “Light Pen User Guide” popup screen.
When calibration has been completed, click “OK.” The WinAlign Set-Up screen will
appear. Select “End Set-Up” to accept the changes.
IMPORTANT: Do not run the light pen calibration program if the

aligner does not have a light pen installed. Doing so w ill
cause the aligner to lock up.
Setting Up the Remote Control Channel

When “Remote Control Channel Identification” is selected, the “Remote Control
Channel Identification” popup screen will appear.
Press and hold “K1” on the remote control when prompted.

The display will prompt with the message, “The remote control channel has been
successfully updated.” Select “OK” by pressing “K4” on the remote or by the softkeys
on the keyboard. After setting the Remote’s identification, the aligner will return to the
Aligner Set-Up screen.
Setting Up the Select Logging Type

Logging can help the service representative to determine how this aligner is being
used and diagnose problems. This information is saved to a file(s) on the computer.
These files may be saved to a floppy disk by selecting “Copy Log files to Floppy Disk”
softkey from the second tier of softkeys
When “Select Logging Type” is selected, the “Select Logging Type” popup screen will
appear. This selection will Set-Up the aligner program to use “No Logging,” Standard
Logging” or “Full Logging.”
The “No Logging” mode will not record any logging information on your system.
The “Standard Logging” mode will record statistical information on your system. This
information will allow the service representative to determine how your aligner is
being used. The information is stored in C:\STATLOG.TXT.
The “Full Logging” mode will record statistical and debugging information on your
system. This information will allow the service representative to determine how your
aligner is being used and to diagnose problems. The information is stored in
C:\STATLOG.TXT and C:\DEBUG.TXT. Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired
entry.

3.12 Transmitting Measurements
Setting Up the Transmit Measurements Destination
When “Transmit Measurements Destination” is selected, the “Transmit
Measurements Destination” popup screen will appear.
If “Transmit Measurements to a file” is selected, the aligner will save the

measurement to a file.
If “Transmit Measurements to the serial port” is selected, the aligner will send the
measurements to the serial port. The measurements are sent at 9600 baud, no
parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit.

Setting Up the Transmit Measurements Format
When “Transmit Measurements Format” is selected, the “Transmit Measurements
Format” popup screen will appear.
If “All Measurements Transmitted With No Status” is selected, the aligner will transmit
only the value of the angle.
If “All Measurements Transmitted With Status” is selected, the aligner will transmit
the value and a status indicator of each angle.
If “Partial Measurements C111 Audit Format A” is selected, the aligner will transmit
measurements in a format that is required by Ford.
If “Partial measurements C111 Audit Format B” is selected, the aligner will transmit
measurements in a format that is required by General Motors.

3.13 Work Management
Setting Up the Work Order Format
When “Work Order Format” is selected, the “Work Order Format Selection” popup
screen appears offering a choice of styles in work order formats as follows:
Format 1: This format includes work order items appropriate for

most US shops, including “State.” The customer is
listed with the given name first, then the family name.
Format 2: This format has work order items appropriate for most
non-US shops. The customer name is listed with the
family name first, then the given name.
Format 3: This is a concise format for non-US shops. The

customer name is listed with the family name first, then
the given name.
Format 4: This format has work order items appropriate for most
shops in the Far East/Asia. Formatting of customer
name and address follow Far East conventions.
I-Shop Shop This option enables “I-Shop Compatible” I-Shop Shop

Management: Management.
Custom Enables Automatic Recall Shop Management and

Forms: allows the user to customize work order format.
The popup screen indicates the current work order format. The default setting is for
“Custom Forms.” To change formats, use the arrow keys to highlight the appropriate
work order format and select “OK.”
Set-Up the Custom Work Order Format

From “Aligner Set-Up,” highlight “Work Order Format” and select “Set-Up Selected
Item.”

From the “Work Order Format Selection,” select “Custom Forms.”
Selecting “Custom Forms” allows you to format the work order to include and
mandate the fields of your choice. A “9” to the left of the field identifies that the field
is being included on the work order. A “+” to the left of the field identifies that the field
requires a mandatory entry before it is completed.
In the “Configure Work Order Format” screen, the pointing device or the arrow keys
can be used to select a work order field.
To include a field that is currently not included on the work order, highlight the
desired field in the list box and select “Include Field.”

To make a field mandatory or to include a field but not require mandatory entry,
highlight the desired field and select “Make Mandatory/Make Non-Mandatory.”
To rearrange the work order format, you may select to “Move a Field Up” or “Move a
Field Down.” Spaces can also be inserted into the work order by selecting “Insert
Space.”
There are also four user editable fields that can be customized for any data entry
required. Highlight the filed to be edited, and select “Edit Label.” The “Edit Work
Order Label” screen will appear. Type in the desired label in the space and select
“OK.” The following example created a label for “Tire Size” to be used with the other
tire identification fields.

When work order format changes are completed, select “OK.” To return the work
order format to the initial default Set-Up, select “Revert To Default.”
3.14 Logon
Setting Up the Logon Option

When “Logon: Enable/Disable” is selected, the “Logon” popup screen appears.
NOTE: The “User” field is preset to “MANAGER” and cannot be

changed. Only the password may be entered.
If the password is correct, the “Logon Enable” popup screen will appear with the
current setting on the screen.

Press “Enable Logon” to enable this option. This will require users to log on to the
aligner program to perform an alignment. A popup screen will appear reminding you
to change the password for the “MANAGER” logon.
Press “OK.”
NOTE: After logon is enabled, the password for the “MANAGER”

logon should be changed from the initial password using the
“Logon Password” function of Set-Up. Please record the new
password for future use.
OR
Press “Disable Logon” to disable this option. Users may perform alignment without
having to log on.
primary screen.
Setting Up the Logon Registry
NOTE: This item appears only when the “MANAGER” has logged
on.
When “Logon Registry” is selected, the “Edit User Registry” popup screen appears
with the current list of users displayed.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired entry. Press “Edit User” to make changes to
the highlighted entry. The “Edit User Logon” popup screen will appear.

Press “Select Next Field” or “Enter” to move the cursor to the field or fields to be
altered. Make the desired changes, and then press “OK.” The screen will return to the
“Edit User Registry” popup screen.
OR
Press “Add User” to add a user to the registry. The “Add User Logon” popup screen
will appear.
Enter the information requested, and then press “Select Next Field” or “Enter” to
move the cursor to the next field.
Press “OK,” after all fields are complete. The screen will return to the “Edit User
Registry” popup screen.
OR
Press “Delete User” to delete the highlighted entry from the logon registry. A
confirmation popup screen will appear.
Press “Yes” to delete the entry from the logon registry or press “No” to keep the entry
in the logon registry.
The screen will return to the “Edit User Registry” popup screen.
Press “Exit.” The program returns to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary screen.

Setting Up the Logon Password
NOTE: This item appears only when Logon is enabled.
When “Logon Password” is selected, the “Change Password” popup screen appears.
In the “Old Password” field, enter the old password, and then press “Select Next
Field” or “Enter” to move the cursor to the next field.
In the “New Password” field, enter the new password, and then press “Select Next
Field” or “Enter” to move the cursor to the next field.
In the “Verify Password” field, enter the new password again, and then press “OK.” If
the entries in the “New Password” and “Verify Password” fields do not match, an
error message will appear asking to re-enter the password.
If the entries in the “New Password” and “Verify Password” fields match, the program
stores the setting on the hard drive and returns to the “Aligner Set-Up” primary
screen.
NOTE: A password is not required for users.

Setting Up Autobackup
NOTE: This item appears only w hen Logon is enabled. Even

though “Automatic Backup” may be set, manual backups
should still be performed on a regular basis.
Logon must be enabled before “Automatic Backup Options” appears as a Set-Up

item.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight “Automatic Backup Options.”
Press “Set-Up Selected Item” to open the popup screen to Set-Up “Automatic Backup
Options.”
Press “↑” or “↓“ to highlight the desired entry.
To change the directory where the Autobackup is stored, press “Change Directory.”

A Windows dialog box will appear with the current backup data files location. Select
the new location for the backup data files and press “Save” on the dialog box.
Press “OK” after all the desired changes have been made to exit Set-Up and save
changes.
3.15 Tread Depth
Setting Up the Defined Tread Depth Specification

When “Defined Tread Depth Specification” is selected, the “Defined Tread Depth
Specification” popup screen will appear.
Type in a tread depth to be used as the minimum specification.
Press “OK” to set the tread depth as the default. The program will store the

Filename: Setup.doc
Template: C:\Documents and Settings\dcwiklowski\Application
Data\Microsoft\Templates\D2H_IN.DOT
Title: WinAlign Operation Manual
Subject:
Author: Dennis W. Parks
Keywords:
Comments:
Change Number: 159
Total Editing Time: 1,947 Minutes
Number of Pages: 50
4. Detailed Operation Information
4.1 Primary and Popup Screens

There are four primary screens used during a typical alignment job. They are:
Vehicle Specifications
Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments
Vehicle Inspection
Work Management
When a primary screen is showing, there is only a single “title bar” across the top of
the display. For example, see the following “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments”
primary screen.
You can change the display to one of the other primary screens by pressing a softkey
on the second row of the menu.
OR
Press the or on the keyboard.
OR
Select the appropriate icon from the Procedure Bar.
Since there are four primary screens, only four softkeys are needed to do this. For
example, when showing the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” primary
screen, the second row of softkeys are:
WinAlign Operation Manual 4. Detailed Operation Information • 203

Popup screens are so named because they “popup” over primary screens or over
other popup screens. To perform an operation, such as recalling specifications from
the database or measuring caster, press the softkey with the corresponding label. A
popup screen pops up over the current screen to perform that operation, and the
softkeys change to those needed to support the operation. For example, the
“Measure Caster” popup screen pops up over the “Vehicle Measurements and
When a popup screen pops up to perform an operation, the only actions you can take
are:
Perform the operation

Skip the operation (on some screens)
Cancel the operation (on most screens)
When the operation is complete, skipped, or canceled, the popup screen disappears,
revealing the primary screen from which it appeared.
Notice two very important aspects of this scheme:
The popup screen does not “hide” the screen over which it pops up. It
leaves the title bar of that screen exposed, so you can view the “context”
in which that popup screen is used.
The popup screen has a softkey menu that supports only the operations
required by that screen. This greatly simplifies the menus of the primary
screens, and makes it much easier to control the operation of any popup
screen.
4.2 Log On
The “Log On” option provides a way to identify the user. The primary use of log on is
to allow a user to customize alignment program settings according to his or her
preferences in the setup program. For example, Bob logs on to WinAlign and
changes the toe display format to degrees, performs a number of alignments, and
then logs off. When Bob logs on in the future, his toe display format setting will be
restored. All other users will not be affected by Bob’s format preference.
NOTE: The “Log On” option is not a security system. It is only a way
to identify users and allow the user to customize the settings.
The log on capability can be enabled or disabled in the setup program. The log on
default is "Disabled."
4. Detailed Operation Information • 204 WinAlign Operation Manual

Types of Log On
The log on feature supports two different log on types; manager log on and user log
on.
A user is anyone who performs alignments using the WinAlign program. A log on
identifies the specific alignment program structure requested by the user.
The manager log on is typically used by one person. This person has administrative
privileges within the system.
Manager Log On
There is only one log on “MANAGER.” The “MANAGER” log on can not be deleted or
renamed and is typically assigned to the owner, service manager, or supervisor.
The “MANAGER” log on has more setup items than a user log on and is the only log
on that can enable or disable the log on feature or add, change, or delete other log
on users.
NOTE: The password for the MANAGER is “MANAGER.” After log

on is enabled, the password for the “MANAGER” log on
should be changed. Record the new password for future
use.
User Log On
The “Log On” option supports multiple users. Typically, each alignment technician
would be assigned and use their own user log on.
Setup Items
When a user who is logged on changes a setup item, the change affects only the
program structure for that specific user. However, when a setup item is changed
using the “MANAGER” log on, the change affects all users with a log on that have not
set up the item selected by the manager.
For example, using the manager log on, Fred changes the toe display format to
degrees and minutes, and then logs off. Jim has not set up the toe display format, so
when he logs on, the toe display format will be degrees and minutes. Bob had
already selected toe units in degrees so, when he logs on, the toe display format will
be degrees.
Logging On
The log on feature does not distinguish between upper case and lower case letters
for log on names or password s. For example, if the password “ILOVEWINALIGN” is
entered as “ILoveWinAlign,” this will be accepted as a valid password.
When log on is enabled, the “Begin Alignment” key on the logo screen is replaced
with “Log On.”

Press “Log On.” The “Log On” popup screen will appear.
From the keyboard, enter user name in the “User” field.

Press “Enter” or “Select Next Field” to move the cursor to the “Password” field. Enter
the password. For each character entered in this field, an asterisk (∗) will appear.
This prevents anyone from reading the password.
If the password is not correct, an error message will appear. Press “OK,” then re-
enter the password.
When a user has logged on successfully, the logo screen will appear.
Logging Off
Resetting the aligner w ill not log off a user. Turning the alignment console off will log
off a user.
To log off, press “Log Off” on the logo screen.
Log On Registry
When log on is enabled, only users that appear in the log on registry may log on to
WinAlign. Users may be added or deleted from the log on registry by using the “Set
Up Aligner” function. Only the “MANAGER” can add or delete from the log on
registry.
The registry contains the following information for each user that has been assigned
a log on name:
Log On Name A short name used to identify the user. This name is what the user
types into the “Log On” popup screen.
Full Name The user’s full name. This name will appear on the Customer ID
screen to identify the Technician and on the reset screen as the
current user.
Passw ord A password to protect the user from having their identity
misrepresented. Passwords are never displayed and can be left
blank if desired.
User Number A number that represents each user in the configuration database.
NOTE: A user may change their own password. Only the

“MANAGER” may add, change, or delete users from the
registry.
Log On Password
When log on is enabled, users that appear in the log on registry may log on to
WinAlign. Users may change their password by selecting “Log On Password” from
“Aligner Setup.”

4.3 Work Management Database
Work Management Overview
Work Management provides a database for storing work orders, customer
identification, and vehicle identification.
Work Management also provides methods to store and recall customer and vehicle
identification. This identification is then referenced by work orders.
If Work Management is enabled in Setup under the Common Alignment Preferences

then all facets of Work Management are easily accessible after selecting “Begin
Alignment.” Otherwise Work Management must be accessed within the alignment
process.
The default format setting for Work Management is “Custom Forms.” The information
entered in the Custom Forms format is editable within Setup (refer to Setup for more
information). Format 1 is also applicable for most U.S. shops.
The Work Management form contains three sections: Customer Information, Vehicle
Information, and Work Order Information.
Customer Information Vehicle Information Work Order Information
includes the following: includes the following: includes the following:
• customer number • VIN • date created
• first and last name • license • date changed
• second contact name • color • work order number
• company name • year • technician
• address • make identification
• home phone • model • vehicle mileage
• work phone • vehicle alignment • note (this feature is
specification ID added separately)
• other phone
• alignment procedure
• telephone type
NOTE: Mileage is stored in the work order and not in the vehicle
identification section.
The “Work Management” primary screen shows a summary of the work order, as
shown below. The information contained in the “Work Management” primary screen
will depend on whether or not the work order has been edited.

Custom Forms (Default Format)
Entering Customer Information

Customer information can be entered on the “Edit Customer Identification” screen or
“Edit Work Order” popup screen.
The “Edit Customer Identification” popup screen (on the left) will appear at the
beginning of the alignment procedure, only if “Edit Customer Identification” is
selected in “Aligner Setup” under “Common Alignment Procedures.” The “Edit Work
Order” popup screen (on the right) will appear at the beginning of the alignment
procedure, only if “Work Management” is selected in “Aligner Setup” under “Common
Alignment Procedures.”
“Edit Customer Identification” and “Work Management” cannot be selected at the

same time from “Common Alignment Procedures.”
“Work Management” may be accessed within WinAlign without being selected in

“Aligner Setup” under “Common Alignment Procedures.”
Edit Customer Identification in Custom Forms

When “Edit Customer Identification” is enabled in “Aligner Setup” under “Common
Alignment Procedures,” the customer information can be entered at the beginning of
the alignment from the “Edit Customer Identification” popup screen.
If an error is made while entering the information, press the “Backspace” key to
delete the last character entered.

Corrections can be made by moving the cursor to the incorrect character and re-
entering. Press the right or left cursor arrow key to move the cursor to the incorrect
character. Press “Delete” to remove the incorrect character, then press the correct
character key.
To insert a character in the middle of a word, move the cursor to the character before
the position and press the character to be inserted.
To remove a character, move the cursor to the left of the character and press
“Delete.” The character will be removed and all other characters on the line will move
to the left.
Press “OK” after entering the information. The “Recall Specifications” popup screen
will appear.
Edit Work Order in Custom Forms

When “Work Management” is selected in “Aligner Setup” under “Common Alignment
Procedures,” the customer information can be entered at the beginning of the
alignment procedure.
If “Work Management” is not selected in “Aligner Setup” the work order can be edited
after entering the vehicle specifications by selecting “Edit Work Order” from the “Work
Management” primary screen.
Customer information can be entered at anytime during the alignment by selecting

“Work Management” and selecting “Edit Work Order.”
The cursor indicates the position where characters will appear. The headings in blue
identify fields that the Work Order may be recalled by. These fields are: V.I.N., work
order, customer name, company, license number. The darker shaded areas are
required information and the program will not proceed until those areas have been
entered.
Enter the required information using the keyboard. Press “Enter” or “Tab” to advance
to the next field. Press “Shift” and “Tab” to back up to the previous field.
delete the last character entered. Corrections can be made by moving the cursor to
the incorrect character and reentering. Press the right or left cursor arrow key to
move the cursor to the incorrect character. Press “Delete” to remove the incorrect
character, then press the correct character key.

to the left.
Press “OK” after entering the information. The display will return to the screen where
“Work Management” was accessed, or to the next display in the alignment
procedure.
If the customer data being entered matches the data in the current database, the
work order will automatically identify the number of matching work order(s) at the top
of the screen. Entering additional information in the work order may narrow the
selection of matching work orders.
Example: After typing in the last name, Work Management associates

five work orders with the same last name. After typing in the first name it
narrows the work orders to two.
Select “List Work Orders” to view the number of work orders identified by the yellow
highlighted note at the top of the screen.
To view the matching work orders, select “Use Selected Item.”

Searching Work Orders
“List Work Orders” may also be selected prior to entering any customer information to
access the entire Work Management database.
This database can be categorized by work order, last name, company, zip code,
home telephone number, vehicle identification number, license, make/model,
technician, mileage, tire tread depth, and date search. These items are selected in
the drop down menu on the lower left portion of the screen.
Once an item is selected, other criterion will be available to exactly enter a search
field. For instance, if last name is selected, a box will appear for last name to be
entered, and first name to be entered. Enter the desired information and select
“Search.” The associated work orders will appear.
Highlight the appropriate work order and select “Use Selected Item.”

The “Edit Work Order” screen will appear. Enter in the necessary information and
continue with the alignment procedure by selecting “OK.”
Adding a Note to the Work Order

If additional information needs to be added to the work order, select “Show Note.”
When “Show Note” is selected, the “Work Order Note” screen will appear.
Anything can be typed in this area. Select “OK,” when finished and the display will
return to the work order screen. The note will be hidden, shown only as a yellow box
stating, “A note is attached.” Select “Show Note” again to display, or edit the
information.
The note will be printed on the bottom of the Print Summary.
Saving the Current Work Order in Custom Forms

Press “Work Management” on any primary screen. The “Work Management” primary
screen will appear.
Press “Save Current Work Order.” The work order, with the associated customer and
vehicle identification, will be stored on the hard drive.
When Work Management is enabled in Aligner Setup, and “ExpressAlign” is enabled,

the “Save Current Work Order” key will appear as part of the alignment procedure.

NOTE: If the current work order customer/vehicle identification was
not recalled from the database, a new customer/vehicle
identification is created and attached to the current work
order. If the current work order customer/vehicle
identification was recalled from the database, any
customer/vehicle identification changes (for example a new
address or phone number) would replace the original
customer/vehicle identification. Any work orders attached to
the original customer/vehicle identification will show the
updated information.
Sw itching Between Reference and Current Work Orders in Custom Forms

All primary screens that can utilize the reference work order have a softkey that
toggles between “Show Ref. Work Order” and “Show Current Work Order.”
When the current work order is active, pressing “Show Ref. Work Order” will make
the reference work order active. This toggling softkey allows switching between the
current and reference work order.
NOTE: When the reference work order is active, the background

screen color changes. A number of softkeys will be disabled
(grayed out) since the reference work order can not be
modified. Prompts and reminders will indicate the reference
work order is active and can not be modified.
Managing the Database

The “Manage Database” softkey allows data to be added, changed, or deleted from
the database without affecting the current work order. The data can also be displayed
in charts, filtered, and used to generate mailing labels and form letters.
Adding a New Vehicle to a Customer ID

Press “Edit Work Order“ on the “Work Management” primary screen to access the
“Edit Work Order” screen.
Select the “Recall Specs” button, , to access the “Recall Specifications” popup
screen. Select the appropriate vehicle. When the vehicle has been identified to the

aligner, the “Edit Work Order” popup screen will appear with the vehicle information
added.
Edit the vehicle information for color and mileage, and press “OK.” The “Manage
Work Management Database” popup screen will appear.
Press “End Management” to return to the “Work Management” primary screen.
Delete a Work Order

Press “Manage Database” on the “Work Management” primary screen. The “Manage
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired method of recalling the information, then
press “OK.”
Continue until the desired work order is highlighted, then press “Delete Work Order.”
NOTE: A work order must be highlighted for the softkey “Delete

Work Order” to appear.
“Delete Work Order” is also available from the “Edit Work Order” popup screen.
Format 1
Format 1 is the alternate format for most U.S. shops. This is a fixed format which is
not customizable. It also uses a different user interface than Custom Forms, as
described below.
Entering Customer Identification

Customer information can be entered on the “Edit Customer Identification” popup
screen, the “Add New Customer” popup screen, or the “Edit Work Order” popup
screen.
The “Edit Customer Identification” popup screen will appear at the beginning of the
alignment procedure, only if “Edit Customer Identification” is selected in “Aligner
Setup” under “Common Alignment Procedures.”

The “Edit Work Order” popup screen will appear at the beginning of the alignment
procedure, only if “Work Management” is selected in “Aligner Setup” under “Common
Alignment Procedures.”
“Edit Customer Identification” and “Work Management” cannot be selected at the

same time from “Common Alignment Procedures.”
“Work Management” may be accessed within WinAlign without being selected in

“Aligner Setup” under “Common Alignment Procedures.” “Add New Customer” is
accessed through “Work Management.”
Edit Customer Identification

When “Edit Customer Identification” is enabled in “Aligner Setup” under “Common
Alignment Procedures,” the customer information can be entered at the beginning of
the alignment from the “Edit Customer Identification” popup screen.
The cursor indicates the position where characters will appear. The darker shaded
areas identify fields that the Work Order may be recalled by. These fields are:
customer name, company, license number, technician, and mileage. Date of service
also is a recall criteria and is automatically entered.
Enter the required information using the keyboard. Press “Enter” or “Tab” to advance
to the next field. Press “Shift” and “Tab” to back up to the previous field.
Corrections can be made by moving the cursor to the incorrect character and re-
entering. Press the right or left cursor arrow key to move the cursor to the incorrect
character key.
to the left.
Press “OK” after entering the information. The “Recall Specifications” popup screen
will appear.

Edit Work Order
When “Work Management” is selected in “Aligner Setup” under “Common Alignment
Procedures,” the customer information can be entered at the beginning of the
alignment procedure after entering the vehicle specifications by selecting “Add New
Customer” from the “Work Management” primary screen.
OR
Customer information can be entered at anytime during the alignment by selecting

“Work Management” and selecting “Add New Customer.”
To enter or edit the information, press “Edit Work Order” from the “Work
Management” primary screen. The “Edit Work Order” popup screen will appear.
The cursor indicates the position where a character will appear.
Enter the required information by using the keyboard.
Press “Enter” or “Tab” to advance to the next field. Press “Shift” and “Tab” to back up
to the previous field.
Corrections can be made by moving the cursor to the incorrect character and
reentering. Press the right or left cursor arrow key to move the cursor to the incorrect
character key.
to the left.
Press “OK” after entering the information. The display will return to the screen where
“Work Management” was accessed, or to the next display in the alignment
procedure.

If the customer data being entered matches the data in the current database, the
work order will automatically identify the number of matching work order(s) at the top
of the screen. Entering additional information in the work order may narrow the
selection of matching work orders. To view the matching work orders, select “View
Work Order.”
This function must be enabled in aligner setup.
Select “Service Programs” from the Logo screen, then select Set Up.
Scroll through the set up menu and select “Work Order Format.” From “Work Order
Format,” select “Custom Forms.” Select “OK.”
Scroll through the set up menu and select “Common Alignment Preferences.” Enable
“Work Management,” and select “OK.” Select “End Set Up.”
Adding a Note
If additional information needs to be added to the work order, select “Show Note.”
When “Show Note” is selected, the “Work Order Note” screen will appear.
Anything can be typed in this area. Select “OK,” when finished and the display will
return to the work order screen. The note will be hidden, shown only as a yellow box
stating, “A note is attached.” Select “Show Note” again to display, or edit the
information.
The note will be printed on the bottom of the Print Summary.

Recalling a Customer/Vehicle
Use “Recall Customer” to recall an existing customer/vehicle into the current work
order.
NOTE: Do not use “Add New Customer” if the customer already

exists in the Customer Database. The current work order will
not be associated with the existing customer/vehicle but with
a duplicate customer/vehicle.
Press “Recall Customer” in the “Work Management” primary screen. The “Recall
Customer/Vehicle” popup screen will appear, as shown below.
press “OK.” The screen will change to display a list of customers sorted by name or
company, vehicle license numbers, vehicle identification number, work order
identifications, or work order dates, as shown below.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired customer/vehicle, then press “OK.”

The following screen will display. If the customer has more than one vehicle, select
the appropriate vehicle and press “OK.”
Once the customer/vehicle is identified, the customer/vehicle identification is recalled

and attached to the current work order. The “Work Management” primary screen will
appear, as shown below.
Select “Edit Work Order” to make any necessary changes or updates.

Press “Start Work” to proceed with the alignment procedure.
Saving the Current Work Order

Press “Work Management” on any primary screen. The “Work Management” primary
screen will appear.
Press “Save Current Work Order.” The work order, with the associated customer and
vehicle identification, will be stored on the hard drive.
When Work Management is enabled in Aligner Setup, and “ExpressAlign” is enabled,
the “Save Current Work Order” key will appear as part of the alignment procedure.
NOTE: If the current work order customer/vehicle identification was
not recalled from the database, a new customer/vehicle
identification is created and attached to the current work
order. If the current work order customer/vehicle
identification was recalled from the database, any
customer/vehicle identification changes (for example a new
address or phone number) would replace the original
customer/vehicle identification. Any work orders attached to
the original customer/vehicle identification will show the
updated information.

Recalling a Work Order
Press “Recall Work Order” in the “Work Management” primary screen. The “Recall
Work Order” popup screen will appear, as shown below.
Continue making selections until the desired worker order is chosen. The selected
work order will become the active work order.
Sw itching Between Reference and Current Work Orders

All primary screens that can utilize the reference work order have a softkey that
toggles between “Show Ref. Work Order” and “Show Current Work Order.”
When the current work order is active, pressing “Show Ref. Work Order” will make
the reference work order active. This toggling softkey allows switching between the
current and reference work order.
NOTE: When the reference work order is active, the background

screen color changes. A number of softkeys will be disabled
(grayed out) since the reference work order can not be
modified. Prompts and reminders will indicate the reference
work order is active and can not be modified.

Managing the Customer Database
The “Manage Database” softkey allows data to be added, changed, or deleted from
the database without affecting the current work order. The data can also be displayed
in charts, filtered, and used to generate mailing labels and form letters.
Adding a New Customer

Press “Add New Customer” on the “Work Management” primary screen. The “Recall
Specifications” popup screen will appear, as shown below.
Select the customer’s make and model of vehicle. Refer to “Vehicle Specifications,”
page 60. When the vehicle has been identified to the aligner, the “Edit Work Order”
popup screen will appear with the vehicle information added, as shown below.
Enter the desired information and press “OK.” The customer will be added to the
database and the “Work Management” primary screen will appear.
OR
Press “Manage Database” on the “Work Management” primary screen.

The “Manage Work Management Database” popup screen will appear, as shown
below.
Press “Add New Customer.” The “Edit Customer Identification” popup screen will
Enter the desired information, and then press “OK.” The “Recall Vehicle
Specifications” popup screen will appear.
Identify the vehicle the customer owns. Refer to “Vehicle Specifications,” page 60.
When the vehicle has been identified to the aligner, the “Edit Customer Identification”
popup screen will appear with the vehicle information added, as shown below.
Enter any additional information, and then press “OK.” The “Manage Customer
Database” popup screen will appear.

Adding a New Vehicle to a Customer
Press “Manage Database“ on the “Work Management” primary screen. The “Manage
Work Management Database” popup screen will appear, as shown below.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired method of listing customers by name, ID, or
company, then press “OK.” The screen will display a list of customers, as shown
below.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired customer, then press “OK.” The screen will
change to display a list of vehicles.
Press “Add New Vehicle.” The “Recall Specifications” popup screen will appear.
Identify the vehicle the customer owns. Refer to “Vehicle Specifications,” page 60.
When the vehicle has been identified to the aligner, the “Edit Work Order” popup
screen will appear with the vehicle information added.
Edit the vehicle information and press “OK.” The “Manage Work Management
Database” popup screen will appear.

Changing Customer
In a customer list, press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired customer, then press “OK.”
A list of vehicles will be displayed. Press “Edit Customer ID.” The “Edit Customer
Identification” popup screen will be displayed which allows the associated customer
identification to be changed.
Press “OK” to save the entered changes. Press “End Management” to ignore any
changes and return to the “Manage Customer Database” popup screen.

Deleting a Customer
press “OK.” The screen will change to display a list of customers.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired customer, then press “Delete Customer.”
NOTE: A customer must be highlighted for the softkey “Delete

Customer” to appear.
A confirmation screen will appear with the statement “Deleting this customer will
delete (X) vehicles and (X) work orders! Are you sure you want to do this?” as shown
below.
Press “Yes” to delete the information or “No” to keep the information.
Deleting a Vehicle
press “OK.”
Continue until the desired vehicle is highlighted, then press “Delete Vehicle.”

NOTE: A vehicle must be highlighted for the softkey “Delete Vehicle”
to appear.
A confirmation screen will appear with the statement, “Deleting this vehicle will delete
(X) work orders! Are you sure you want to do this?” as seen below.
Press “Yes” to delete the information or “No” to keep the information.
Deleting a Work Order

press “OK.”
Continue until the desired work order is highlighted, then press “Delete Work Order.”
NOTE: A work order must be highlighted for the softkey “Delete

Work Order” to appear.

A confirmation popup screen will appear with the statement “Are you sure you want
to delete this Work Order?” as seen below.
Press “Yes” to delete the Work Order or “No” to keep the Work Order.
Filtering Data
Filtering is a method of instructing the database to display only certain customer,
vehicles, and work orders. A filter will reduce the amount of data in the database you
view. For example, to view only those customers whose last names begin with the
letter “B,” create a filter to select customers whose last names begin with the letter
“B.” Once a filter is selected, all subsequent actions taken in “Manage Database” will
use that filter to choose records from the database (creating reports or form letters).
When a filter is being used, a yellow box will appear in the upper right hand corner,
as shown below.
To deselect a filter, press “Cancel Filter” on the “Manage Work Management

Database” popup screen.

To filter data, press “Manage Database” on the “Work Management” primary screen.
The “Manage Work Management Database” popup screen will appear, as shown
below.
Press “Edit Filter.” The “Create/Edit Filter Set” popup screen will appear, as shown
below.
Create or recall a filter, then press “OK” on the “Create/Edit Filter Set” popup screen.
The “Manage Work Management Database” popup screen, with a yellow box stating
the filter is on, will appear in the upper right hand corner, as shown below.
press “OK.” The screen will display a list of customers sorted by name or company,
vehicle license numbers, work order identifications, or work order dates that meet the
criteria specified in the filter.

Creating a Filter
Press “Add Criteria.” The “Edit Criteria” popup screen will appear with the cursor in
the “Field Names” box, as shown below.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired field name.
Press “Next Field” to move the cursor to the “Operations” box.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired operation.
Press “Next Field” to move the cursor to “String” or “Date” box.
Enter the text string or date, and then press “OK.” The “Create/Edit Filter Set” popup
screen will appear with the criteria in the criteria box.
If additional criteria is needed, repeat the above procedure.
To store a filter:
Press “Store Filter.” A popup screen will appear.

Enter the name of the filter, then press “OK.” The filter will be stored on
the hard drive.
Recalling a Filter
Press “Recall Filter.” A popup screen will appear listing the stored filters.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired filter, then press “OK.” The “Create/Edit Filter
Set” popup screen will appear with the criteria in the criteria box.
Editing Criteria
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired criteria.
Press “Edit Criteria.” The “Edit Criteria” popup screen will appear with the cursor in
the “Field Names” box.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired field name.
Press “Next Field” to move the cursor to the “Operation” box.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired operation.
Press “Next Field” to move the cursor to “String” or “Date” box.

Enter the text string or date, and then press “OK.” The “Create/Edit Filter Set” popup
screen will appear with the criteria in the criteria box.
Creating Form Letters

Work Management provides a word processing function so that letters can easily be
created and sent to your customers.
NOTE: Running form letters on the entire database without a filter

will produce a letter for every customer in the database. If
the database is large, this will be very time consuming, and
may not be cost-efficient.
To create a form letter, press “Manage Database” on the “Work Management”

primary screen. The “Manage Work Management Database” popup screen will

Press “Make Reports.” The “Work Management Reports” popup screen will appear,
as shown below.
Press “OK.” The “Form Letter” popup screen will appear, as shown below. A new
letter can be created or a letter may be recalled.
To create a new letter:
Type the letter from the keyboard.
NOTE: The text will automatically wrap in the box. Do not use the
enter key to move text to the next line. Forced returns will
make the layout of the printed letter incorrect. Press the
enter key only when starting a new paragraph.
To recall a stored letter:
Press “Recall Form Letter.” A popup screen will appear listing the stored
form letters.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired form letter, then press “OK.” The
“Form Letter” popup screen will appear with the letter in the box.
To add a field, move the cursor to the position where the field is to be added.

Press “Add Field.” The “Add a Field” popup screen will appear listing field names, as
shown below.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired field, then press “OK.” The “Form Letter”
popup screen will appear with the additional field. Repeat this procedure to add more
fields.
To delete a field:
Position the cursor directly in front of the field and press “Delete.”
OR
Position the cursor in the field name and press “Backspace” or “Delete.”
OR
Position the cursor directly behind the field and press “Backspace.”
To see how the letter will appear when printed, press “Print Sample.” An example of
the letter will print.
To save a form letter:
Press “Save Form Letter.” The “Form Letter” popup screen will appear.
Press “Replace” to save as the current selected letter, or press “Save
As” to save the letter with a new title.
Enter the name of the letter, then press “OK.” The letter will be stored on
the hard drive.
Printing Form Letters

Press “Print Reports.” A letter for the selected customers will be printed.
NOTE: Running form letters on the entire database without a filter

will produce a letter for every customer in the database. If
the database is large, this could take a lot of time and paper.
Press “Set up Printer” to open the Print Manager and set up the printer.
Press “OK” to return “Work Management Reports” popup screen.
Press “End Reports” to return to the “Manage Work Management Database” popup
screen.

Charting Alignments
The number of alignments performed can be calculated and illustrated in a chart for a
quick analysis.
as shown below.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight the desired chart. After a few seconds a popup screen
with the chart will appear, as shown below.
Press “Select Chart Type” to view additional types of charts.

To print the chart, press “Print Reports.”
Press “OK” to return to the “Work Management Reports” popup screen.
screen.

Exporting Customer Database Files
as shown below.
Press “↑” or “↓” to highlight “Export Customer/Vehicle Information to DBF file.” A

popup screen will appear stating the files are being converted. After a few seconds, a
popup screen will appear stating the exported database is stored at
“C:\ALIGNER\EXPORT\CUSTVEH.DBF” on the hard drive.
Press “OK” to return “Work Management Reports” popup screen.
screen.

Im porting DBF Files
To import a DBF file into the Work Management database, the data fields MUST be
in the exact order and length no longer than specified below.
“COMPANY” character field 80 characters long

“LASTNAME” character field 40 characters long
“FIRSTNAME” character field 40 characters long
“STREET” character field 80 characters long
“CITY” character field 40 characters long
“STATE” character field 40 characters long
“ZIPCODE” character field 12 characters long
“HOMEPHONE” character field 20 characters long
“WORKPHONE” character field 20 characters long
“VIN” character field 20 characters long
“LICENSE” character field 20 characters long
“COLOR” character field 20 characters long
“YEAR” character field 6 characters long
“MAKE” character field 40 characters long
“MODEL” character field 80 characters long
The import database file should be placed at “C:\ALIGNER\IMPORT\IMPORT.DBF”
on the hard drive.
If the import file is not set up correctly, the data will not be imported into the Work
Management database.
4.4 Virtual View
3-D Bar Graphs

Virtual View is a WinAlign feature that allows the user to view alignment angles in a
3-D perspective. This feature provides the user with a detailed view of the angles and
their status in respect to alignment angle specifications. If the measured angles are
within tolerance, the arrows will be green. If the measured angles are marginal, the
arrows will be shown in yellow (if half-tolerances are enabled). If the measured
angles are out of specification, the arrows will be shown in red. The arrowhead of the
alignment angle will protrude through a 3-D specification bar graph showing the
current angle status.
NOTE: If measurements have not been taken or are not available,

the 3-D bar graph will not be shown in Virtual View.
Virtual View is available only on 611 Aligners.

From the “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” screen, you may toggle between
Virtual View, bar graphs, or measurements by pressing “Show Bar Graphs” from the
softkeys. Virtual View is the default “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments”
screen, however, may be disabled in “Aligner Setup.”
Virtual View displays all measured angles of the vehicle on one screen. It is no longer
necessary to switch screens to view measurements on the front axle or the rear axle.
Camber and toe for both axles, caster for the front axle, and thrust angle are all
displayed adjacent to the appropriate wheel in Virtual View.
A Plan View Indicator, located along the right side of the screen, shows which axle is
being adjusted. The axle with the gray background is the one that is being adjusted,
and corresponds to the view on the screen.
The Procedure Bar is located along the right side of the screen, above the Plan View
Indicator. As each step in the alignment is completed, a checkmark will appear next
to each procedure icon.
Virtual View Angle Selector

When Virtual View appears, the Virtual View Angle Selector on the left side of the
screen will appear when the cursor is moved over that portion of the screen, allowing
you to select a variety of wheel and angle views. The selected views will be shown
with a white background.
The vehicle frame icons, with specific wheels highlighted, will select the overall
Virtual View. You may select to view the entire vehicle, front axle, rear axle, or any
individual wheel. Toe, caster, and camber angles may be viewed specifically from
any view by selecting the alignment angle icons.
Selecting “ ” will view the camber of the selected wheel(s).
Selecting “ ” will view the caster of the selected wheel(s).
Selecting “ ” will view the toe angle of the selected wheel(s).
Selecting “ ” will turn the on-screen road graphic on and off.
Selecting “ ” will return the vehicle frame view to the “overall

vehicle view.”
Selecting “ “ will allow viewing of Virtual View and measurement

screens simultaneously. Dual screen is recommended for systems
with two monitors available.

The preferred method of selecting vehicle views and alignment angle views is by
clicking the mouse inside of the yellow view box. As the mouse navigates across the
screen, several view boxes will be available for selection.
After selecting any view, clicking the right mouse button will return you to the
previously selected view.
Highlighting any of the on-screen measurement values will highlight the
corresponding arrow in white. The arrow protrudes through the 3-D specification bar
graph for the selected measurement. When selecting an on-screen measurement,
the selected measurement value will be underlined.
A pull down menu is available from the Virtual View screen by holding the mouse
down on the desired 3-D graphic, on the measurement value, or by clicking on the
button adjacent to the measurement.

Keyboard Simulator Demonstration
Keyboard Simulator is for demonstration and training purposes only. Selecting
Ctrl+Alt+Shift+F8 enables the simulator. Pressing F8 will disable the keyboard
simulator. Selecting Shift+F4 will enable the demonstration mode that provides a
continual presentation of the available 3-D views. The demonstration mode can be
stopped by clicking anywhere on the Virtual view screen with the mouse.
Selecting “ ” will turn the on-screen steering wheel graphic on and off. The steering
wheel is available only while the keyboard simulator is enabled.
When the steering wheel is enabled, the wheels are steered by selecting the wheel
with the mouse and holding the left button down while steering to the left or right.
With the keyboard simulator enabled, click and hold on the arrow to adjust simulated
measurements by moving the arrow up and down, or left and right. When the arrow is
selected, the arrowhead will turn white and will be highlighted with a white outline.

Using the “Ctrl” key will adjust both wheels while moving only one arrow.
Using the “Shift” key will accelerate the speed of the arrow movement.
Using the “Alt” key will decelerate the speed of the arrow movement.
Dual Monitor (Kit 20-1450-1 required)
NOTE: Use the mouse, instead of the K-keys, to navigate while

using dual monitors.
“Show Dual Screen Virtual View” by selecting “ ” (accessible from the icon bar).
Access the icon bar by moving the mouse to the left edge of the screen. Use the
mouse to move the 3-D Virtual View to the secondary monitor by clicking on the
screen, holding the mouse button down, and moving the screen.
Adjustments can now be made while viewing the bar graph screen and Virtual View
to monitor changing alignment angles.
Virtual View/WinToe Demonstration

Begin with the keyboard simulator enabled, and toe measurements out of
specification.
Select “Adjust Front Toe Using WinToe” from the pull down menu.
Using the Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments bar graph screen, adjust the right
front tire to be within specification.
Steer the wheels to the left or right using the Steering Wheel.
Adjust the left front wheel to within specifications using the Vehicle Measurements
and Adjustments bar graph screen.
The WinToe feature can adjust toe to be within specification even when the steering
wheel is not steered straight ahead.
This demonstration illustrates the power of Virtual View and WinToe. While the 3-D
Virtual View appears to be out of specification because of the direction of the wheels
and steering wheel, WinToe is able to compensate for the steering wheel position
and can still adjust toe to specification.

4.5 Vehicle Inspection
Vehicle Inspection requires CD-Photo Kit 20-1196-1, to view the digital photographs.
For Optimal Performance, Memory Upgrade Kit should be installed.
“Point and Click” Inspection Mode

“Point and Click” inspection integrates Hunter’s standard parts inspection list with
digital photos and 3-D parts drawings all on the same screen. Photos are displayed
on the left side of the screen and a scrollable list of inspection parts is shown on the
right. If you click on a part in the photo or a part in the list and hold down the light pen
or left mouse button, a menu will pop up. From this menu, you may set the status on
the part, access the MAP inspection guidelines, or play MAP Inspection Videos.
Entering Vehicle Inspection

You can access “Point and Click” by selecting “Vehicle Inspection.”
NOTE: The WinAlign program defaults to the “Part List” Inspection
Mode, not the “Point and Click” Inspection Mode. “Point and
Click” or “Part List” Inspection Mode can be set as the
default inspection mode in “Aligner Setup.”
The screen will display a digital photo or illustration on the left and display a
scrollable inspection list on the right.
Place the pointing device in the picture area on the parts sen sitive box . This will
simultaneously display an arrow leading from the related part in the parts list.
OR
Select an item from parts list viewed on the right side of the picture. Again, "Point and
Click" will display the related parts sensitive box on the screen and a related
arrow pointing to the part selected.
RELATED PARTS
LIST ARROW
PARTS LIST
SENSITIVE

Setting the Status in “Point and Click” or “Inspection Parts List”
Each inspection item may have one of the following three status values. These status
values are equivalent in both “Point and Click” and “Inspection Parts List” modes of
Vehicle Inspection Display.
Selecting one of the three inspection status values (Green, Yellow, or Red) will do all
of the following:
• Places an “X” in the category box when selected for final analysis.
• Points to the part or assembly with a “color matched” arrow when
selected.
• Places a check mark on the part or assembly when selected after
inspection.
• Will display a short definition of the part or assembly (in photo image
or illustration display area) being marked off after inspection.
The three status values are:
• Item has been Checked (Green Select Box)

• Suggest Replacement (Yellow Select Box)
• Require Replacement (Red Select Box)
ITEM HAS BEEN CHECKED
SUGGEST REPLACEMENT
REQUIRE REPLACEMENT
“Point and Click”
SUGGEST REPLACEMENT
REQUIRE REPLACEMENT
ITEM HAS BEEN CHECKED
“Inspection Parts List”

“Item has been Checked” indicates that the technician has inspected the
part/assembly for damage or wear and it is in good condition. (Green Select Box)
“Suggest Replacement” indicates that the condition of the inspected part or
assembly is nearing the end of its useful life, and should be replaced. (Yellow Select
Box)
“Require Replacement” indicates that the part or assembly is worn or damaged,
and should be replaced. (Red Select Box)
Using the “↑” or “↓” softkey allows the technician to either move continuously through
the parts list (checking every part based on the vehicle specifications) or move
directly to the damaged part or assembly. Continually pressing “Set Status” up to four
times in a row will ultimately clear all status references.
Parts and assemblies selected once in the inspection parts list will consistently
display the same photographic image until the image can no longer support a clear
view of the parts. When selecting a part that requires a different view, the photo
image will change to the image or image angle for clarification. The image change is
separated by a thick black line in the selection menu.
Pressing “Set Status” is another way of highlighting the part or assembly’s condition.
Continually pressing “Set Status” will continually move to the next condition of that
part.
The inspection category check boxes also may be appropriately filled by pressing the
menu shift softkey, , and locating the matching softkeys for the above three
categories of inspection.
Press “↑” or “↓” to scroll to the next item on the list after the status has been set.
Context Sensitive Menus for “Point and Click” or “Inspection Parts List”
“Point and Click” and “Inspection Parts List” both feature a context sensitive menu
option.
This feature can be selected from two areas of the display.
Select a part from the parts list view. Press and hold down the pointing device on a
selected part for inspection.
OR
Press and hold down on the parts sensitive box (in the photo/illustration area) or
anywhere on the part or assembly. The program will automatically move the
inspection parts list to that particular item.
A context sensitive menu will appear providing options for the inspection or switching
between “Point and Click” and “Inspection Parts List.”
CONTEXT SENSITIVE MENU

CONTEXT SENSITIVE MENU
The three status options (Item has been Checked, Suggest Replacement, Require
Replacement) match the selections reviewed above.
Another selection, MAP Guidelines, refers the user to the Motorist Assurance
Program Uniform Inspection & Communication Standards Help File. For more
information on the Motorist Assurance Program, visit Hunter’s World Wide Web Site
at http://www.hunter.com/, or call MAP Headquarters at 202-466-7050.
MAP Inspection Videos

Requires DIGITAL-VIDEO Option for Series 411/611 Aligners.
Motorist Assurance Program (MAP) video support for vehicle inspection is also
available through the “Point and Click” feature.
In the Inspection Parts Listing, an icon button representing a camcorder allows the
technician to view the inspection video list. The video list in the context sensitive
menu is separated from the five inspection options with a solid line.
NOTE: Currently, not all inspection categories (based on vehicle

specifications) are supported by video inspections.
Click and hold a camcorder icon, and a context sensitive menu will appear.
Click on the video you wish to view.
Pressing will pause the video, and will restart the video after it has been
paused. Pressing will return you to the Inspection Parts Listing.
After the video ends, you will be returned to the Inspection Parts Listing.

Sorting Options/Category
In the Inspection Category Listing, it is also possible to change the presentation order
in the following three categories. (Shown in the previous illustration)
a) Sort by Illustration - the default sort method - primarily will sort the
group of parts by photographic images and illustrations for the
vehicle specifications selected.
b) Sort by Part Name - will sort the parts list into an alphabetical order
against the vehicle specification selected. Each time a different part
is selected from the list, the photo will change to match that selected
part.
c) Sort by Part Type - will sort the Inspection Category List by the
steering, brakes, driveline, suspension, etc. in an ascending order.
Select one of the above options by highlighting a part from the inspection category.
This sorting option is located in the context sensitive menu along with the other
inspection options.
Printing Inside “Point and Click”

Printing inside “Point and Click” is possible through the softkeys at the bottom of the
screen. Two options are available, “Printing All Items” and “Print Checked Items.”
Pressing “Print All Items” will print the entire inspection category list for that specific
vehicle specification, whether parts or assemblies were checked or not.
Pressing “Print Checked Items” will print only the parts or assemblies checked from
the inspection category list.
“Parts List” Inspection Mode

A text only view of the inspection list is also supported. This view is very similar to the
inspection list in WinAlign version 1.5 and earlier, the parts are listed by category.
You may access “Part s List” from the second tier of softkeys (Vehicle Inspection) on
any primary screen, or from the shortcut menu.
NOTE: The WinAlign program defaults to the “Part List” Inspection

Mode, not the “Point and Click” Inspection Mode.
You can make “Point and Click” the default inspection mode
in “Aligner Setup.”
Selecting the Inspection Gr oup & Sub-Gr oups

You may choose from Brake and Wheel, Drivetrain, or Suspension and Steering
parts categories.
The display begins with a list of inspection groups. For example, “Brake and Wheel”
is considered a Group.
Selecting the “Brake and Wheel” Group will display an associated sub-group parts
list. This list might include parts such as Front Disc Brakes, Rear Brakes, Master
Cylinder and Booster, etc.
Hunter inspection lists are tailored to the vehicle selected from the specification
database. The vehicle’s steering and suspension configurations are taken into
consideration, and only the parts pertinent to the vehicle selected are displayed.

Press “↑” or “↓” until the desired group is highlighted or use a pointing device to move
through the different groups and sub-groups.
Selecting on a Sub-Group under a Group will display all related parts to be inspected.
Press “↑” or “↓” until the desired part or assembly is highlighted.
Sub-Groups are the groups that are related under the Group selected such as “Brake
and Wheel.”
Select “Front Disc Brakes” and the final Parts List will display for setting the status.
Setting the parts status is done in the final parts breakdown of the groups selected.
Re-selecting on group, for example, "Brake and Wheel," will return the screen to the
main group selections.

Show All Modes
“Show All Inspection Items” option is from the primary Group list. This option allows
the viewing of all parts lists from all of the groups at the same time.
While a group such as “Brake and Wheel” is selected, a “Show all Brake and Wheel
inspection items” option is also available. This option allows the viewing of all parts
lists directly related to the Brake and Wheel Group. Re-selecting on a group, for
example, “Brake and Wheel,” will return the screen to the main group categories.
SELECTING THE SHOW

ALL OPTION WILL
DISPLAY ALL RELATED
PARTS UNDER THAT
GROUP.
PartHunter Database
Introduction to PartHunter (Parts Inform ation Catalog)
PartHunter is an aftermarket undercar replacement parts database to be used in
conjunction with the Vehicle Inspection procedure included with WinAlign 6.0 on a
Hunter 611 series aligner. PartHunter combines part numbers, part descriptions, and
suggested retail prices from many aftermarket automotive parts manufacturers.
PartHunter helps develop professional looking quotes and reduces parts estimation
times by using the exact information used by parts manufacturers.
NOTE: The PartHunter database license agreement covers

“undercar” parts only. The prices listed in the PartHunter
database are manufacturers’ suggested retail prices. Prices
may vary and should be used as a comparison guide only.
Price updates will be available annually with the update of
the Vehicle Information Database (V.I.D’s).
WinAlign uses approximately 1200 digital photos to present the appropriate

illustration for the make, model, and year of the vehicle that is selected. When a
replacement part is selected that has PartHunter data available, the manufacturers’
part information can be viewed and/or printed.

Part information can be selected for all available manufacturers, a selected few
manufacturers, or a single manufacturer. PartHunter options are easily changed to
reflect personal preferences in manufacturers, or displaying the exact headings that
you want shown or printed.
What is in the PartHunter Database
NOTE: Occasionally, it may appear that the PartHunter parts shown

do not precisely match the selected part. This may be due to
a combination of factors. The desired aftermarket parts may
not be available and/or the PartHunter part category may
include additional related parts.
PartHunter is a database of aftermarket parts and therefore does not contain original
equipment manufacturer (OEM) parts. While the PartHunter database is one of the
most extensive databases in the industry, there will inevitably be situations where
some parts will not be listed for certain vehicles. For example, vehicles in the first few
years of production may have limited aftermarket parts available.
The database sometimes uses general names to refer to a category of parts, while
the point and click interface allows you to identify a specific part. For example, in
Point and Click inspection, you can identify Tie Rod-Inner, but this category may
include inner tie rod end, outer tie rod end, and tie rod adj usting sleeves on
some vehicles.
The PartHunter part category is always displayed at the top of the list on the “Parts
Information” screen. In the following example, the user selected Tie Rod-Inner. The
resulting screen shows a list that begins with PartHunter title: Tie Rod-Inner.

Using PartHunter Database
NOTE: PartHunter Database is accessible only from WinAlign 5.1 or

higher software.
“Vehicle Inspection” must be enabled as part of the alignment sequence. PartHunter

works with both the “Parts List” and the “Point and Click” vehicle inspection.
PartHunter is accessed from the “Vehicle Inspection” section of WinAlign through a

drop-down menu and from a softkey. Before entering the “Vehicle Inspection” screen,
you will be asked to precisely identify the vehicle. Precise information is necessary
for accessing PartHunter data.
Not only will “Vehicle Inspection” require the make and model of the vehicle, it will
prompt for the year, engine size, and engine code from the VIN.
The WinAlign database has complete information about what parts are on the vehicle
and where the parts are located.
Click anywhere on the illustration, the system will recognize the item pointed to.
Using PartHunter from the “Point and Click” Vehicle Inspection Screen
Parts are selected from the “Point and Click” Vehicle Inspection screen as follows:
Highlight a part name in the scroll box or click and hold on a part in the
illustration to highlight the part name.
Select “PartHunter Information” from a drop-down menu, or from the
“PartHunter” softkey.

Using PartHunter Database Inform ation
While in “Vehicle Inspection” you may highlight a part for which additional information
is needed.
Selecting “PartHunter” will cause the “Parts Information” screen for the selection that
was highlighted on the “Vehicle Inspection” screen to appear. The system will search
the data and retrieve the information for the part. Status of the part does not need to
be checked at this time.
A prompt above the softkey tool bar will indicate that data is being retrieved.
Currently retrieved data may still be scrolled through, even as the rest of the data is
being retrieved.
The “Parts Information” screen is a scrollable screen. If more parts are available than
appear on the screen, scroll down to search for a specific part or manufacturer. This
screen displays part names, part numbers, available descriptions, and prices from all
manufacturers selected.
All listed parts from Vehicle Inspection and PartHunter Information may be added to a
printout. Selecting the “Add to printout” option while it is in the “grayed out” mode will
produce a popup screen informing you that an item must be selected before it can be
added or deleted from the printout.

To add a part to the printout, highlight the part by clicking on it, or using the up and
down arrow softkeys to select it. When a part is highlighted, the “Add to Printout”
option will no longer be “grayed out.” The highlighted part can be added to a printout
by selecting the “Add to Printout” option.
Double-clicking on the part name will also add it to the printout.
When a part is selected to print out, the color of the font will change to green and a
document icon will appear to the left of the part.
Selecting “OK” from the softkeys will return to the “Point and Click” Vehicle Inspection
screen.
Additional parts can be added from the Vehicle Inspection screen. From the “Point
and Click” Vehicle Inspection screen, select another part, and repeat the “add to”
printout procedures as previously outlined.
NOTE: The number of replacement parts that can be added to a

printout is unlimited.
Printing Selected Items and Illustrations

When all parts and/or illustrations have been selected and added to the printout,
choose the “Print Checked Items” option on the Vehicle Inspection screen to print the
selected parts.

Including Illustrations in Printouts
Illustrations can be included on the customer printout. To include an illustration,
select a part on the Vehicle Inspection screen by highlighting it. Click and hold on the
highlighted part to activate the popup screen. From the popup screen, select “Include
illustration on printout.”
Selecting this option will print the illustration for the selected part. It will not print
illustrations for all parts. The “Include illustration on printout” option will have to be
enabled for each part that has been checked.
Adding Notes to Printouts

Notes can be added to printouts by selecting the “Set Note” option located on the
Vehicle Inspection popup screen.
When “Set Note” is selected, the “Change Inspection Item Note” screen will appear.
Any notation entered on this screen for a particular part will appear on printouts. A
note can be added to any part that is added to the printout. For example, if the note
“The brakes are worn badly…” is entered on the “Add Notes” screen, it will then
appear on a printout.

Sam ple Printout
Sorting by Illustration
In the “Point and Click” Vehicle Inspection screen, parts may be sorted by illustration
by selecting “Sort by Illustration” from the Vehicle Inspection popup screen.

Sorting by illustration will sort the data by each illustration, and then by each part
contained in an illustration. The advantage of using this sort is that all the parts for a
given area are readily available.
For example, if the front steering/suspension/brake/driveline illustration is the

selection, then all parts related to the illustration are listed in the scrollable area of the
window.
It is more convenient to check off parts as being inspected, suggesting replacement,

or requiring replacement, when they are grouped together.
Sorting by Part Name

In the “Point and Click” Vehicle Inspection screen, parts may be sorted by part name.
To sort by part name, select “Sort by Part Name” from the Vehicle Inspection popup
screen. This option will sort all parts in alphabetical order in a scrollable area of the
screen. The advantage to this screen is that the parts are all in alphabetical order
and easily searched using the scroll bar.
The disadvantage is that when working in one area of the vehicle, for example, the
rear suspension and brakes, not all of the parts for the area are grouped. If the hold
down springs need replacement, the parts are scrolled to “Hold Down Springs,” the
part is marked as needing replacement, the PartHunter information is collected and
added to the printout. Then the wheel cylinder needs replacement. The parts list must
be scrolled down to find the wheel cylinder. When multiple parts are inspected, the
alphabetic list may not be as efficient as the sort by illustration may.

Toggling to the Parts List Screen
The “Parts List” screen is easily accessible from the “Point and Click” Vehicle
Inspection popup screen.
Using PartHunter from Vehicle Inspection Parts List

Some users will find it more convenient to use PartHunter from the “Vehicle
Inspection Parts List.” The “Parts List” can be accessed in two ways.
From the softkeys on the “Point and Click” Vehicle Inspection screen,
select “Show Parts List.”
OR
The “Parts List” screen can be accessed easily from the “Point and Click”
Vehicle Inspection popup screen by selecting “Show Part List.”
When “Parts List” or “Show Parts List” is selected, the following screen will appear.
Parts may be selected from this screen by either of two methods.

Using the arrow softkeys, scroll up and down through the parts until the
desired part is found.
OR
Type the first few letters or all of the part name and the screen will
advance to the part.
A part is selected when it is highlighted.
Selecting “Parts Information” from the menu keys will cause the “Parts Information”
screen for the part that was highlighted on the “Vehicle Inspection” screen to appear.
The system will search the data and retrieve the information for the part.

Toggling to “Point and Click” Inspection
To enter the “Point and Click Vehicle Inspection” screen, select the “Point and Click
Inspection” softkey.
A “Point and Click Vehicle Inspection” screen will appear.
Setting PartHunter Database Options

When “Select Manufacturers” is selected, the “Select Parts Information
Manufacturers” popup screen will appear.
The manufacturers are listed in alphabetical order, and by default, all manufacturers
are selected. If a particular manufacturer’s products are not used or are not available
in your area, that manufacturer may be removed from the list.
NOTE: When a manufacturer is removed, it will remain unselected

until it is selected again.
To remove a single manufacturer from those selected, highlight the manufacturer and
click on “Do Not Include Manufacturer.” When the “Do Not Include Manufacturer” is
selected, the checkmark by the manufacturer disappears, and the “Do Not Include
Manufacturer,” will add the manufacturer into the list of manufacturers whose
products will not be viewed.
All manufacturers can be selected or unselected using the softkeys on the “Select
Manufacturers” screen.
When the “No Manufacturers” soft key is selected, all of the manufacturers are
unselected. The checkmark to the left will be removed from all manufacturers. The
“Do Not Include Manufacturer” key will change to “Include Manufacturer.” To add one
or a few manufacturers, first select “No Manufacturers” to deselect all manufacturers.
Next, scroll to a manufacturer that is to be included and select “Include
Manufacturer.” This method is more convenient when only one or a few
manufacturers are needed.

Setting Up the Parts Inform ation Setup
When “Set PartHunter Options” is selected, the “PartHunter Setup” popup screen will
appear.
The “PartHunter Setup” screen offers the following selections:

Use the Parts Information Database.
Display the price on the PartHunter Information screen.
Display the part quantity on the PartHunter Information screen.
Print the price on the inspection printout.
Print the quantity on the inspection printout.
NOTE: The “Use PartHunter Database” option may not be disabled
from the screen, it is a feature of WinAlign 5.1 and higher.
To disable an option, highlight a checked option and choose “Change Setting.” The
option will no longer have a check mark in front of it. If the option is not checked, it is
not enabled. For example, if “Print the price on the inspection printout” is not
checked, prices will not appear on the printout.
To enable an option, highlight an unchecked option and select “Change Setting.” The
option will be check marked and enabled. When the option selections meet your
needs, select “OK.” This will return to the previous screen.
Motorist Assurance Program (MAP) Guidelines

The Motorist Assurance Program is an industry-wide coalition dedicated to
strengthening consumer satisfaction with the automotive repair industry. MAP’s
participants represent the majority of the nation’s multi-bay retail automotive outlets,
as well as suppliers, independent repair shops, industry associations, car companies,
manufacturer’s representatives, and the trade press. MAP is developing standards of
service, uniform inspection procedures, and other programs to assure consumers of
the industry’s professionalism and the commitment to excellence shared by MAP’s
sponsoring companies.
MAP’s achievements include production and distribution of the consumer brochure
“How to Find Your Way Under the Hood and Around Your Car,” development of a
Pledge of Satisfaction to Consumers and Standards of Service and establishment of
relationships with regulatory agencies.
MAP is working to establish a monitoring program for the Pledge to Customers, a
dispute resolution system to help resolve customer complaints within the industry,
and a shop certification program to encourage policies in concert with the MAP
Standards of Service and Inspection Guidelines.

MAP has united the Aftermarket behind its consumer-oriented goals and has
established itself both within and outside of the industry. For more information,
contact MAP at: 1444 I Street, NW, Suite 700, Washington, D.C. 20005-2210,
telephone (202) 712-9042, fax (202) 216-9646.
Using MAP
To view guidelines for a highlighted part, press “MAP Guidelines.” A list of conditions
will appear.
Select the condition that describes the symptom to view the procedures.
The MAP Guidelines are presented in a Help file. Pressing “MAP Guidelines” will
initiate a Help session.
Within the Help session:
The screen will have eight buttons at the top of the Help window. To select
these buttons, double click on the button with a light pen or mouse, or press
the letter on the keyboard corresponding to the underlined letter of the button
label.
Selecting the button labeled “Contents” will cause the Table Of Contents to
appear. Pressing “Tab” to highlight a green, underlined phrase, then pressing
“Enter” will change the screen to an explanation of the highlighted item. If you
are using a light pen or mouse, double click on a green, underlined phrase to
see the explanation.
Selecting the button labeled “Search” will cause another screen to appear. A
key word or phrase can be entered from the keyboard or selected from the
list provided. Click on the “Go To” button with a light pen or mouse, or press
“Enter,” and an explanation of the word or phrase will appear.
Selecting the button labeled “Back” will retrace the path taken through the
Help topics.
Selecting the button labeled “History” will cause a screen to appear listing, in
sequential order, every Help viewed during the current Help session.
Selecting the button labeled “Exit” will end the Help session and return the
screen to the alignment in progress.
Selecting the button labeled “Print” will cause the topic in the HELP window
to printout.
Selecting either of the arrow buttons will offer a series of related topics that
may help to explain the currently selected topic.
Some topics in the MAP file include text that is linked to other MAP topics. These
links are called jumps.
Jump text is usually green and underlined. When you point to a jump, the arrow turns
into the shape of a hand.
To select a jump:
Press “Tab” to highlight the text, then press “Enter.” Press “Shift” and
“Tab” to highlight previous jump text.
Or move the arrow to the jump text, and click with a mouse or light pen.
The topic will appear in the MAP window.
Information provided in MAP does not always fit inside the window. When this occurs,
a scroll bar is provided on the right side of the window.

To scroll through the information, do one of the following:
Click on one of the scroll arrows.
Drag the scroll box to scroll quickly.
Use the cursor arrow keys on the keyboard to scroll up or down.
Use the page up or page down keys on the keyboard.
Click above or below the scroll box in the scroll bar.
Printing the Inspection Report

To print an inspection report:
Press “Print All Items” to print a list of every item in the checklist.
Press “Print Checked Items” to print a list of only the items checked.
Cradle Inspection
Cradle to body alignment should be inspected and adjusted when necessary, before
continuing with the alignment procedure
Press “Cradle Inspection” on the “Vehicle Inspection” primary screen for information
about cradle positioning for those vehicles having full cradle designs. The “Cradle
Illustrations” popup screen will appear with an inspection illustration and instructions.
Press “Next Illustration” or “Previous Illustration” to view additional illustrations.
Press “OK” after viewing illustrations. The screen will return to the “Vehicle
Inspection” primary screen. For additional information on cradle adjustments, refer to
“Cradle Adjustment,” page 317.

4.6 Tools and Kits
Introduction to Tools and Kits
Tools and Kits database is an extensive database designed to give a guided
overview of hand tools and aftermarket parts and kits needed to make any particular
alignment adjustment. The database is presented through images and descriptions of
the actual tools and kits that are based on vehicle specifications and alignment angle.
The alignment adjustment angles are Front Toe, Front Caster, Front Camber, Rear
Camber and Rear Toe. All illustrations and videos in the “Tools and Kits” database
are shown only for the specific vehicle’s adjustment angle and requirements.
“Tools and Kits” has three basic features:
• Hand Tools
• Specialty Tools
• Kits
Required Hand Tools are displayed as the conventional mechanic’s tools required
for completing the alignment adjustment (i.e. sockets, wrenches, drive extensions).
Required hand tools are displayed with cyan colored frames.
Specialty Tools are displayed as tools that are not standard mechanics tools, but
are specific to the make of the vehicle or to a particular kit or part being installed (i.e.
3/8 drive Torx bit for GM vehicles hub and bearing removal, or 3/8 drive bolt/nut
removing tool for removal of frozen bolts). Vehicle specific special tools are displayed
with red colored frames. Special tools needed for specific kits are displayed with
green colored frames.
Kits are designed to correct alignment angles that cannot be corrected by simply
adjusting the existing parts and assemblies on the vehicle. This may include kits such
as original full contact camber/toe rear tab shim systems, Cam bolt kits, or universal
system 2000 rear full contact cam/toe shims. Kits are displayed with yellow colored
frames.
Accessing Tools and Kits

There are two basic methods of accessing “Tools and Kits.” The first method is to
access the database through a drop down menu on the Virtual View screen or on a
bar graph. The second is accessing “Tools and Kits” through the “Illustrate
Adjustments” screen.
“Tools and Kits” may be added to the alignment procedure by ExpressAlign.
Access “Tools and Kits” through “Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments” as

follows:

On the Virtual View screen, press and hold the light pen or left mouse
button down on any icon or vehicle measurement. A drop down menu
will appear as shown. Press and hold the light pen or left mouse button
down on any of the bar graphs. A drop down menu will appear.
Select “Tools and Kits” from the drop down menu. The "Tools and Kits”
screen for the angle that it was chosen from will appear.
NOTE: The drop down menu can also be accessed using the tab
key on the keyboard.
Access Tools and Kits from “Illustrate Adjustments” as follows:
From the Vehicle Measurements and Adjustments screen, choose

“Illustrate Adjustments” from the softkeys. The Adjustments Illustrations
screen will appear.
From the Adjustments Illustrations screen, select “Tools and Kits.” The
tools and kits for the angle that is being viewed will appear on the
screen. In this example, the “Tools and Kits” screen for Front Camber will
come into view.

Tools and Kits Screens
When “Tools and Kits” is accessed, a screen for the angle from where “Tools and
Kits” was selected will appear. In this example, the tools and kits for the front caster
angle are shown.
Clicking on the button will zoom in on the selected tool or kit. Selecting a tool on the
“Tools and Kits” main screen and clicking on “Zoom” will also give a closer look at the
tool or kit that is selected. Some tools and kits will also display a description or more
information about the tool or kit. The following is the “Zoom” for the Ratchet.
Clicking “OK” returns to the previous screen.
Changing the Angle

There are two methods of changing the angle for which “Tools and Kits” is to be
viewed.
Change the Angle from the “Tools and Kits” Combo-box as follows:

Select the Front Camber in this view. Click on the Combo-box down arrow. A drop
down menu will appear. The angle that you want to view can be selected from this
drop down screen by clicking on it.
NOTE: “Out of Spec Angles” cannot be viewed unless the “Before

Measurements” have been saved.
By choosing “Rear Toe,” the “Tools and Kits” menu will change to the following
screen. Note that the newly selected angle now appears in the Combo-box, and that
the tools and kits icons have changed to those needed for rear toe adjustment.
Change the Angle from the “Tools and Kits” Softkeys as follows:
Choosing “Next Angle” from the following “Tools and Kits” softkeys will advance to
the next angle.
For example, if the Front Toe angle is being viewed, and “Next Angle” is chosen, the
tools and kits screen will advance to Front Camber. Next screens appear in the order
that they are in on the Combo-box drop down menu.

Using Tools and Kits Videos
NOTE: The video electronic key must be installed, and the WinAlign
Multimedia CD must be in a CD-ROM holder before the
“Tools and Kits” videos can be accessed. The CD-ROM is
not location sensitive and may be placed in any available
CD-ROM holder in either an external or internal CD-ROM
disk player.
“Tools and Kits” has several videos available for viewing installation of a particular kit,
or the use of special tools.
Videos are accessible from the “Tools and Kits” main screen by clicking on the icon
that appears in the upper right corner of the tool or kit that has an associated video.
VIDEO ICON
Tools or kits that have videos available will display a “Video” button when in the
“Zoom” mode. This example shows the zoom view of the 41-4605 Northstar
Caster/Camber Correction Kit with a “Play Video” option.
When play is selected, the video will appear and begin to play. The video screen will
display a horizontal tool bar that can be used move to any point, from beginning to
end, in the video. The special keys on the video bar perform specific tasks that can
be activated by clicking on the button. Pressing will pause the video, and will
restart the video after it has been paused. Pressing will return you to the Tools
and Kits screen. After the video ends, the Tools and Kits screen will reappear.

Printing Reports
Several reports are available using the “Tools and Kits” softkey panel. Click the
appropriate button for the report that is to be printed.
Print Tools and Kits List Reports

“Print Summary (Select Angles)” prints a list of tools and kits available for the
angle that appears in the “Tools and Kits” Combo-box on the main “Tools and Kits”
screen.
“Print Tool Summary” will print all of the tools and kits available for every angle for
the vehicle. This will produce several pages.
“Print Summary (Select Angles)” and “Print Tool Summary” reports appear in the
following format:

Print Tools and Kits List and Pictures Reports
“Print Pictures (Select Angles)” prints the illustrations and a list of tools and kits
available for the angle that appears in the “Tools and Kits” Combo-box on the main
“Tools and Kits” screen.
“Print Tool Summary” will print all of the illustrations and a list of all tools and kits
available for every angle for the vehicle. This will produce several pages.
“Print Pictures (Select Angles)” and “Print Tool Pictures” reports appear in the
following format:

4.7 On-The-Job-Training
Requires DIGITAL-VIDEO Option.
OJT uses on-screen animation’s and video to convey simple, concise, instruction to
the technician for three major alignment related categories.
• WinAlign Operation
• Alignment Concepts
• Vehicle Adjustments
OJT is designed to be used with the WinAlign Multimedia CD-ROM’s when no

alignments are being performed.
OJT is accessed from the softkeys on the logo screen.
The primary screen of OJT offers the following three choices. A detailed sub menu
structure is attached:
To exit OJT, select the “Exit” icon at the bottom right side of the display. This will
automatically return you to the WinAlign program at the “Logo” screen.
At anytime in the OJT program you may return to the primary screen by selecting the
“Main Menu” icon located at the bottom right hand side.
After passing the primary screen in OJT program, all secondary screens will be
provided with a “Previous Screen” icon, located at the bottom of every icon selection.
Selecting this icon will prompt the technician to the previous screen viewed.

Training Videos
Alignment Angles Vehicle Adjustment (cont.) Vehicle Adjustment (cont.) Vehicle Adjustment (cont.)
Camber Description
Front Camber Lower Control Ar m Rear Toe
Caster Description
Toe Descripti on Sy mmetrical Eccentric
Upper Control Ar m-Shi ms Control Ar m Adjustments
SAI Descripti on Strut Rod
Diagnosi ng with SAI/IA Sy mmetrical Outboar d Shi ms Slot with Special Tool Inboard Eccentric
Center Steering Error Asy mmetrical Outboar d Shi ms Tie Rod
Upper Strut
Dog Tracking Sy mmetrical Inboard Shi ms Slot
Turning Angle Asy mmetrical Inboard Shi ms Slotted Mount with Tool Upper Inboard Eccentric
Strut Rotation
WinAlign Operation Upper Control Ar m-Other Trailing Arm Adjus tments
Create Slots-GM
Slot Create Slots-Ford Eccentric
DSP Series Sensor Mounting Slot Near Ball J oint Slotted Mount Strut Rod
Wheel Adapter Mounti ng on Eccentrics Shi ms
Inside of Ri m Rear Toe Full Contac t Shi ms
Ball Joint Rotation
Wheel Adapter Mounti ng on
Outside of Ri m Control Ar m Adjustments Rear Camb er
Lower Control Ar m
Wheel Adapter Acc essories Inboard Eccentric
Lower Strut
Tips on M ounting to Avoid Inboard Eccentric Tie Rod
Obstacl es Sy mmetrical Eccentric Slot Eccentrics
Cable/Rack Wiring/Wireless Asy mmetrical Eccentric Upper Inboard Eccentric Slotted Mount
Slot Near Ball J oint Eccentric Tab
DSP Series Runout Trailing Arm Adjus tments
Compensation Slot with Special Tool Create Slots
Eccentrics
3-point Compensation Upper Strut Control Ar m Adjustments
Strut Rod
2-point Compensation Slotted Mount with Tool Shi ms Lower Inboard Eccentric
Rolling Compensation Strut Rotation Upper Inboard Eccentric
Slot
DSP Series Sensor Create Slots-GM After market or Factory Kits Slot
Measurements Create Slots-Ford Outboard Eccentric
Full Contac t Shims
Slotted Mount Upper Control Ar m
Measuring Toe-Out-On-Turns
(TOOTS) Slot Near Ball J oint
Lower Strut Rear Camb er
Measuring Maxi mum Steering After mar ket or Factor y Kits
Angle Eccentrics
Lower Strut
Measuring SAI/IA Slotted Mount Use Wedge on Lower Strut
Measuring Caster Eccentric Tab Eccentrics Full Contac t Shi m on Beam Axle
Measuring Ride Hei ght Create Slots Slotted Mount Replace Bolt on Lower Strut
Eccentric Tab Magna Cam for Lower Strut
Equipment Inspection After mar ket or Factor y Kits Create Slots
Self-Centering Adaptor Wedge
Inspection Control Ar m Adjustments
Bolt Replacement
Self-Centering Adaptor Lock Magna Cam Ecc entrics Lower Inboard Eccentric
Latc h Adjustment
Eccentric Kit Upper Inboard Eccentric
DSP400 Target Slot
Eccentric Bushi ng for Ford 4x4
Inspection/Cleaning
Cradle Adjustment (Audi) Outboard Eccentric
Power Jack Ins pecti on
Upper Control Ar m
Turnplate/Slip Plate Inspection Front Caster Slot Near Ball J oint
Vehicle Adj ustment
Upper Control Ar m-Shi ms After mar ket or Factor y Kits
Procedures
Sy mmetrical Outboar d Shi ms Use Wedge on Lower Strut
Adjusting with Axle J acked Up
Asy mmetrical Outboar d Shi ms Full Contac t Shi m on Beam Axle
Front Toe Sy mmetrical Inboard Shi ms Replace Bolt on Lower Strut
Asy mmetrical Inboard Shi ms Magna Cam for Lower Strut
Conventional Steering
High Rack and Pinion Upper Control Ar m-Other
Low Rack and Pini on
Slot
Relay Rod
Eccentrics
Raised Toe (Audi)
Raised Toe Speci al Tools (Audi)

4.8 i•SHOP Standards
i•SHOP Overview
An i•SHOP-compliant shop is able to share vehicle information with every

workstation in the garage, whether it is an accounting system, the shop management
computer, a diagnostic system, or an alignment system.
Not only do i•SHOP-compliant products share pertinent information throughout a

shop, but also an efficient process is at work that saves time and eliminates errors.
When i•SHOP Standards are in place, relevant data is presented when and where it
is needed.
This is accomplished by the “seamless” sharing of vehicle information from any point
in the shop, to any other i•SHOP -compliant shop or member. Information need only
be entered into the network one time and is immediately and automatically available
to others.
For more information about the i•SHOP Standards, visit the i•SHOP web site at
http://www.ishopstandards.org/, contact any i•SHOP member, or contact:
i•SHOP Standards
Automotive Aftermarket Industry Association
4600 East-West Highway, Suite 300
Bethesda, MD 20814
Tel (301) 654-6664 Fax (301) 654-3299
What are the i•SHOP Standards

i•SHOP Standards are a set of hardware, database, and communications standards
that can be built into automotive service facilities’ computer-based products and
services. From the point-of-sale station where orders are produced, to the computer
systems in the bay, to the bookkeeper in the back office, vehicle information is
instantly available.

i•SHOP Standards make it possible for every computer-driven piece of equipment in
a shop to seamlessly share information. There is nothing to buy and i•SHOP does
not add to the cost of the products. It is a set of “standards” that prepares each
i•SHOP-compatible product to exchange information and deliver valuable new
information when connected to other i•SHOP-compatible products or services.
Where is i•SHOP found

The i•SHOP Standards are a set of standards that are available within the United
States and Canada. Long-range goals are to create standards that can link
automotive service providers worldwide.
i•SHOP Scenario
When i•SHOP is enabled, the front shop computer is running i•SHOP compliant shop
management software. At the same time, the back shop computer is running i•SHOP
compliant diagnostic/repair equipment. Meanwhile, a third computer running i•SHOP
compliant ALLDATA is providing an automotive information database.
Front Shop
Start Shop Management System on an i•SHOP compliant computer running in the
front shop.
Create a new work order. The Shop Management System will create a work order in
its own database. No communication with other shop equipment occurs during the
creation of a work order.
Identify the vehicle using AAIA (Automotive Aftermarket Industry Association). The
Shop Management System will identify the vehicle using the AAIA database. For
additional information on AAIA, visit the AAIA web site at http://www.aftermarket.org/.
Identify Tasks and Photo within the shop management system. Associate a photo
with the work order.
Create the tasks in the work order.
Back Shop
i•SHOP must be enabled in the Common Alignment Preferences in WinAlign Setup.
Back Shop Connection (process moves to the back shop). WinAlign 6.0 and WinSI
3.x vehicle inspection software are both i•SHOP compliant “back shop” applications.
The back shop software automatically establishes a connection to the front shop.

When you press “Begin Alignment,” WinAlign will query for open work orders.
List Work Orders lists all open work orders.
Select a work order and press “OK.”
Customer Search (Optional). It is possible to search for a particular customer name.
List Tasks. After selecting a work order, the list of tasks will be displayed.
Select “Four Wheel Alignment” if you are doing an alignment.
Front Shop
Begin Task / Notify Front Shop (Process ta king place in the front shop).
At this point, the front shop system will be notified that a task has started.
The shop management system can display a message indicating that the task has
started on the back shop equipment.
Back Shop
Recall Shop Information (Process taking place in the back shop, within WinAlign).
If ALLDATA Undercar Diagnostic and Repair Information Database is running on a

separate computer, running i•SHOP compliant information system it can be displayed
in WinAlign.

The system will now query ALLDATA for any relevant information.
The user can browse through the ALLDATA database displayed in HTML using a
“Web browser” interface within WinAlign.
Press “OK” to continue.
Complete the alignment at the back shop.
When on the ExpressAlign screen, the procedure can be saved into a note that will
later be visible at the front shop.
Store the results of the alignment procedure. The results will be transferred to the
front shop.
Save the Current Work Order to the Shop Management System. The order will be
transferred to the front shop.

Front Shop
Shop Management Recall (Process moves to the front shop). At the front shop, it is
possible to view notes produced at the back shop.
Recall Result Object.
At the front shop, it is possible to view the results of the alignment.
4.9 ASANetwork Manager

The ASA Network is a work order management system much like i•SHOP, is
primarily targeted towards specific accounts requiring ASANetwork compatibility. The
ASANetwork st reamlines the work order process and manages all aspects of the
work order from order writing, to performing the services, to completing the sale, to
cataloging the customer’s history.
The ASANetwork Manager must be enabled in the Common Alignment Preferences

section of Set up. Highlight the selection and select “OK” to enable.
A new work order is created using the shop management system.

The technician prepares for an alignment by selecting the appropriate work order
displayed in the ASANetwork screen within Work Management in WinAlign, as shown
on the left. Notice all work orders for the day are shown with their status displayed in
the “State” column. When work order is in progress the state will display “Active” and
an icon will be displayed next to it to show whether it is locked or open, as shown on
the right.
The work order information is automatically entered into the correct fields within the
Work Management screen.
Proceed with the alignment. When the work is complete, the work order will be saved
and the data will be transferred to the ASANetwork Manager. The ASANetwork
Manager will also show that the status has changed to “Finished.”

When the work order is completed, the results of the alingment are transmitted to the
network manager.
The results can be viewed and printed from the shop mangement software, as
illustrated below.

4.10 VideoTech
VideoTech Overview
VideoTech requires the Digital-VIDEO option. VideoTech requires either the
Multimedia CD set or the Multimedia DVD.
“VideoTech” is designed to help the technician diagnose specific vehicle problems in

alignment, tires, and brakes. “VideoTech” uses video and animation segments that
can be viewed prior to vehicle service, or during the alignment procedure.
VideoTech is divided into five categories:
Tire Wear
Vibration and Noise
Adj ustment Concepts
Advanced Alignment Concepts
Handling Conditions
Accessing VideoTech
To access VideoTech, from the logo screen expand the softkeys to display the
“VideoTech” softkey. The “VideoTech” softkey is also available under the “Service
Programs” tier of softkeys.
“VideoTech” is also accessed within the alignment procedure. Place the cursor over
an alignment bar graph, click and hold, and a drop down menu will display with the
“VideoTech” option available, as shown in the closeup below.

Playing a VideoTech Video
Install the “VideoTech” CD or the Multimedia DVD into the CD/DVD player on the
aligner.
Select “VideoTech.” This will bring up a menu list for all videos available, as shown
below.
Scroll through the list and select the appropriate subject by highlighting it. When
highlighted, a window will display at the top of the screen with a brief description and
screen shots from the video chosen.
Press the “Play Selection” softkey when the appropriate selection is highlighted.
Video Controls
There are two types of controls on the VideoTech screen: audio and video. When the
video displays, the bottom of the screen will contain the video controls. The bar that
runs from left to right shows the progression of the running film clip.
The bar is also used to fast forward or rewind the selection, stopping it at any given
point. At the end of the bar is a “Stop” button, , a “Pause” button, , and a “Play”
button, . The clip can be paused and re-started as necessary.
Once the “Stop” button is pressed, the video stops playing and the display returns to
the VideoTech video menu.
The right side of the screen will contain the volume-adjust control bar, . By sliding
the bar up or down the volume can be adjusted accordingly, without adjusting the
volume on the aligner cabinet. If the sound is fully adjusted and the volume is still too
low, then the aligner cabinet volume will have to be increased.

VideoTech Instructional Videos
All of the following diagnostic tests should begin with an appropriate vehicle
inspection.
Tire Wear Advanced Alignment Concepts
Center Tread Wear Insufficient Adjustment
Cupping Wear Gross Alignment Errors
Inside Shoulder Wear Matching Measurements Side to Side
Outside Shoulder Wear Alignment Bushing Calculator
Inside and Outside Shoulder Wear Frame Angle
Tread Lug Wear Turning Angle
Fixing Tread Wear Handling Conditions
Vibration And Noise Camber Pull
Disc Brake Noise Caster Pull
Drum Brake Noise Tire Pull
Wheel and Tire Vibration Excessiv e Torque Steer
Steering Wheel Shimmy Toe Pull
Adjustment Concepts Brake Pedal Pull
Four Wheel Alignment Continual Brake Pull
Adjustment With Wheels Raised Power Steering Pull
Thrust Line Alignment Memory Steer f or a Rack and Pinion
Center Steering Effort Steering System
Dog Tracking Memory Steer f or a Conv entional Steering

System
Bump Steer
Wander
Excessiv e Steering Effort
4.11 Wheelbase and Track Width Measurements

Wheelbase and track width measurements can be used to measure the wheelbase
and track width of a vehicle.
From the “Additional Measurement Procedures” popup screen, press “↑” or “↓” to
highlight “Wheelbase and Track Width Measurements.”
Select “OK.”
The “Rim Width and Adapter Type” popup screen will appear.

The front and rear rim widths should be measured with a caliper and entered into the
rim width data boxes. If the rim width data is left blank, the track width will be an
approximate measurement taken between the outside edges of the rims.
Select the adaptor type for the sensors being used.
Select “OK.”
When the “Steer Ahead” popup screen appears, steer the wheels as directed.
Select “Ready.”
The “Wheelbase and Track Width Measurements” popup screen will appear, showing
the wheelbase and track width of the vehicle.

4.12 Suspension Body Dimension Audit (SBDA)
Suspension Body Dimension Audit (SBDA) is available only with DSP306/308
sensors equipped with the Ride Height option and body offset gauges. SBDA is
available only if DSP306 or DSP308 sensors are used and selected in Aligner Setup.
NOTE: Improper steer-ahead, large values of runout, or large values

of toe can adversely affect SBDA measurements.
SBDA is a quick method of screening a vehicle to determine if it can be aligned

before starting the alignment. SBDA can also be used as a quick inspection method
to detect frame damage of vehicles that have been in minor collisions and will help
the technician to determine that an alignment would not bring the vehicle within
specifications.
Select “Make Additional Measurements” from the “Vehicle Measurements and
From the “Additional Measurement Procedures” popup screen, press “↑” or “↓” to
highlight “Suspension Body Dimension Audit.”
Select “OK.”
The “Rim Width and Adapter Type” popup screen will appear.
The front and rear rim widths should be measured with a caliper and entered into the
rim width data boxes. If the rim width data is left blank, an alternate measurement
called Track Width (Outside Rim) measured at the outside edges of the rims will be
taken instead of Track Width.
Select the adaptor type for the sensors being used.
Select “OK.”

When the “Steer Ahead” popup screen appears, steer the wheels as directed.
Select “Ready.”
Enter the ride height dimensions using the ride height tool. Refer to “Ride Height,”
page 110.
After measuring ride height at a wheel, lower the ride height tool slightly, pull the
Body Offset Gauge (slide scale) of the tool back slightly, then raise and extend the
Body Offset Gauge so that it is making contact with the lower outside edge of the
fender well.
Enter the body offset measurements manually into the body offset data boxes.
Repeat this step for each wheel. The preferred measurement procedure is to
measure both wheels of one axle before proceeding to the next axle.
Care should be used to take the body offset measurements with the Body Offset
Gauge perpendicular to the body and at the same contact point on the body for both
sides of the axle.

READ BODY OFFSET
MEASUREMENT
HERE SLIDE
SCALE
LOWER EDGE OF
FENDER WELL
Select “OK.”
The “Suspension Body Dimension Audit” popup screen will appear showing the
wheelbase, track width, and body angle of the vehicle in the illustration on the left.
The illustration on the right shows the body wheel offset and body wheel set back of
the vehicle. The positions of the wheels and the body angle are greatly exaggerated
for clarity.
Selecting “Show Vertical Measurements” will present ride height and body roll
measurements with a graphical depiction of the body that may be viewed from the
front and the rear axle. The amount of roll is greatly exaggerated for clarity.
NOTE: All graphical measurement depictions are greatly

exaggerated for clarity.

4.13 Transmitting Measurements for Auditing
NOTE: This procedure is for vehicle manufacturing audit sites.
This document provides information that describes how vehicle manufacturing audit
sites can send information to a serial port or to save to a file, using WinAlign version
5.0 or higher software.
There are four possible formats that may be used for transmitting the measurements.
Two of the formats exist for backward compatibility with the Hunter 111 Alignment
Systems. The two new formats in WinAlign 5.1 provide complete alignment angle
data. The two new formats also provide a significant amount of additional information
including date, time, customer information, vehicle information, and sensor status.
One of the two new formats includes status information with each angle; the other
format includes only the value for each angle.
The user can choose the format and whether to send data to a file or to the serial port
within the Setup feature in WinAlign.
The transmit measurement function can be accessed on the measurement screen at

any time by pressing Shift and K1 .
When Shift and K1 is pressed, the measurements will be transmitted through the
serial port or to a file.
The following is a sample of the output produced when transmitting data to a text file
with the status information included for each angle.
"02/05/96","12:01:43","VIN098A8F09S0","31111","Customer","Jane","Bob Technician",
"R000170","Chrysler 95 Sebring",65537,6,0,0,0,0, 0x8000000, 0x8000000, 0xE000000,
0xE000000, "Axle0",0.5,0,0.5,0,0.,-1,0.,0,0.,0,0.,-1,0.,0,0.,0,0.,-1,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-
2,-99,-2,-99,-2,0.,1,0.,1,0.,-1,0.,-1,-99,-2,0.,1,0.,1,0.,1,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,0.,1,0.,1,0.,1,-
99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-40.,-1,39.36,-1,39.36,-1,-40.,-1,-99,-2,0.,0,0.,0,10.,-1,11.,-
1,-1.,-1,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,0.,-1,0.,-1,-99,-2,0.,-1,0.,-1,-99,-2,0.,-1,0.,-1,-99,-2,-99,-
2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-
99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-
2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,"Axle1",-0.25,0,-0.25,0,0.,-1,-99,-2,-
99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,0.,-1,0.,-1,-99,-2,-
99,-2,-99,-2,0.,0,0.,0,0.,0,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,0.,0, 0.,0,0.,0, -99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-
2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,12.,-1,13.,-1,-1.,-1,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-
2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,0.,-1,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-
2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-
99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-
2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2,-99,-2
The above data would appear as a single line in a text file.
The following is a sample of the output produced when transmitting data to a text file
without status information included for each angle.
"02/05/96","12:07:32","VIN1098123019","31111","Customer","Jane","Bob Technician",
"R000170","Chrysler 95 Sebring", 65537, 6,0,0,0,0, 0x8000000,0x8000000, 0xE000000,
0xE000000," Axle 0",0.5,0.5,0.,0.,0.,0.,0.,0.,0.,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,0.,0.,0.,-99,-
99,0.16,0.16,0.32,-99,-99,-99,-99,0.16,0.16,0.32,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-
99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,0.,-99,-99,0.,-99,-99,0.,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-
99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-
99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,"Axle 1",-0.25,-0.25,0.,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-
99,0.,0.,-99,-99,-99,0.,0.,0.,-99,-99,-99,-99,0.,0.,0.,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-
99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-
99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-
99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99,-99

Both of the new formats begin with the following “header” information:
1. date
2. time
3. vehicle identification number (VIN)
4. mileage
5. customer last name
6. customer first name
7. technician name
8. work order number
9. Spec name (the vehicle name as it appears after recall
specs in WinAlign)
10. The procedure ID
11. The index to the current step in the procedure
12. Left Front Sensor Status
13. Right Front Sensor Status
14. Left Rear Sensor Status
15. Right Rear Sensor Status
The status indicator is 0 if everything is OK and 1 if there is any problem.
16. Left Front Status Mask
17. Right Front Status Mask
18. Left Rear Status Mask
19. Right Rear Status Mask
The status mask provides detailed information about the status of each sensor.
Further details on the contents of the status mask are available upon request.
Following the “header” information are all of the data for the front and rear axle. Each
axle is preceded by an axle identifier of either "Axle 0" or "Axle 1." For each angle,
the value of the angle is displayed. If the format with status is used, then a number
representing the status follows each angle value. This status number can have one
of the following values:
-2 The value of the angle is not valid
-1 The angle is valid but the spec is not
0 The angle is not within spec
1 The angle is within spec
Values that are not valid are presented as -99.

The same set of angles is shown for each axle. The order of the angle values is as
follows:
* Custom Account Measurement

1. camber, left
2. camber, right
3. camber, cross
4. caster, left
5. caster, right
6. caster, cross
7. caster adjust, left
8. caster adjust, right
9. caster adjust, cross
10. caster, steer angle
11. included angle, left
12. included angle, right
13. included angle, cross
14. SAI, left
15. SAI, right
16. SAI, cross
17. steer, thrust, or scrub angle
18. steer, thrust, or scrub angle, center line referenced
19. set back, angle, live
20. set back, angle, snapshot
21. set back, distance, snapshot
22. toe, left
23. toe, right
24. toe, total
25. toe, raised procedure, left
26. toe, raised procedure, right
27. toe, raised procedure, total
28. toe, raised procedure, cross (side-to-side)
29. toe, adjust, left
30. toe, adjust, right
31. toe, adjust, total
32. bump steer delta, raised, left
33. reserved for future enhancements
37. bump steer delta, lowered, total
38. lock to lock steer, left wheel, left steer (LILOCK)
39. lock to lock steer, left wheel, right steer (ROLOCK)
40. lock to lock steer, right wheel, left steer (LOLOCK)
41. lock to lock steer, right wheel, right steer (RILOCK)
42. toe out on turns, reference wheel spec, left steer
43. toe out on turns, measured wheel difference, left steer
44. toe out on turns, measured wheel difference, right steer
45. ride height, left
46. ride height, right
47. ride height, cross
50. wheelbase difference angle, live
51. wheelbase difference angle, snapshot
52. wheelbase difference distance, snapshot

53. track width difference angle, live
54. track width difference angle, snapshot
55. track width difference distance, snapshot
56. lateral offset difference angle, left, live
57. lateral offset difference angle, left, snapshot
58. lateral offset difference distance, left, snapshot
59. lateral offset difference angle, right, live
60. lateral offset difference angle, right, snapshot
61. lateral offset difference distance, right, snapshot
62. axle offset angle (thrust angle), snapshot
63. axle offset distance (thrust angle), snapshot
64. steering wheel angle
65. Rear toe variation 128 mm right
66. Rear toe variation 128 mm left
69. Trim height, cross
70. toe, cross (side-to-side)
71. toe out on turns, cross (side-to-side)
72. camber at 0° toe, left (snapshot)
73. camber at 0° toe, right (snapshot)
74. camber at 0° toe, total (snapshot)
75. camber at 0° toe, cross (snapshot)
76. toe pressed, *, left
77. toe pressed, *, right
78. toe pressed, *, total
79. toe pressed, *, cross (side-to-side)
80. Trim height left *
81. Trim height right *
82. Wheelbase left direct measurement
83. Wheelbase right direct measurement
84. track width front direct measurement
85. track width rear direct measurement
86. Tire pressure, left
87. Tire pressure, right
88. Tire tread depth, outside, left
89. Tire tread depth, center (or only measurement if only one tread depth is used), left
90. Tire tread depth, inside, left
91. Tire tread depth, outside, right
92. Tire tread depth, center (or only measurement if only one tread depth is used), right
93. Tire tread depth, inside, right
94. Ball point, left
95. Ball point, right
96. Control point (linear distance)
97. toe, *, zero spec, left
98. toe, *, zero spec, right
99. toe, *, zero spec, total
100. steering wheel angle, non-caster steer, live
101. caster adjust, left, live
102. caster adjust, right, live
103. caster adjust, cross, live
104. caster adjust, left, frozen

105. caster adjust, right, frozen
106. caster adjust, cross, frozen
107. camber, left, live
108. camber, right, live
109. camber, cross, live
110. camber, left, frozen
111. camber, right, frozen
112. camber, cross, frozen
113. height, left (angular measurement)
114. height, right (angular measurement)
115. height, cross (angular measurement)
116. body width offset, left, distance, as measured
117. body width offset, left, distance, corrected with uncompensated camber and ride height
118. body width offset, right, distance, as measured
119. body width offset, right, distance, corrected with uncompensated camber and ride height
120. ride height, left, distance, as measured
121. ride height, right, distance, as measured
122. body wheel offset, left, distance
123. body wheel offset, right, distance
124. body wheel set back parallel to body centerline, distance, positive if left wheel
125. track width (distance between wheel centers), distance
126. wheelbase (distance between wheel centers), left, distance (vehicle-, not axle-
related; stored only in front axle)
127. wheelbase (distance between wheel centers), right, distance (vehicle-, not axle-
related; stored only in front axle)
128. body angle, angle, positive if body centerline is rotated clockwise from geometric
centerline when viewed from above (vehicle-, not axle-related; stored only in front axle)
129. roll angle, angle, positive counterclockwise when viewed from behind, with 0 = level
(calculated individually for each axle)
130. pseudo-track-width computed from the outside centers of the wheels, distance
131. caster offset from zero measured at the end of the caster steer, with level sensors, left
132. caster offset from zero measured at the end of the caster steer, with level sensors, right
133. Control point (angular measurement)
134. Steering Lash
135. Suspension play
136. scrub angle, angle of this axle to the scrub reference axle of this axle’s “axle position”;
meaningful only for non-steerable axles within an axle position having more than one
non-steerable axle, except that it is not meaningful for the scrub reference axle of the
axle position; positive to the right
137. wheelbase averaged from left and right direct measurements, distance
138. wheelbase averaged from Body Shop left and right wheelbases, for determining
proper Ackerman arm, distance
Additional measurements may be added in future releases of WinAlign.

Transmitting Measurements in the C111 Format-
Partial Measurements C111 Format A
Character # Length Format Data
0-11 12 “HUNTER AUDIT” preamble
12-17 6 “-NN.NN” left front camber
18-23 6 “-NN.NN” right front camber
24-29 6 “-NN.NN” left front caster
30-35 6 “-NN.NN” right front caster
36-41 6 “-NN.NN” left front toe
42-47 6 “-NN.NN” right front toe
48-53 6 “-NN.NN” total front toe
54-59 6 “-NN.NN” front setback
60-65 6 “-NN.NN” left front SAI
66-71 6 “-NN.NN” right front SAI
72-77 6 “-NN.NN” left front included angle
78-83 6 “-NN.NN” right front included angle
84-89 6 “-NN.NN” left rear camber
90-95 6 “-NN.NN” right rear camber
96-101 6 “-NN.NN” left rear toe
102-107 6 “-NN.NN” right rear toe
108-113 6 “-NN.NN” total rear toe
114-119 6 “-NN.NN” rear thrust angle
120-121 2 “HH” compensation/caster/SAI status
122 1 “H” alignment procedure number
123 1 “H” alignment step number (invalid)
124-141 18 “HH:MM:SS DD-MM-YY” time and date
142-156 15 “NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN” 16 blank chars (spaces)
157 1 “0” message identification
158-159 2 0DH,0AH carriage ret, line feed
Total 160 characters.
Alignment procedure number:
4 = Total 4 wheel alignment
2 = Thrust line alignment
0 = Center line alignment
Compensation/caster/SAI status:
Bit # Use
0 1 = left front sensor compensated
1 1 = right front sensor compensated
2 1 = left rear sensor compensated
3 1 = right rear sensor compensated
4 1 = caster measured
5 1 = SAI and Included Angle measured
6 1 = not used
7 1 = not used

Transmitting Measurements in the C111 Format-
Partial Measurements C111 Format B
Character # Length Format Data
0-5 6 “-NN.NN” left front camber
6-11 6 “-NN.NN” right front camber
12-17 6 “-NN.NN” left front caster
18-23 6 “-NN.NN” right front caster
24-29 6 “-NN.NN” left front toe
30-35 6 “-NN.NN” right front toe
36-41 6 “-NN.NN” total front toe
42-47 6 “-NN.NN” front setback
48-53 6 “-NN.NN” left front SAI
54-59 6 “-NN.NN” right front SAI
60-65 6 “-NN.NN” left front included angle
66-71 6 “-NN.NN” right front included angle
72-77 6 “-NN.NN” left rear camber
78-83 6 “-NN.NN” right rear camber
84-89 6 “-NN.NN” left rear toe
90-95 6 “-NN.NN” right rear toe
96-101 6 “-NN.NN” total rear toe
102-107 6 “-NN.NN” rear thrust angle
108-109 2 “HH” compensation/caster/SAI status
110 1 “4” always “4”
111 1 “0” always “0”
112-129 18 “HH:MM:SS DD-MM-YY” time and date
130-135 6 “NNNNNN” 6 blank characters (spaces)
136 1 “0” message identification
137-138 2 0DH,0AH carriage ret, line feed
Total 139 characters.
Compensation/caster/SAI status:
Bit # Use
0 1 = left front sensor compensated
1 1 = right front sensor compensated
2 1 = left rear sensor compensated
3 1 = right rear sensor compensated
4 1 = caster measured
5 1 = SAI and Included Angle measured
6 1 = not used
7 1 = not used

Filename: DETAIL.DOC
Template: C:\Program Files\Microsoft Office\Templates\D2h_in.dot
Subject:
Author: Hunter Engineering Company
Keywords:
Comments:
Change Number: 1,093
Number of Pages: 86
5. Equipment Information
5.1 Conventional Sensors

Care and Cleaning of the Conventional Sensors
When cleaning the sensors, use a mild window cleaning solution to wipe off the
sensors and adaptors.
CAUTION: Do not hose down or submerge the sensors. Do not spray

cleaner on sensor. This could cause damage to the electrical
system and optical components.
Keep wheel adaptor rods cleaned and lubricated. Lubricate as needed with a coating
of light lubricant such as WD-40.
CAUTION: Do not lubricate center screw shaft.
RF*STIK
The DSP200-RF, DSP208-RF, DSP250-RF, DSP258-RF sensors communicate with
the aligner console using Radio Frequency (RF). Radio waves are transmitted and
received from the sensors and the RF∗STIK (located on top of the aligner console).
In rare instances, the RF∗STIK may receive interference from electronic devices in
the neighborhood (pagers, mobile phones, etc.). The DSP200-RF, DSP208-RF,
DSP250-RF, DSP258-RF sensors and RF∗STIK may be configured to use different
radio frequencies to minimize interference.
Interference may occur because the radio waves of an individual sensor are not
being well received by the RF∗STIK. When this happens, move the mobile cabinet at
least 2 or 3 inches (51 or 76 mm) in any direction.
Temporary interference problems can be solved by connecting the sensors to the
aligner console through the sensor cables instead of by radio.
HF Pod
The DSP250-HF, DSP258-HF, DSP306-HF, and DSP308-HF sensors communicate
with the aligner console using high frequency. Radio waves are transmitted and
received from the sensors and the HF Pod that is located on top of the aligner
console.
In rare instances, the HF Pod may receive interference from electronic devices in the
neighborhood (primarily microwave ovens). The HF system can be easily configured
to use different frequencies to minimize interference. However, microwave ovens
create considerable energy over a broad band. The best way to avoid interference
from microwave ovens is to turn them off during an alignment. In instances when the
microwave use cannot be controlled, distance is the best remedy for microwave
interference. The aligner should be placed a minimum of 30 feet from the microwave
oven to minimize interference.
WinAlign Operation Manual 5. Equipment Information • 289

Temporary loss of signal may occur because the radio waves of an individual sensor
are not being well received by the HF Pod. When this happens, move the mobile
cabinet at least 2 or 3 inches (51 to 76 mm) in any direction.
Temporary interference problems can be solved by connecting the sensors to the
aligner console through the sensor cables instead of by radio.
The four LED stick-type displays on the HF Pod indicate the integrity of
communication between the aligner console and the four sensors.
Refer to “Aligner Set Up,” page 180, for details on “Setting Up HF Channels.”
Charging Conventional Sensor Batteries (RF and HF/HFSS Sensors

Only)
Each sensor contains a 6VDC, sealed lead acid, rechargeable battery. To get the
maximum life out of the batteries in the sensors, follow these three rules:
1. If the sensors are not in use, charge them.

2. Switch sensors “OFF” during charging, if you are using cables.
3. Charge for fourteen hours minimum, and/or provide an extended
charge time (24 hours or longer) at least once a week.
NOTE: Make sure the main power switch at the rear of the console
is left “on” and the outlet that supplies power to the aligner is
on. “K” and “P” cabinets are equipped with a computer,
printer and CRT, but still provide power to the charging
stations when using the standby power switch. This standby
power switch is located on the front or side of the cabinet.
The “S” cabinet does not have a standby power switch. The
computer, printer, and CRT may be switched “off”
independently from the main power switch.
To prevent premature degradation of battery performance, the charger has to replace

125% of the energy that was removed from the battery. It is not necessary to fully
discharge the batteries before charging. However, it is important they be charged
fully.
Charging information:
To recharge the batteries when the sensors are not in use, place the wheel adaptors
(with the sensors still mounted) on the cabinet storage hanger and leave the main
aligner power ON. The contacts on the back of the sensors will match the contacts on
the front of the storage hangers.
Any time batteries are being charged, the Red/Green charge indicator light on the
sensor will be illuminated.
You should expect at least 8 hours of continuous use from a fully charged battery.
If you are not getting this amount of usage time, the most likely cause is inadequate
charging time.
Batteries that are consistently subjected to partial charging rather than full charge
cycles w ill permanently lose capacity.
Charging time for a fully discharged battery with the sensor power switch turned
“OFF,” is 12 to 14 hours. Three or four times this interval would be required if the
sensors were left “ON” during the charge cycle. It is very important that the
sensors be turned “OFF” during charging. The sensor’s power switch is located
on the sensor next to the charge indicator LED.
290 • 5. Equipment Information WinAlign Operation Manual

Charging overnight with the sensors’ power switches set to “OFF” will provide a
proper charge.
Our charging system cannot over-charge the batteries. If you’re not using the
sensors, charge them!
The sensor batteries are rated for 200 full charge/discharge cycles, making their life
expectancy about one year for the customer that consistently discharges them 100%.
Life expectancy for batteries with lower usage can be significantly longer.
100% Discharge 200 Cycles

In a shop with extended service hours, there are some things you can do to prolong
battery life:
When the sensors are not being used to perform alignments, they should be stored
on the charging hangers with sensor power switched off. At a minimum, turn the
sensor “OFF” between alignments. Any charging accomplished throughout the day
can shorten the necessary overnight charge time.
If you have one day out of the week when alignments are not performed, you can let
the sensors charge continuously for 24 hours or longer. This should “undo” the
effects of any undercharging that occurred during the previous week. This sort of
prolonged charging will only be effective at “repairing” the batteries if performed
regularly. Once a week is the recommended minimum.
When is it time to replace the batteries?
If after a full charge the battery does not last for the expected 8 hours, you should put
it through one or two sessions of extended charge time (24 hours or longer). If the
battery does not recover and start giving satisfactory cycle time, then it should be
replaced. The sooner you catch the batteries discharging prematurely, the more likely
an extended charge time will restore the battery to normal capacity. If the battery
discharge time is only three or four hours, it is unlikely that extended charge time will
help significantly.
Additional information:
The charge light indicator turning from yellow to green is an indication that the
charging mode has switched from a fast charge mode into a “trickle” charge mode. It
does not mean that the battery is 100% charged. A fully discharged battery should be
allowed to “trickle” charge a minimum of five hours to ensure a full charge.
Any sensor that is powered up after being off for a while will initially indicate 100%
capacity on the aligner screen. This is not an accurate indication of the charge state
of the battery. Within 5 to 10 minutes of operation, the on-screen battery level
indicator will settle at its true value. The individual wheels on the screen are color-
coded to indicate the actual battery condition.

The following is an indication of battery charging condition:
Green = Fully charged or partially charged

Red (with battery recharging icon) = requires charging
Yellow = Weak battery
GREEN-
FULLY
CHARGED
YELLOW-
INDICATES A
WEAK BATTERY
A RED INDICATOR
AND THE CHARGING
ICON INDICATE THE
BATTERY REQUIRES
CHARGING
The charging circuit has been “fine tuned” to work specifically with part number
194-18-2. Replacement batteries, Eagle Picher part number HE6V7.7, Panasonic
part numbers LCR6V7.2P or LC-R067R2P, and B & B Battery part number BP7-6-T1
are available from Hunter, or Eagle Picher, Panasonic, or B & B Battery distributors.
Substituting different batteries is not recommended.
5.2 DSP400 Sensors

Target Maintenance
Keeping the DSP400 targets clean is the only required maintenance. Certain
precautions should be followed.
Technicians should clean their hands thoroughly before handling the
targets.
Keep hands and tools away from the target surface.
Keep the center casting of the wheel clamp tight, to prevent the target
from falling off the vehicle.
Targets should not have any oil or grease on them. To remove oil or
grease, the targets should be cleaned with mild window cleaning solution
and a clean, soft cloth. Do NOT use shop towels.
NOTE: It is imperative that no metal particles are embedded in the

cleaning cloth used on the target area.
DSP400 targets should be cleaned only when necessary. When the

system has difficulties identifying a target or if there is a noticeable dirt
build up, clean the targets.
When targets are not in use, store them in the sensor support to avoid
scratches to the reflective surface. The target(s) should never be placed
face down.
Targets that are broken or chipped must be replaced.

Camera Maintenance
Keep hands and tools away from the camera lens area.
Camera lenses should not have any oil or grease on them. To remove oil or grease,
the lenses should be cleaned with mild window cleaning solution sprayed onto a soft
cloth. Do NOT spray anything directly onto the camera.
Other than cleaning, all maintenance of the camera should be referred to an

authorized Hunter Service Representative.
Care and Cleaning of the Targets

When cleaning, use a mild window cleaning solution to wipe off the targets and wheel
adaptors.
CAUTION: Do not hose down or submerge the targets in water, or spray

cleaner directly on the target. This could damage the optical
components.
Keep wheel adaptor rods cleaned and lubricated. Lubricate as needed with a coating
of light lubricant such as WD-40.
CAUTION: Do not lubricate the center screw shaft of the wheel adaptor.
If the adapters are lubricated they should be careful to avoid
lubricating the center screw shaft.
DSP400L Vertical Lift Control Unit

The system control unit is bolted to the front of the left leg. The control unit plugs into
a 115V wall outlet and provides electrical power to the processor and the drive motor.
The drive motor, sensor, and the safety switches connect to the control unit.
The front of the control unit contains a membrane keypad for controlling beam
movement. The membrane keypad is shown below:
3
M
2
Operation
The “up” or “down” arrow keys move the beam up or down, respectively. The beam
moves only while the key is depressed and can be positioned at any height by using
these keys.
The warning beeper repeatedly sounds as long as the beam is moving. This alerts
anyone nearby that the beam is in motion.

Preset Keys
The keys between the “up” and “down” arrow keys allow the beam to be positioned at
“preset” heights. To set a “preset” key, do the following:
1. Use the “up” and “down” keys to move the beam to the desired
height.
2. Press and hold the “M” (memory) key.
3. Press the desired “preset” key.
4. Listen for three quick beeps. This confirms that the height setting has
been stored in memory.
5. Release the keys.
UP ARROW
KEY
MEMORY
KEY
PRESET
DOWN ARROW
M KEYS
KEY
RESET KEY
(STOPS
WARNING R
BEEPER)
To use a “preset” key, simply press and release it. The cameras move to the height
“preset” for that key. If a height has not been set for a “preset” key, the beeper
sounds for about a half second and the beam remains stationary.
The “preset keys” would normally be set for the following heights:
• The top key is maximum height.
• The bottom key is minimum height.
• The next to the bottom key is “normal alignment height.”
• The remaining two keys can be set to other desired working
heights.
Safety Sw itches
If the beam is moving and the safety switches actuate, beam movement stops and
the warning beeper sounds continuously. Pressing the “R” (reset) key on the Control
Unit stops the beeping. The idea is that, if beam movement is blocked, help is
summoned by the beeping, and continues until the beeping is acknowledged.
5.3 Remote Indicator

LED
The LED Remote Indicator allows the technician to be “mobile” in the bay while
making adjustments to the vehicle. The Operation Instructions for the Remote
Indicator is Form 3857T.
LCD
The LCD Remote Indicator allows the technician to be “mobile” in the bay while
making adjustments to the vehicle. The Operation Instructions for the Remote
Indicator is Form 3914T.

5.4 Digital-PHOTO Option
The optional CD-ROM displays digital photos of adjustment and inspection points for
the specific vehicle being aligned. The Digital-PHOTO system uses a new database
of information that includes the translations of all of the text on all of the adjustment
photos and line art. Therefore, it is possible to see the adjustment illustrations in any
language. Many options are included in the Digital-PHOTO features that can be
found in the Illustrating Vehicle Adjustments section of this manual. The Digital-
PHOTO option is Kit 20-1259-1 for Series 411 Aligners.
5.5 CD-ROM Handling Instructions

Handling the CD-ROM
Handle the disk only by its edge.
Do not touch the surface of the disk.
Do not drop the disk.

Do not scratch the disk.
Replacing the CD-ROM in Systems That Have Tray Type Pla yers
Press the eject button on the CD-ROM drive to open the CD-ROM door.
NOTE: Ensure that the tray is vacant before placing a CD-ROM in

the CD-ROM drive.
Place the CD-ROM in the tray with the printed surface side up.
Press the eject button again to close the CD-ROM player door.
5.6 Mouse
A mouse is the standard pointing device used with Series 411 and 611 Aligners.
A flat surface is needed to operate the mouse efficiently. Use Mouse Pad Kit, 20-
1363-1, on P411’s and 20-1434-1, on P611’s. The driver for the mouse is installed at
the factory. A light pen and a mouse may both be installed and used.
5.8 Operating the Standard Printer

Softkeys are labeled with the words “Print . . .” at certain intervals of the alignment
procedure. Pressing the “Print . . .” key will activate the printer and print the informa-
tion indicated by the softkey labels.
Lights on the front panel of the printer indicate printer status. The buttons on the front
panel of the printer control the functions of the printer.
POWER light – indicates the printer power is on.
ALARM light – lights when paper is replenished or no paper is available to the
printer. The alarm also lights should the printhead become jammed or stopped.

SELECT light – lights when printer is in select mode and must be on for printer to be
on-line with the computer.
PITCH (10, 12, 17 lights) – indicates the number of characters per inch to be printed.
Default position is 10. Selection is made using the PITCH button.
MODE (NLQ, UTILITY, HSD lights) – indicates the quality of the printer output as
near letter quality (NLQ), utility, or high speed draft (HSD). Default position is
UTILITY. Selection is made using the MODE button.
SELECT button – will place printer in de-select mode and stop communication
between the printer and the system. To return to the select mode, press again. It will
also stop the self-test at power up.
TOF SET button – will set the “Top of Form” (the first printing line) at the current
location of the printhead when printer is de-selected.
FORM FEED button – will advance the paper to the top of the next of form.
LINE FEED button – will advance the paper one line.
Changing Ribbon Cartridge (P/N 162-42-2):

Remove the access cover by lifting it off.
Slide the printhead to the middle of the printer away from the rollers on the bail.
Grasp the cartridge on both sides and lift up.
Snap the new cartridge on the printhead plate. (Tilt the back of the cartridge so it
slides into the plate, lower the top of the cartridge over the printhead, aligning the
tabs on either side with the inserts on the printhead plate.)
Reinstall the access cover.
Rear Feed Paper Loading

Turn the printer off.
Place the paper behind and under the printer in the box provided.
Remove the access cover and lift the bail.
Open the paper lever.
Insert first sheet of paper through the paper separator and into the paper guides.
Continue to slide paper until it appears in front of the roller.
Align the holes of the paper with the corresponding pins of the adjustable pin feeds.
Lower the bail.

Use the roller knob to advance the paper to the first printing line location.
Replace the access cover and turn the printer on.
NOTE: After changing the ribbon cartridge, loading paper, or

clearing a jam, turn the printer off, then on, using the switch
on the right side of the printer.
5.9 Remote Control Transmitter

If the remote control transmitter fails to operate properly, the battery may have to be
replaced. This unit requires a nine volt alkaline battery.
NOTE: An alkaline battery is required to provide the proper current

for remote transmitter operation.
5.10 Program Shell

Program Shell is a feature that allows for customizing softkeys, menu items, and start
up files. Applications can be programmed to appear on the last tier of soft keys
and/or popup menus for easy access. Program Shell is also used to customize
startup and launch options.
This feature is intended for the advanced user who wishes to customize their system.
Customizing with Program Shell

Program Shell Command Lines
Program Shell is modified through PROGSHEL.TXT. The text file can be found in the
HEPROGS directory, sub-directories Aligner/shell. Use any text editor such as Note
Pad or DOS text editor, to open the file.
When editing PROGSHEL.TXT, it is recommended to use comments to define what

function the command lines perform. This will make it easier to understand what has
been programmed and to edit PROGSHEL.TXT in the future.
Modifications made to PROGSHEL.TXT will not take effect until the file has been
saved and the system is rebooted.
When opened, PROGSHEL.TXT appears in the following format:
Progshel.txt
# This is a comment.
# Blank Lines are also ok
PROGRAM “C:\WINDOWS\NOTEPAD.EXE”
MENUTEXT “Notepad”
LOGOONLY
SOFTKEY “Start\nNotepad”
Program Shell uses two types of lines, comments and command lines.
The “#” preceding a line, indicates that the line is a comment, documentation which
explains what the following command lines do, names author of the command lines,
shows the date the command lines were added and/or offers any other information
pertinent to the command lines.

A line that is not preceded by the “#” is a command line. Command lines perform
specific functions that will be explained later in this document.
Blank lines or carriage returns are allowed.
Use a “Tab” to separate fields. Do not use the “Spacebar” to place spaces between
fields as this will give a syntax error
“Tab”
Program Shell command lines must begin with a command, followed by the
parameters required to execute the command. The following are the command lines
used by Program Shell:
• PROGRAM
• MENUTEXT
• LOGOONLY
• SOFTKEY
• IFEXISTS
• STARTUP
• DIRECTORY
PROGRAM identifies the executable command line of a specific program. This is
how Program Shell knows which program is being used for the commands that
follow.
MENUTEXT adds the program identified in the PROGRAM line as a choice on a

popup menu. Popup menus appear on bar graphs and in Point and Click Inspection
screens.
LOGOONLY The LOGOONLY keyword is used in conjunction with the SOFTKEY

keyword to limit where a softkey will appear. If the LOGOONLY keyword is used,
then the new softkey will appear only on the logo screen. If LOGOONLY is not used,
then the key will appear on all primary screens (i.e. Measurements, Specs, Work
Management and Inspection).
SOFTKEY adds text on a soft key associated with the program designated in the
PROGRAM line.
The following entry in PROGSHEL.TXT identifies a program and adds text to the soft
key and menu item to be used as shortcuts to the program. (Note that the remarks,
designated by the “#,” give the information relating to the following command lines.)
# The following is an entry for a single program
# The program line contains the exact command line
# for the program. The MENUTEXT line contains the text
# that will appear in a popup menu. The SOFTKEY item
# contains the text that will appear on the softkey.
LOGOONLY
SOFTKEY “Start\nNotepad”
The \n creates a new line of text. In the above example, the SOFTKEY command line
reads “Start\nNotepad.” This command line will create a soft key with two lines of
text, “Start” being the first line, and “Notepad” being the second line. If Start Notepad
were to be one line of text on the soft key, the command line would read “Start
Notepad.”
The following example will add a menu item and a softkey to access Notepad, add a
menu item, and add one line of text to the soft key:

# The following is an entry for the Notepad program
# The program line contains the exact command line
# for DOS. The MENUTEXT line contains the text
# that will appear in a popup menu. The SOFTKEY item
# contains the text that will appear on the softkey.
PROGRAM “C:\WINDOWS\command.com”
LOGOONLY
SOFTKEY “Start Notepad”
IFEXISTS displays a program on a softkey and creates a menu item only if the
program exists on the system.
# The IFEXISTS line will display NetScape only if it
# exists on the system.
PROGRAM “C:\applicat\netscape\program\netscape.exe”
IFEXISTS “C:\applicat\netscape\program\netscape.exe”
MENUTEXT “NetScape”
LOGOONLY
SOFTKEY “Start NetScape”
In this example, a softkey labeled “Start NetScape” and a menu item labeled
“NetScape” will be created only if the program NetScape exists on the system.
STARTUP is used to launch programs on startup of the system. The following

example will open Paint Shop Pro when the WinAlign is launched.
# The following will cause the PaintShop Pro
# Application to be launched at startup.
# This item will be started up, but it will
# not appear on the soft key or menu bar.
PROGRAM “C:\PSP\PSP.EXE”
STARTUP
DIRECTORY is used to launch an application from within the working directory. The
following example will create a softkey that launches Mitchell Undercar from the
working directory.
# The following item will appear only on

# the popup menus, not on the soft keys.
PROGRAM “C:\mitchell\repair\uwin\uwin.exe”
IFEXISTS “C:\mitchell\repair\uwin\uwin.exe”
DIRECTORY “C:\mitchell\repair\uwin
MENUTEXT x0A060000
PROGRAM, SOFTKEY, and MENUTEXT, also have some special syntax that can be
used to avoid absolute paths. In the following example, %HEP% is a vocabulary item
which provides the path for the HEPROGS directory.
NOTE: Vocabulary items provide translation processe s for

programmers and are not intended for use by the general
user.
The example, vocabulary item x1A000000, provides the vocabulary item on the
softkey and menu item, which identifies “Braketester.”
# To avoid absolute paths, the following syntax
# can be used. The string %HEP% will be replaced
# with the HEPROGS directory with the appropriate
# drive letter to produce
# “C:\HEPROGS\braketst\execute\braketst.exe.
PROGRAM “%HEP%\braketst\execute\braketst.exe”
MENUTEXT x1A000000
LOGOONLY
SOFTKEY x1A000000

5.11 WinAlign Multi-disk Backup/Restore
The WinAlign Multi-disk Backup/Restore procedure saves files modified by WinAlign
to floppy disk(s). The saved files can be restored later by using the restore
procedure.
NOTE: The restore procedure does not install the WinAlign

software.
WinAlign modifies files when any of the following occur: setup is changed, a vehicle
specification is stored, a vehicle specification note is stored, the logon registry is
changed, a work order is stored, a form letter is stored or a filter is stored.
Backup should be performed on a regular basis. How often backup is performed

depends on what features of WinAlign are used. The following backup schedules are
suggested:
If you do not use Work Management then back up weekly.

If you use Work Management, then back up daily.
Backup and Restore Procedures

To access the Backup/Restore utility, press “Service Programs” on the logo screen.
The menu labels will change.
Press “Backup and Restore” from the “Service Programs” softkey menu.
The Backup and Restore screen presents initial information about WinAlign backup.
It also displays the time of the last backup, the number of days since the previous
backup, and the number of disk(s) in the most recent backup set.
Backup Procedure
CAUTION: If the machine is reset, or the backup procedure is canceled

at anytime during the back up procedure, WinAlign deletes
the backup file from the floppy disk and the backup is invalid.
It is strongly recommended that Cancel or Reset is not used
during the procedure.

Select “Start Backup” or press K4. WinAlign will prompt to insert a formatted 1.44
High Density disk in Drive A.
Insert a formatted disk in Drive A.
WinAlign will check the inserted disk for formatting, write-protection, and the
existence of previous back up data. If the disk contains an earlier backup, WinAlign
will inform you that the disk contains data, and ask for confirmation to overwrite the
disk. Select “OK” to proceed with the backup.
CAUTION: If the disk contains the latest backup prior to the one being
performed, it is recommended that you do not ov erw rite the
disk. Select “NO.” WinAlign will prompt you to insert another
disk. Insert a disk, either blank or from another set, and
begin backup process again.
If the backup requires more than one disk, WinAlign will prompt you to remove, and
label as “WinAlign Backup” followed by the disk number and the current date and
time and to insert a new disk for each disk required to complete a successful backup.

After WinAlign completes backup procedure, you will be prompted that the backup
was successfully completed. Select “OK” and exit backup program.
Label the floppy disk(s) as “WinAlign Backup” followed by the disk number and the
current date and time.
Restore Procedure
Begin the restore procedure by selecting the “Start Restore” on the Backup and
Restore Files screen.
Insert disk one of the current backup into drive A. WinAlign will verify that the disk
can be read and that it contains a valid backup.

If the backup data being restored requires more than one disk, WinAlign will prompt
the user to insert each disk in the set (one at a time) to verify each disk. Remove and
insert the appropriate disk as requested.
NOTE: This step is a necessary step for the restore procedure. It

insures that all of the disks in the backup set are accounted
for so that the restore procedure may begin.
If you do not have all of the disks for the restore procedure,
you can cancel Restore at this time by selecting “Cancel.”
CAUTION: After WinAlign has verified all the disks in the backup set, it
will prompt to insert disk one of the set again. It is at this
point that the restore procedure begins. If the restore
procedure is interrupted at any time during the process, one
or more files in WinAlign may be corrupted. This would
require a complete re-installation of WinAlign.
Select “OK” when the “Restore completed successfully” screen appears, and exit the
restore program.
5.12 Electronic Keys

Included with a shipment of diskettes are one or more electronic keys that look
similar to large watch batteries. These keys are needed to run the WinAlign program.
If the program is loaded onto a 411/611 unit without the proper keys being inserted in
the Hunter Interface Board or Hunter Interconnect Board, an error message will
appear, similar to the one shown below.

Electronic keys can be placed in any of the available sockets on the Hunter
Interconnect Board and/or the electronic key holder. It does not matter which key is in
which socket.
A red key is always required to run WinAlign. A green key is required to access the
Factory Specification Database If the aligner has a CD-ROM an orange key is
required to use the WinAlign features, which access the CD-ROM, such as the digital
photos (adjustment illustrations and inspection illustrations) or the MPEG video
segments (Just-In-Time Training and adjustments videos).
WinAlign will NOT operate properly if the required electronic keys are not installed!
Additional keys can be used to allow access to other features within WinAlign. An
additional orange key provides access to Digital-VIDEO and Digital-PHOTO. A yellow
key provides access to features that meet the needs of certain national accounts.
5.13 Conventional Sensor Calibration

Calibration Reminder
A calibration reminder can be enabled in Set up to notify the user at specified
intervals to calibrate the sensors.
The reminder can be set for every 90 days, every 180 days, or never. It is
recommended to perform calibration at least every six months.
General Information
For additional information, refer to Calibration Instructions, Form 3720T, or DSP300
Series Sensor Calibration Instructions, Form 4059T.
Calibration must be completed prior to operation of the sensors. Failure to

successfully complete the calibration procedure will inhibit all of the alignment
functions of the system.
The calibration data for the sensors is stored in the sensors. Replacing the
transducer control circuit board in a sensor will require the sensor to be re-calibrated.
Sensors are calibrated in sets and should be kept in sets so that unnecessary
recalibration is not required. If, however, the front or rear sensors of one set are used
with the front or rear sensors of another set, “Zero Only” calibration must be
performed on the new set.

A calibrated set of DSP100, DSP200, and DSP250 Series Sensors can be used with
a M111, 211, 311, 411, or 611 aligner.
A calibrated set of DSP306 or DSP308 Series Sensors can be used with any 211,
411, or 611 aligner using WinAlign software version 2.0 or higher, or a 311 Series
aligner.
A calibrated set of DSP306 HF or DSP308 HF Series Sensors can be used with any
211, 411, or 611 aligner using WinAlign software version 2.0 or higher.
CAUTION: The prisms used for calibrating conventional sensors

(DSP100, 200, and 250 Series Sensors) must be kept clean
to avoid inaccurate calibration. A fingerprint, a piece of dirt,
or a coating of dust may result in inaccurate calibration. Use
an ammonia based glass cleaner with a CLEAN soft tissue
or cotton swab to clean the prisms. Clean the prisms before
every use.
The calibration procedures must be followed carefully. An accurate calibration will not
be obtained if procedure performance is rushed.
The information in this section is applicable to all DSP100, 200, 250, 306, and 308
Series Sensors unless otherwise indicated.
Mounting DSP Sensors

Remove the sensors from the wheel adaptors.
Carefully slide the shafts of the left and right front sensors into their respective
calibration shaft hubs in the front calibration shaft. (The front of the calibration fixture
is indicated by arrows painted on the baseplate.)
Carefully slide the shafts of the left and right rear sensors into their respective
calibration shaft hubs in the rear calibration shaft.
NOTE: To prevent the calibration fixture from tipping over after

mounting the first sensor, mount the second sensor on the
opposite side of the calibration fixture.
NOTE: The sensor shafts must be fully inserted into the shaft hubs.
The hex-shaped shoulder of the sensor shaft must contact
the flat face end of the calibration shaft.
DSP100, 200 and 250 Series Sensors: The toe arms

should rest on the top of the round cams at the forward end
of the toe arm rests.
Finger tighten the thumbscrews on all four calibration shaft hubs to hold the sensors
in place.
CAUTION: The thumbscrews must be as tight as you can tighten them

with your fingers. Do NOT use a wrench. There must be no
looseness between the calibration shaft and the sensor
shaft. Check for looseness and make sure there is no play
between the sensor and its shaft.

Connect the sensors to the console using the sensor cables, as shown.
CONSOLE CONSOLE
DSP200/250 DSP208/258
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR

CABLES CABLES CABLES CABLES
CALIBRATION FIXTURE CALIBRATION FIXTURE
CONSOLE CONSOLE
DSP308
DSP306
SENSOR
CABLES
SENSOR
CABLES SENSOR
CABLES
SENSOR
CABLES
CALIBRAT ION FIXTURE CALIBRATION FIXTURE
Leveling the Calibration Fixture

Unscrew the RED and BLACK screws in the baseplate so that the fixture is resting on
only the three SILVER leveling screws. One silver screw is located at the front of the
fixture and two at the rear of the fixture.
Position the level left-to-right on top of the rear calibration shaft. To verify the level is
accurate, refer to the Calibration Fixture Adjustments for procedures to check the
level assembly.
If necessary, adjust the two setscrews in the aluminum casting on either side of the
level so that the level is held vertical.
Adjust the two rear SILVER leveling screws until the rear calibration shaft is level left-
to-right. Recheck by reversing the level assembly on the shaft.

Position the level front-to-rear on the top of the two flats at the center of the aluminum
casting.
Adjust the single SILVER leveling screw at the front of the fixture until the calibration
fixture is level front-to-rear. Recheck by reversing the level assembly on the
aluminum top casting.
Recheck the left-to-right and front-to-rear level of the fixture, and make adjustments
as necessary.
Position the level assembly left-to-right on the top of the front calibration shaft to
check it for level. The front calibration shaft should be level. If necessary, refer to the
Calibration Fixture Adjustments for procedures to re-level the top casting.
NOTE: Both front and rear calibration shafts must be level and the
fixture must not “rock.”
Screw down the two front RED screws (in the fixture baseplate) to meet the table
surface. The fixture should now be resting solidly on five leveling screws (two RED
and one SILVER at the front, and two SILVER at the rear).
Leveling DSP100, DSP200, and DSP250 Series Sensors:
Level each rear sensor by observing the level in the sensor and tightening the sensor
lock knob.
Level the front sensors by resting the toe arms on the toe arm supports at the front of
the calibration fixture. A small weight (one or two ounces) should be placed on the
top of each toe arm to hold it against the support.
NOTE: If the toe arm supports have been damaged or abused, or if

the level on top of the toe arm rest bar has shifted, readjust
the toe arm supports. Refer to the Calibration Fixture
Adjustments for details.
Leveling DSP300 Series Sensors:
Observe the sensor level while leveling the sensor. Adjust the sensors until the
bubble is centered in the level. Tighten the sensor lock knob.
Starting the Calibration Procedure

Turn on the system. Verify the logo screen is displayed.
Press the menu shift key, , until the “Service Programs” softkey is displayed.
Press the “Service Programs” softkey.

Press the “Calibrate Aligner” softkey.
Procedure Basics
The screen will guide you through the calibration steps. At the beginning, you will
answer questions about what is to be calibrated, after which the program will follow
the appropriate procedure based upon your response.
Pressing “Backup” during the calibration procedure will display the previous step. If
desired, you may “backup” all the way to the beginning of the calibration procedure.
To illustrate what is desired at each step, the screen will show a “plan view” of the
sensors mounted on the calibration fixture. When the procedure calls for an operation
to be performed on the sensors, the graphics on the screen will clearly illustrate what
is required.

After you have done what the screen requires, press the “Ready” softkey. The aligner
will instruct the sensors to save certain information from the transducers. The
sensors will wait until the required transducers have valid and stable data, and then
save it. While the sensors are waiting for the data to stabilize, you will be instructed to
wait. You can abort this waiting by pressing “Pause,” at which time the screen will
require you to repeat the step.
On some steps of the procedure, the sensor software will use the data that has been
saved to compute and check a calibration coefficient. If the new coefficient is in error,
the screen will show which transducer has the error and what the error is; either a
procedure error, or an improperly mounted or malfunctioning transducer.
If a calibration error is shown, you have the options of pressing “Backup” and
repeating the step, pressing “Continue” and ignoring the error, or pressing “HELP”,
then the key, and then “Sensor Diagnostics”, which pops up the Sensor
Diagnostics screen.
The Sensor Diagnostics screens function exactly as they do for the alignment
operating software. If you press “Continue,” you will be returned to the step you were
on in the calibration procedure when you pressed “Sensor Diagnostics.” You may go
to the Sensor Diagnostics screen at any time to view the intermediate results of the
calibration procedure or to diagnose a problem.
NOTE: When the sensors are mounted on the calibration shafts, the
weight of the sensors cause s the shafts to bend downward
slightly. When the camber transducers are zero adjusted,
their measurements are offset from zero by the amount of
this “droop,” and so a small offset equal to this droop is
applied to the zero calibration coefficient. This means that
the camber transducers should not measure zero when
mounted on the calibration fixture and shown on the
diagnostics screens. If the compensated angles are shown,
the camber transducers should directly measure the “droop.”
Because the different sensor types have different weights,
the offset varies as well. The displayed compensated
camber angle should correspond to the following chart.
SENSOR DSP100 DSP200 DSP208/250HF/258HF DSP250 DSP258

Left Front .11° .14° .14 .13° .13°
Right Front .11° .14° .14 .13° .13°
Left Rear .09° .11° .14 .10° .13°
Right Rear .09° .11° .14 .10° .13°
SENSOR DSP306 DSP306HF DSP308 DSP308HF

Left Front .13° .16° .13° .16°
Right Front .13° .16° .13° .16°
Left Rear .09° .12° .13° .16°
Right Rear .09° .12° .13° .16°
NOTE: Power must not be removed from the sensors during the
calibration procedure. If a sensor loses power, the data
saved during intermediate steps will be lost. The screen will
inform you that this has occurred, and will automatically
restart the procedure.

Selecting What to Calibrate
The camber/caster adjust transducers of the DSP Series Sensors are designed so
that it is unlikely the “range calibration” will change. Do NOT perform a “Full
Calibration” on any transducer unless that transducer or sensor circuit board has
been adjusted or replaced. If it is necessary to range calibrate a transducer, range
calibrate only that transducer.
Toe transducers are range calibrated every time a zero calibration is performed.
IMPORTANT: When calibrating DSP Series Sensors, if one transducer is

replaced or adjusted, the opposite (left or right) transducer
must be calibrated also.
The calibration primary screen shows what is to be calibrated.
You can easily change the calibration selections:
Press “Select Sensor Type” to pop up a screen to select the sensor type
to be calibrated.
Press “Select Sensors” to pop up a screen to select which sensors are to
be calibrated.
Press “Select Transducers” to pop up a screen to select which
transducers are to be calibrated.
Press “Select Procedure” to pop up a screen to select either a “Full
Calibration” or “Zero Calibration” procedure.
These four popup screens operate in the same manner. The screen pops up to show
the following:
The title of the screen shows what is to be selected.
The possible selections are listed in a box at the bottom of the screen.
The current selection is highlighted in the box.
An explanation of the current selection is shown in the center of the
screen.

For example, the “Sensor Selection” popup screen appears as follows:
To change the selection, press or as needed to highlight the

desired selection, then press “OK.”
Example:
The longitudinal toe transducer in the left front sensor has been
replaced. Calibrate only that transducer by making the following
selections:
1. Select DSP sensors.
2. Select LF only.
3. Select longitudinal toe only.
4. Select range and zero.
5. Follow the instructions.
Example:
The right rear transducer control board has been replaced. Calibrate all
transducers in that sensor by making the following selections:
1. Select DSP sensors.
2. Select RR only.
3. Select all transducers.
4. Select range and zero.
5. Follow the instructions.
NOTE: The transducers of the DSP100, 200, and 250 Series

Sensors are designed so that it is extremely unlikely that the
“range calibration” will change. For this reason, do NOT
range calibrate a transducer unless that transducer or
transducer control board has been replaced or repaired. If
necessary to range calibrate a transducer, range calibrate
only that transducer.
NOTE: The transducers of the DSP300 Series Sensors are

designed so the “range calibration” will change and affect the
opposite transducer. For this reason, you must perform a
“Full Calibration” when that transducer or sensor circuit
board is adjusted or replaced.

Performing the Calibration (Conventional Sensors)
Based on the selected sensors, transducers and procedure, the screen will prompt
you through the necessary steps of the calibration process.
Press “Calibrate Sensors” to begin the procedure. The screen pops up with
instructions to mount the sensors on the calibration fixture, as shown:
The screen shows the status of each sensor and of each transducer. Go to the
“Sensor Diagnostics” screen to verify that the transducers function properly and that
the boresight readings are within limits.
Press “Ready” when the sensors are ready to calibrate. The system will wait until the
necessary transducer readings are stable, and then will capture the first readings.
CAUTION: Do not rush the calibration process. The more patient and
careful you are, the better the calibration will be.
The screen will prompt you, step-by-step, through the remaining steps of the
procedure, which include some combination of mounting prisms, tilting the fixture with
spacers, compensating the sensors for runout, and leveling the sensors for zero
calibration. The actual steps to be performed will vary, depending on which sensors
and transducers are to be calibrated.
NOTE: At any time during the calibration procedure, the “Sensor

Diagnostics” screen may be viewed by pressing the softkey
labeled “HELP”, then the key, and then “Sensor
Diagnostics.” From the “Sensor Diagnostics” screen, “Sensor
Data” or “Transducer Data” screens may be viewed.
Pressing “OK” will return the screen to the same point in the
calibration procedure.
Mounting Prisms for Toe Transducers (DSP100, 200, 250 Series Sensors)
When installing prisms for calibrating conventional sensors, the letter displayed on
the CRT corresponds to the letter on the prism. When properly installed, the letter on
the prism is at the top where it can be read normally. The graphics on the screen
show what the prism should look like when viewed “face on.”
When the screen prompts for a prism to be installed for a longitudinal transducer,
insert the prism into the opening at an angle and slide it into place until it is fully
seated (flush with the cover). To remove it, pull the knob outward.
When the screen prompts for a prism to be installed for a transverse transducer,
insert the two pins on the back of the prism into the holes of the transducer front plate
so that the plate holds the prism by the grooves cut into the pins. To remove it, lift it
slightly and pull outward.

CAUTION: When mounting prisms, very little force is required. Be
extremely careful to not move the sensors, especially with
transverse transducers.
Mounting Spacers for Camber and Caster Adjust Transducers (All

Sensors)
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen and press “Ready” after each step.
If an error is made during the calibration, pressing “Backup” can redo the step.
Repeat the step and continue the procedure.
When the screen prompts for spacers to be installed under the side of the fixture, lift
the fixture using the BLACK screw at the middle of the indicated side. Position one of
the thinner spacers under the RED leveling screw at the front and one under the
SILVER leveling screw at the rear. Lower the fixture onto the two thin spacers.
When the screen prompts for spacers to be installed under the front of the fixture, lift
the fixture using the BLACK screw at the front. Position one of the thicker spacers
under each RED leveling screw at the front of the fixture. Lower the fixture onto the
thick spacers.
Compensating Sensors for Runout (DSP100, 200, and 250 Series Sensors)
The sensors must be compensated for runout prior to zero calibration. The screen
will prompt when this must be done. A “2-point” calibration procedure is performed,
as follows:
1. Rotate the two calibration shafts so that the thumbscrews are on the
bottom side of the shafts.
2. Level and lock the sensors.
3. Press and release the compensation switch on each sensor.
4. When the RED compensation LED on each sensor is flashing, rotate
the front calibration shaft 180 degrees as follows:
a. Unlock the front sensors.
b. Loosen the front calibration shaft lock knob.
c. Rotate the front calibration shaft 180 degrees until the
green LED’s of both front sensors are illuminated.
d. Tighten the front calibration shaft lock knob.
e. Level and lock the front sensors.
5. Rotate the rear calibration shaft 180 degrees as follows:
a. Unlock the rear sensors.
b. Loosen the rear calibration shaft adjustment knob.
c. Rotate the rear calibration shaft 180 degrees until the left
rear sensor, green LED illuminates.
d. Lock the left rear sensor.
e. Level the left rear sensor by rotating the rear calibration
shaft.
f. Tighten the rear calibration shaft adjustment knob.
g. Level and lock the right rear sensor, ensuring that the
green LED is illuminated.
6. Press and release the compensation switch on each sensor.
7. When the RED compensation LED on each sensor is illuminated,
press “Ready.”

Zero Calibration
CAUTION: Perform this step slowly and carefully. The most critical
calibration of an alignment sensor is “Zero Calibration.”
After compensating for runout, when the screen prompts, remove all prisms and
spacers.
Verify that the sensors are in the position that will be called ZERO.
Verify that all spacers and prisms are removed, and then recheck the levelness of the
calibration fixture and the sensors.
Press “Ready.”
Storing Calibration Results

When the screen prompts that it is ready to store calibration, press “Ready.” The new
calibration data will be stored in the sensors, and the old calibration data will be
deleted.
NOTE: The calibration results may be stored, even if the calibration

procedure resulted in errors. For example, if only one
transducer indicated an error, the results of the entire
procedure could be stored, that one problem corrected, and
then recalibrate only that transducer.
Finishing Calibration
When the calibration process is complete, do the following:
Remove the sensors from the calibration fixture and remount them on
the wheel adaptors.
Remove the calibration shafts from the calibration fixture and place them
in the compartment in the fixture base.
Store the fixture in a dry location.
Calibration Fixture Adjustments
Checking the Level Assembly

Verify that the level assembly is calibrated by placing it on a reasonably level, flat
surface, noting the position of the bubble.
Rotate the level assembly 180 degrees. If the bubble is floating to the right or left of
center for example, then rotating the level assembly 180 degrees should also show
the bubble floating in the same direction. This verifies that the level is calibrated
correctly and is indicating an out of level surface.
If the level is not in the same position after rotating the level assembly 180 degrees,
remove the cover to gain access to the level mounting screws. Adjust one screw only
to position the bubble to a point midway between the first and second position.
Repeat the operation and adjustment if required.
After level calibration, replace the cover.

Adjusting Cams for DSP100, 200, and 250 Series Sensors
The toe armrest bar cams should be adjusted using a new set of sensors with their
levels correctly adjusted.
Adjust the toe arm rest bar 3/4 inch down from the bottom edge of the toe arm rest
plate and tighten the hex nuts above and below the bar.
Install the front and rear calibration shafts in the “V” notches of the aluminum top
casting.
Install thrust washers.
NOTE: Both spring loaded thrust washers must be located on the

same side of the fixture. Either side may be used.
Make sure the adjustment knobs for the shaft leveling blocks face toward the outside
of the fixture.
Insert the eight dowel pins/leveling rods through the holes in the top casting and
calibration shaft hold down blocks. Loosen the hold down block thumbscrews as
needed to allow the dowel pins to line up with the holes in the hold down blocks, then
adjust the thumbscrews until the hold down blocks are approximately leveled.
NOTE: Do NOT fully tighten the thumbscrews. Overtightening the

thumbscrews can warp the casting or distort the calibration
shafts, resulting in calibration errors.
Mount the sensors on the calibration fixture:

Carefully slide the shafts of the front sensors into their respective calibration shaft
hubs at the front of the calibration fixture. The calibration fixture has arrows painted
on the baseplate, which indicate the front of the fixture.
Carefully slide the shafts of the rear sensors into their respective calibration shaft
hubs at the rear of the calibration fixture.
CAUTION: The sensor shafts must be fully inserted into the calibration
shaft hubs. The hex-shaped shoulder of the sensor shaft
must contact the flat face end of the calibration fixture shaft.
The toe arms should rest on the top of the round cams at the
each end of the toe arm rest.
Finger tighten the thumbscrews on all four calibration shaft hubs to hold the sensors
in place.
CAUTION: The thumbscrews must be finger tightened only. Do NOT

use a wrench. Verify there is no play between the sensor
shaft and the calibration shaft.
Level the fixture as described in “Leveling the Top Casting.”

Rotate the toe arm rest bar cams until they support the front sensor toe arms in the
level position. A small weight (one or two ounces) should be placed on the top of
each toe arm to hold it against the support. Tighten the 1/4 inch hex head screws that
hold the cams in place.
Adjust the cartridge level located on top of the toe arm rest bar to read level when the
fixture is leveled.

Leveling the Top Casting
It is possible for the top casting to be mismounted to the baseplate so that the
adjustment screws cannot compensate for the misalignment. If either of the
calibration shafts cannot be leveled, this is an indication that the casting is mounted
incorrectly. When this condition is present in your calibration fixture, adjustment of the
hex nuts and studs that mount the casting will be necessary.
Position the level assembly left-to-right on the front calibration shaft and verify level.
Make the necessary corrections by adjusting the front 3/8 inch hex nuts that are
located above and below the aluminum top casting on the studs that mount the
casting to the base assembly. Recheck level by reversing the level assembly on the
shaft.
Repeat the previous step on the rear calibration shaft.
Position the level front-to-rear on top of the two flats at the center of the aluminum
casting and verify level. Make the necessary corrections by adjusting the 3/8 inch hex
nuts that are located above and below the aluminum top casting on the studs that
mount the casting to the base assembly.
Tighten all locking nuts securing the assembly.
Recheck to verify that the casting left-to-right, and front-to-rear are still level.
Zero Calibration Using the Long Calibration Bar
Softw are Requirements

A set of DSP306, DSP306-HF/HFSS, DSP308, or DSP308-HF/HFSS Series
Sensors, can be calibrated with the long calibration bar and any 411 or 611 wheel
aligner using WinAlign software version 4.1 or higher.
DSP Sensor Preparation

Remove the sensors from the wheel adaptors.
Rotate the sensor shaft so the index mark is in the 12 o’clock position.
Lock the shaft in this position using the sensor lock knob.
INDEX
MARK
SENSOR
LOCK KNOB
NOTE: Older model sensors will not have the machined index mark
notch. For these sensors, assign an index (sensor shaft
position is not critical) using a permanent marker, and use
this index mark for any future calibration.

Installing the Calibration Bar and Stands
The calibration bar and stands must be placed on a reasonably level, smooth, solid,
stable surface to perform the calibration procedure. The forward section of the lift
rack that is used for wheel alignments is recommended, as seen below.
WHEEL
ALIGNER
CONSOLE
Fro nt of Runways
Drive-ON
Direction
Place L ong
Calibration Bar
Here
The photo below illustrates a typical installation with front sensors mounted. This is
the viewpoint from which all calibration instructions are described.
FRONT
OF
RUNWAYS
CALIBRATION BAR
RANGE RANGE
BRACKET BRACKET
LOCATING LOCATING
PIN PIN
CALIBRATION STAND
The locating pins on the calibration bar must be captured in the u-shaped notches on
both sides of the range bracket. The range bracket is attached to the top of the
calibration stand. Position the calibration bar on the stands as shown above.
NOTE: Failure to use a stable surface during calibration may result
in inaccurate results.

Stabilizing the Calibration Stand
One support screw is located on the inboard side of the stand and two are on the
outer side of the stand. See the figure below.
Adjust all the support screws on one stand until they protrude from the bottom of the
stand approximately four or five threads. Tighten the lock nuts at each support screw.
Place the calibration bar on the stands and adjust the support screws on the second
stand until there is no movement or rocking of the bar and stands.
SUPPORT ADJUST THE
SCREW SUPPORT SCREWS
ON ONE STAND
UNTIL THERE IS
NO INSTABILITY
LOCK AT EITHER OF
NUT THESE LOCATIONS
FRONT-TO-REAR
SUPPORT SCREWS SIDE-TO-SIDE
(2) SUPPORT SCREW
(1)
NOTE: The calibration stands MUST NOT move during calibration.
Mounting the DSP Sensors

Mount the front sensors in the outer end of the calibration bar as shown below.
LOCK SENSOR IN PLACE

USING THIS KNOB
MOUNT MOUNT
SENSORS SENSORS
HERE HERE
Level, and then lock the sensors in place using the outermost calibration bar locking
knob on top of the calibration bar. The aligner CRT display will show the calibration
bar with the appropriate knobs highlighted.
NOTE: The sensor shafts must be fully inserted into the calibration
bar. The shoulder of the sensor shaft must contact the flat
face end of the calibration bar.
Connect the sensors to the console using the sensor cables.

Rotating the Calibration Bar
When prompted to “Rotate bar 180 degrees,” remove the sensors from the calibration
bar (do NOT disconnect power to them). Rotate the bar top-to-bottom as shown
below, then remount and secure the sensors u sing the appropriate calibration bar
lock knobs.
The calibration bar has lock knobs on both top and bottom. It is necessary to tighten
the knobs on top of the bar only.
The correct starting position of the calibration bar will have the side with the single,
black identification mark on the left side, as facing the aligner console.
CAUTION: Do NOT flip the calibration bar end-over-end.
THIS ORIENTATION MARK

WILL BE ON THE BOTTOM
AFTER ROTATION
THESE ORIENTATION
MARKS WILL BE ON TOP
AFTER ROTATION
Perform ing the Zero Calibration

Verify that the appropriate type sensors are selected and “All Sensors,” “All
Transducers,” and “Zero Calibration (Long Calibration Bar)” are selected.
When finished verifying selections, press “Calibrate Sensors” to begin the procedure
and follow the on-screen instructions.
For additional information and detailed procedural instructions, refer to “Zero

Calibration Using the Long Calibration Bar,” Form 4508T.
5.14 DSP400 Sensor Calibration

Refer to DSP400 Sensor Calibration Instructions, Form 4346T.

5.15 DSP400 Sensor Calibration Check Procedure
After calibrating the DSP400 Sensors, the following screen appears with the
instructions to position the calibration bar at the rear of the lift, and to mount, level,
and lock the rear targets on the fixture.
If you choose to not check the calibration now, this procedure can be performed any
time during the alignment procedure if sensor measurements are questionable.
To check calibration later, the aligner must be reset, then go to “Service Programs;”
“Calibrate Aligner,” and press “Check Calibration” to begin the procedure.
The screen above will appear.
Press “Ready” when you are ready to begin.
Rotate the targets as instructed on the screen.
The screen above and below show the bar graphs indicating the “out of tolerance”
and “in tolerance” position of the targets as they are rotated.

When the readings are stable, the cameras will capture the data and the procedure
will advance to the following screen. Follow the instructions and rotate the targets as
directed.
If rear calibration passe s, the “Passed” screen appears as below.
Press “Continue” and follow the instructions shown on the screen below.

Remove the rear targets and move the calibration bar to the front position. Mount the
front targets as directed. Press “Ready.”
Rotate the targets as instructed.
will advance to the next screen. Follow the instructions and rotate the targets as
directed.
will advance to the next screen.

If front calibration passes, the “Passed” screen appears as below.
Press “Ready” as instructed and you will be returned to the calibration checking entry
screen. Press the “Menu Shift” key to present the next level of softkeys. Press “End
Calibration” and restart the alignment procedure.

Filename: Equip.doc
Subject:
Author: RRB
Keywords:
Comments:
Change Number: 642
Number of Pages: 34
6. Additional Information
6.1 Cradle Adjustment

The construction of passenger vehicles has changed drastically in the last twenty
years. Rear wheel driven, full framed cars, with conventional upper control arm ad-
justments for front camber and caster are no longer the majority of vehicles being
serviced.
The majority of the passenger vehicles on the road today are front wheel driven,
unibody vehicles using some form of front strut suspension and often limited to
minimal front camber and/or caster adjustments.
Although many aspects of alignment have changed due to the design of the newer
vehicles, one of the major issues is the presence of a subframe assembly often
referred to as a “cradle.”
Why has the “cradle” become an alignment issue?

Many of the FWD, unibody vehicles are equipped with little, if any, front camber
and/or caster adjustments. This lack of adjustment has created a need to find addi-
tional methods to adjust alignment angles to within the manufacturer’s specifications.
One of the methods discovered, which may work on some vehicles, is to re-position
the cradle assembly forward, rearward or side-to-side. Since the lower control arms
attach to the cradle assembly’s frame rails, re-positioning or shifting the cradle
assembly will reposition the lower ball joints and change camber and/or caster
angles.
Vehicles designed with rear cradle assemblies rely on the cradle to maintain proper
control arm position for rear camber, toe, and thrust angle.
Is it possible to reposition a cradle w ithout frame equipment?

Yes, it is possible to reposition the cradle assembly without frame equipment in most
cases. Many cradle assemblies have been re-positioned unknowingly by technicians
performing service procedures such as transaxle repair and engine removal.
Bolting a cradle assembly to the body of the vehicle seems simple, but without the
knowledge of how the cradle assembly position can affect alignment angles, it is easy
to position the lower control arms far enough away from their intended position to
cause alignment angles to be out of specification.
A basic understanding of the interaction between the cradle assembly and the
alignment angles will provide the alignment technician with the knowledge to check
the cradle position and reposition it when needed.
WinAlign Operation Manual 6. Additional Information • 323

What are the procedures for properly positioning a cradle assem bly?
The procedures differ from manufacturer to manufacturer, however the concept be-
hind shifting the cradle assembly and the affect it has on alignment angles, tire wear,
su spension components, driveline components and steering components remains
constant throughout the industry.
WARNING: The important fact to remember is the cradle assembly

has one, and only one correct position, w hich is
generally determined by alignment holes betw een the
cradle assembly and the body of the v ehicle.
WARNING: The information contained in this section is not intended

to be a substitute for the v ehicle manufacturer’s serv ice
information regarding the cradle assembly.
Definition
The term “cradle” is often used to describe a subframe constructed of two side frame
rails with transverse supporting cross members. The frame rails and cross members
may be welded or bolted together and are attached as an assembly to the unibody
structure with bolts and insulating bushings. This assembly forms a cradle for the
driveline and the engine.
Why are cradle assemblies used?

The cradle assembly serves as a mounting platform for the entire driveline assembly
and the lower control arms of the suspension on front or rear driven vehicles
equipped with transverse mounted engines. A considerable savings in both time and
money is realized utilizing this design, since the engine, transmission, differential,
and lower suspension components can be assembled and installed as a unit.
What is the proper position for the cradle?

In general, the position of the cradle in respect to the unibody must be at a location
that provides proper driveline, suspension, and steering alignment. The exact posi-
tion of the cradle assembly is normally documented in the manufacturer’s service
manual.
324 • 6. Additional Information WinAlign Operation Manual

What happens if the cradle is out of position?
It is possible, however, for the cradle assembly to be secured in a position that is
slightly off to one side or slightly forward or rearward of the intended position. This is
due to the enlarged frame holes in the cradle rails.
Over-sizing of the frame holes is needed to simplify the attachment of the cradle
assembly to the body of the vehicle. Unfortunately, this over-sizing also may allow
the cradle to be positioned incorrectly with the body of the vehicle.
An improperly positioned front cradle assembly can affect camber caster setback and
S.A.I./IA. The result may be:
• insufficient adjustment range

• premature tire wear
• vehicle instability
• improper drive line angles
In addition, since the upper suspension components (i.e. struts, stabilizer bar frame
bushings, etc.), steering gear and upper engine mount are attached to the body, an
incorrect position of the cradle assembly to the body may produce undesired stress
on suspension and steering components.
An improperly positioned rear cradle may affect rear camber, toe and thrust angle.
This may result in undesired “dog-tracking” and premature tire wear.
Vehicles With Adjustable Cradles

The following chart represents the majority of vehicle models having a unibody
construction with moveable front frame rails, often called a “cradle assembly.”
Front Adjustable Cradles

Ford Taurus (Sedan and wagon)
Mercury Sable (Sedan and wagon)
Lincoln Continental
GM W-Body (10-car) (Lumina, Grand Prix, Cutlass Supreme, Regal)
GM A-body (Celebrity, Century, Cutlass, 6000)
GM X-body (Citation, Skylark, Omega, Phoenix)
GM H-body (Bonneville, Oldsmobile 88, LeSabre)
GM C-body (Oldsmobile 98, Park Avenue, Deville, Fleetwood)
Acura Legend
Rear Cradles
Pontiac Fiero
Ford Thunderbird (1989 to date)
Mercury Cougar (1989 to date)
Always refer to the manufacturer’s serv ice information prior to attempting a

change in cradle position. Each model requires a specific alignment technique
unique to its cradle-to-body design.

Camber and Steering Axis Inclination (S.A.I.) Angles
What to look for?

The position of the cradle assembly may be incorrect due to collision, improper
mounting bolt torque or incorrect placement after having been removed during
engine or transaxle repair.
Inspect the cradle rails and cross members for damage. Bent or damaged cradle
assembly components are good indicators that the cradle may have moved.
The inability to adjust camber to preferred specification on either side of the vehicle is
another sign that the cradle may be out of position. S.A.I. measurements are also
quite helpful in determining cradle position.
How does the cradle position effect cam ber and S.A.I.?
Since the front cradle assembly controls the lower control arm position, incorrect
placement side-to-side will affect front camber and Steering Axis Inclination (S.A.I.).
When the cradle assembly is moved sideways, one lower control arm is moved out-
ward decreasing camber and increasing S.A.I. The other lower control arm moves
inward increasing camber and decreasing S.A.I.
An incorrect side-to-side position of the rear cradle assembly will affect rear camber
in the same manner.
The following example may clarify what occurs when the cradle assembly shifts to
one side or the other.
13° 14°
1/2° -1/2°
EXAMPLE:
left camber = + 1/2°
right camber = - 1/2°
left SAI = 13 °
right SAI = 14 °
desired camber = 0 °
Shifting the cradle to the positive camber side would equalize camber and SAI.
The example above illustrates a combination of camber and S.A.I., which may indi-
cate the need for repositioning or “shifting” of the cradle assembly. The cradle posi-
tion should be checked using the manufacturer’s centering instructions. In this
example, moving the cradle assembly to the positive camber side will reduce the
difference in camber and S.A.I.

What are the affects of an improperly positioned cradle?
Although it is true that “shifting” a cradle often times brings “factory non-adjustable” or
“out-of-adjustment” alignment angles closer to preferred specification, the side affects
may be undesirable.
Shifting a cradle assembly away from proper alignment with the body, for the sake of
reducing camber and S.A.I. difference, may result in unwanted torque steer, bump
steer or damage to drive shaft assemblies.
Vehicle manufacturers specify the correct procedure for insuring a proper alignment
of the cradle assembly to the body of the vehicle. Most of these vehicles have
alignment holes in the cradle assembly and body of the vehicle, which require the
use of an alignment dowel or similar device to establish the precise location of the
cradle assembly.
WARNING: Variance from the manufacturer’s procedure is an

assumed liability and should not be taken lightly, as the
results may be costly and dangerous.
Caster and Setback Angles
What are the signs to look for?

The existing position of the cradle assembly may be incorrect due to collision, im-
proper mounting bolt torque, or incorrect placement after being removed for engine or
transaxle repair.
Inspect the cradle rails, lower control arms, and cross members for damage or signs
of collision. Bent or damaged cradle assembly components are good indicators that
the cradle may have moved.
Check the torque of the cradle mounting bolts and adjust as needed using the
manufacturer’s torque specification and procedure. Improperly torqued mounting
bolts may allow the cradle to reposition itself during acceleration and braking.
The inability to adjust caster to preferred specification on either side of the vehicle is
a sign that the cradle may be out of proper position. Another good indicator is when a
significant amount of setback accompanies a low caster reading.

How does the cradle position effect caster and setback angles?
Since the front cradle assembly controls the lower control arm position, incorrect
placement corner-to-corner affects front caster and setback angles. When the cradle
assembly is moved forward on one side and rearward on the other side, one lower
control arm is moved rearward decreasing caster and increasing setback. The other
lower control arm moves forward increasing caster and increasing setback.
An incorrect corner-to-corner position of the rear cradle assembly will affect rear in-
dividual toe and thrust angle.
The following example may clarify what occurs when the cradle shifts forward on one
side and rearward on the other side.
EXAMPLE:
left caster = 2 °
right caster = 4 °
setback = - 0.80
desired caster = 3 °
The cradle has shifted rearward to the left causing the left lower control arm to move
rearward and decreasing left caster. This also increased negative setback.
The cradle moved forward on the right side causing the right lower control arm to
move forward and increasing caster. This also increased negative setback.
The example above illustrates a combination of caster and setback, which may indi-
cate the need for repositioning or “shifting” of the cradle assembly.
Shifting the cradle to a centered position would reduce setback and reduce the dif-
ference in left and right caster bringing them closer to preferred specification. The
cradle assembly should be checked for proper positioning using the manufacturer’s
centering instructions.

6.2 Ride Height Specifications
Ride height specifications are determined by the height of the vehicle to a point
specified by the manufacturer within specific tolerances.
Damage to vehicle suspension and a poor alignment can be caused when ride height
is not within the manufacturer’s specifications.
Toe Change
Front toe can change to an extreme toe-in or toe-out condition, depending on the
location of the steering arms, when the steering linkage is forced into a downward
operating position from sagging front coil springs. The result is heavy tire wear and
poor handling characteristics.
Camber (Side-Slip)
A small amount of sag in the springs will increase lateral movement of the wheels,
causing tires to slide laterally across the pavement. The result is extreme tire wear.
Shocks and Struts

Sagging springs will shorten the shock absorber causing the frame to be closer to the
rubber strike out bumper. The result is the car will “bottom out.”
Rear Springs
Caster and camber suffer the most when the rear springs are sagging. The result is
poor handling and tire wear.

Filename: Info.doc
Subject:
Author: Advertising Department
Keywords:
Comments:
Change Number: 226
Number of Pages: 8
7. Glossary
7.1 Alignment Types

Geometric Centerline Alignment
Thrust Line
Geometric
Centerline
Toe on each front wheel is measured and adjusted using the geometric centerline of
the vehicle as a reference.
Geometric centerline alignment has been used for many years and may provide a
satisfactory alignment if the rear wheels are positioned squarely with the geometric
centerline of the vehicle.
However, if the rear wheels of the vehicle (either solid axle or independent suspen-
sion) create a thrust line that is not parallel to the geometric centerline, the steering
wheel position may not be centered properly as the vehicle moves in a straight
direction.
WinAlign Operation Manual 7. Glossary • 331

Thrust Line Alignment
Thrust Line
Geometric
Centerline
Aligning the front wheels to the thrust line of a vehicle is a significant improvement
over aligning to the geometric centerline.
In the thrust line method, rear individual toe is measured (but not adjusted). The
thrust line created by the rear wheels is used as a reference for aligning the front
wheels.
As a result, the operator is assured of a straight steering wheel as the vehicle moves
straight ahead.
Total Four-Wheel Alignment
Centerline and
Thrust Line
Total four-wheel alignment is the ultimate wheel alignment service. Rear individual
toe is measured, then adjusted to the factory specifications. If adjusted correctly, the
thrust line of the rear wheels becomes parallel to the geometric centerline of the
vehicle.
The front wheels are then aligned to the rear wheel thrust line.
Total four-wheel alignment provides the ability to correct a dog-tracking condition and
assures a straight steering wheel as the vehicle moves in a straight line.
332 • 7. Glossary WinAlign Operation Manual

7.2 Alignment Angles and Measurements
This section provides definitions to terms used in the manual.
Camber
The angle formed by the inward or outward tilt of the top of the wheel, referenced to a
vertical line as viewed from the front. This angle is measured and displayed in
degrees. Camber is positive when the wheel is tilted outward at the top and is
negative when the wheel is tilted inward at the top.
Caster
The forward or rearward tilt of the steering axis in reference to a vertical line as
viewed from the side. This angle is measured and displayed in degrees. Caster is
positive when the top of the steering axis is tilted rearward and is negative when the
top of the steering axis is tilted forward.
Frame Angle
The angle (from a side view) formed by a horizontal line and a line drawn parallel to
the frame. Frame angle is positive when the frame is higher at the rear and is
negative when the frame is lower at the rear. The aligner does NOT calculate frame
angle.
Geometric Centerline
This is a line drawn through the midpoint of the front and rear axle.

Included Angle (I.A.)
The sum of S.A.I. and camber.
Individual Toe
The angle formed by a horizontal line drawn through a plane of one wheel referenced
to the reference line of the vehicle. Individual toe is measured in degrees but may be
displayed in degrees, inches or millimeters. Toe-in is when the horizontal lines
intersect in front of the wheel. Toe-out is when the horizontal lines intersect behind
the wheel.
Ride Height
The height of the vehicle to a point specified by the manufacturer within specific
tolerances.
Setback
The angle formed by the geometric centerline and a line drawn perpendicular to the
front axle. Setback is positive when the right wheel is behind the left wheel. Setback
is negative when the left wheel is behind the right wheel. A setback condition will not
affect the accuracy of the system.
Steering Axis Inclination (S.A.I.)
The angle formed by a line drawn through the upper and lower pivot points of the
steering axis and a vertical line as viewed from the front. S.A.I. is measured and
displayed in degrees.
334 • 7. Glossary WinAlign Operation Manual

Thrust Angle
The angle formed by the geometric centerline and the thrust line of an axle. This
angle is measured and displayed in degrees.
Thrust Line
The bisector of total toe angle of the axle.
Total Toe
The angle formed by two horizontal lines drawn through the planes of two wheels on
the same axle. Total toe is measured in degrees but may be displayed in degrees,
inches or millimeters. Toe-in is when the horizontal lines intersect in front of the
wheels. Toe-out is when the horizontal lines intersect behind the wheels.
Turning Angle
The difference in the angles of the front wheels in a turn.

Hunter Win Align Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hunter Win Align Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hunter Win Align Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main sections covered in the manual?

What are the main sections covered in the manual?

What safety precautions are outlined for using the alignment equipment?

What safety precautions are outlined for using the alignment equipment?

Form 3850T, 01-02

Supersedes Form 3850T, 09-00

 Copyright 1995- 2002 Hunter Engineering Company

WinAlign Software Operation Manual Contents • i

ii • Contents WinAlign Software Operation Manual

WinAlign Software Operation Manual Contents • iii

iv • Contents WinAlign Software Operation Manual

WinAlign Software Operation Manual Contents • v

vi • Contents WinAlign Software Operation Manual

WinAlign Software Operation Manual Contents • vii

viii • Contents WinAlign Software Operation Manual

Inside WinAlign Alignment Software

Automatic Bushing Calculator® Alignment Adjustment Feature

Inside Help Tips

WinAlign Software Operation Manual HELP Tips • ix

Using the Scroll Bar

Click on one of the scroll arrows.

x • HELP Tips WinAlign Software Operation Manual

The Table of Contents will appear.

A popup screen will appear. A key word or phrase can be entered

The path taken through the Help topics will be retraced.

Prints the current topic.

The topic will appear in the HELP window.

WinAlign Software Operation Manual HELP Tips • xi

1.2 System Requirements

NOTE: Systems which originally shipped with WinAlign 4.X or 5.0

1.3 For Your Safety

CAUTION: Hazards or unsafe practices, which could result in minor

WARNING: Hazards or unsafe practices, w hich could result in

WinAlign Software Operation Manual 1. Getting Started • 1

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Use caution when jacking the vehicle.

Wear non-slip safety footwear when performing an alignment.

Never stand on the aligner.

Do not wear jewelry or loose clothing when performing an alignment.

Wear proper back support when lifting or removing wheels.

Keep all instructions permanently with the unit.

Keep all decals, labels, and notices clean and visible.

Use equipment only as described in this manual.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

2 • 1. Getting Started WinAlign Software Operation Manual

WARNING: DO NOT ALTER THE ELECTRICAL PLUG. Plugging the

Precautions for Systems Equipped with HFSS Cordless Sensors

WARNING: This equipment has been tested and found to comply

WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approv ed by

Specific Precautions/Power Source

WinAlign Software Operation Manual 1. Getting Started • 3

This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. All repairs must be

PROVISIONS FOR LIFTING AND CARRYING:

These symbols appear on the equipment.

Earth ground terminal.

Protective conductor terminal.

OFF (supply) condition.

RISK of electrical shock.

Not intended for connection to public telecommunications network.

4 • 1. Getting Started WinAlign Software Operation Manual